Honeywell Universal Digital Controller Udc 3300 Users Manual

UDC 3300 to the manual 91c200c6-83ea-41d6-9a2d-4cbdebe83b07

2015-01-23

: Honeywell Honeywell-Universal-Digital-Controller-Udc-3300-Users-Manual-262617 honeywell-universal-digital-controller-udc-3300-users-manual-262617 honeywell pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 294 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Sensing and Control

UDC 3300

Universal Digital Controller

Product Manual

51-52-25-55D

4/00

ii UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Revision D – April, 2000

WARRANTY/REMEDY

Honeywell warrants goods of its manufacture as being free of defective materials and faulty

workmanship. Contact your local sales office for warranty information. If warranted goods are

returned to Honeywell during the period of coverage, Honeywell will repair or replace without

charge those items it finds defective. The foregoing is Buyer’s sole remedy and is in lieu of all

other warranties, expressed or implied, including those of merchantability and fitness for a

particular purpose. Specifications may change without notice. The information we supply is

believed to be accurate and reliable as of this printing. However, we assume no responsibility for

its use.

While we provide application assistance personally, through our literature and the Honeywell web

site, it is up to the customer to determine the suitability of the product in the application.

Sensing and Control

Honeywell

11 West Spring Street

Freeport, Illinois 61032

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual iii

About This Document

Abstract

This manual describes the installation, configuration, operation, and maintenance of the UDC3300

Controller.

References

Publication Title Publication Number

UDC 3300 Limit Controller 51-52-25-56

UDC 3000/UDC 3300/UDC5000/UDC6000U/DC6300

RS422/485 Communications Option Manual 51-51-25-35

UDC 3000/3300 DMCS Communications Option Section of the Gateway Manual 82-50-10-23

Modbus® RTU Serial Communications User Manual 51-52-25-66

Modbus® RTU Serial Communications User Manual Configuration Interface for

UDC 3300 51-52-25-70

UDC 3300 Controller Specification Sheet 51-52-03-23

UDC 3000 Modbus 485RTU Communications Option 51-52-25-38

How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe Electrical Noise Environments 51-52-05-01

Contacts

World Wide Web

The following lists Honeywell’s World Wide Web sites that will be of interest to our customers.

Honeywell Organization WWW Address (URL)

Corporate http://www.honeywell.com

Sensing and Control http://www.honeywell.com/sensing

International http://www.honeywell.com/Business/global.asp

Telephone

Organization Phone Number

United States and Canada Honeywell 1-800-423-9883 Tech. Support

1-888-423-9883 Q&A Faxback

(TACFACS)

1-800-525-7439 Service

Asia Pacific Honeywell Asia Pacific

Hong Kong (852) 2829-8298

Europe Honeywell PACE, Brussels, Belgium [32-2] 728-2111

Latin America Honeywell, Sunrise, Florida U.S.A. (854) 845-2600

iv UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Symbol Definitions

The following table lists those symbols used in this document to denote certain conditions.

Symbol Definition

This CAUTION symbol on the equipment refers the user to the Product Manual for

additional information. This symbol appears next to required information in the

manual.

WARNING

PERSONAL INJURY: Risk of electrical shock. This symbol warns the user of a

potential shock hazard where HAZARDOUS LIVE voltages greater than 30 Vrms,

42.4 Vpeak, or 60 Vdc may be accessible. Failure to comply with these

instructions could result in death or serious injury.

ATTENTION, Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) hazards. Observe precautions for

handling electrostatic sensitive devices

Protective Earth (PE) terminal. Provided for connection of the protective earth (green

or green/yellow) supply system conductor.

Functional earth terminal. Used for non-safety purposes such as noise immunity

improvement. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded to protective earth at the

source of supply in accordance with national local electrical code requirements.

Earth Ground. Functional earth connection. NOTE: This connection shall be bonded

to Protective earth at the source of supply in accordance with national and local

electrical code requirements.

Chassis Ground. Identifies a connection to the chassis or frame of the equipment

shall be bonded to Protective Earth at the source of supply in accordance with

national and local electrical code requirements.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual v

Table of Contents

SECTION 1 – OVERVIEW.................................................................................................. 1

1.1 Introduction...................................................................................................... 1

1.2 Operator Interface ........................................................................................... 3

SECTION 2 – INSTALLATION........................................................................................... 7

2.1 Overview.......................................................................................................... 7

2.2 Model Number Interpretation......................................................................... 12

2.3 Mounting........................................................................................................ 13

2.4 Wiring ............................................................................................................ 15

2.5 Wiring Diagrams............................................................................................ 18

2.6 Control and Alarm Relay Contact Information............................................... 34

SECTION 3 – CONFIGURATION .................................................................................... 35

3.1 Overview........................................................................................................ 35

3.2 Configuration Prompts................................................................................... 36

3.3 How To Get Started....................................................................................... 38

3.4 Configuration Tips ......................................................................................... 39

3.5 Configuration Procedure................................................................................ 40

3.6 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group..................................................... 42

3.7 Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group (Cascade or Two Loops.............. 44

3.8 SP Ramp, SP Rate, or SP Programming Set Up Group ............................... 45

3.9 Accutune Set Up Group................................................................................. 47

3.10 Algorithm Data Set Up Group........................................................................ 49

3.11 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group................................................. 53

3.12 Input 1 Parameters Set Up Group................................................................. 54

3.13 Input 2 Parameters Set Up Group................................................................. 56

3.14 Input 3 Parameters Set Up Group................................................................. 57

3.15 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group .................................................... 58

3.16 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group .................................................... 60

3.17 Options Set Up Group ................................................................................... 62

3.18 Communications Set Up Group..................................................................... 64

3.19 Alarms Set Up Group .................................................................................... 66

3.20 Display Parameters Set Up Group ................................................................ 69

3.21 Calibration Group .......................................................................................... 70

3.22 Maintenance Set Up Group........................................................................... 71

3.23 Status Group ................................................................................................. 72

3.24 Configuration Record Sheet Basic Model: DC330B-XX-XXX

DMCS Model: DC330D-XX-XXX................................................................... 73

3.25 Configuration Record Sheet Expanded Model: DC330E-XX-XXX .............. 75

vi UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

SECTION 4 – CONFIGURATION PROMPT DEFINITIONS ............................................ 79

4.1 Overview ....................................................................................................... 79

4.2 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group..................................................... 80

4.3 Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group..................................................... 84

4.4 Setpoint Ramp/Rate/Programming Set Up Group ........................................ 85

4.5 Accutune Set Up Group ................................................................................ 88

4.6 Algorithm Data Set Up Group........................................................................ 92

4.7 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group............................................... 109

4.8 Input 1 Parameters Set Up Group............................................................... 112

4.9 Input 2 Parameters Set Up Group............................................................... 116

4.10 Input 3 Parameters Set Up Group............................................................... 117

4.11 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group .................................................. 118

4.12 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group .................................................. 124

4.13 Options Set Up Group ................................................................................. 129

4.14 Communications Set Up Group................................................................... 135

4.15 Alarms Set Up Group .................................................................................. 139

4.16 Display Parameters Set Up Group .............................................................. 143

4.17 Calibration Data........................................................................................... 144

4.18 Maintenance Group..................................................................................... 144

4.19 Status Test Data.......................................................................................... 146

SECTION 5 – OPERATION............................................................................................ 147

5.1 Overview ..................................................................................................... 147

5.2 How to Power Up the Controller.................................................................. 148

5.3 Entering a Security Code............................................................................. 150

5.4 Monitoring Your Controller .......................................................................... 151

5.5 Start-up Procedure ...................................................................................... 155

5.6 Operating Modes......................................................................................... 156

5.7 Setpoints...................................................................................................... 160

5.8 Setpoint Ramp Rate.................................................................................... 163

5.9 Single Setpoint Ramp.................................................................................. 164

5.10 Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants.......................................................... 168

5.11 Alarm Setpoints ........................................................................................... 171

5.12 Two Loops of Control Overview .................................................................. 172

5.13 Configuring Two Loops of Control............................................................... 177

5.14 Monitoring Two Loops of Control ................................................................ 180

5.15 Operating Two Loops of Control ................................................................. 181

5.16 Three Position Step Control Algorithm ........................................................ 182

5.17 Input Math Algorithms.................................................................................. 183

5.18 Digital Input Option (Remote Switching)...................................................... 186

5.19 Auto/Manual Station .................................................................................... 190

5.20 Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression .................................................................... 193

5.21 Accutune...................................................................................................... 194

5.22 Carbon Potential.......................................................................................... 202

5.23 HealthWatch................................................................................................ 204

SECTION 6 – SETPOINT RAMP/SOAK PROGRAMMING OPTION............................ 205

6.1 Overview ..................................................................................................... 205

6.2 Program Contents ....................................................................................... 206

6.3 Drawing a Ramp/Soak Profile ..................................................................... 209

6.4 Entering the Setpoint Program Data ........................................................... 211

6.5 Run/Monitor the Program ............................................................................ 214

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual vii

SECTION 7 – INPUT CALIBRATION ............................................................................ 219

7.1 Overview...................................................................................................... 219

7.2 Minimum and Maximum Range Values....................................................... 220

7.3 Preliminary Information................................................................................ 221

7.4 Input #1, #2, or #3 Set Up Wiring ................................................................ 223

7.5 Input #1, #2, or #3 Calibration Procedure.................................................... 229

7.6 Restoring Factory Calibration...................................................................... 231

SECTION 8 – OUTPUT CALIBRATION ........................................................................ 233

8.1 Overview...................................................................................................... 233

8.2 Current Proportional Output Calibration ...................................................... 234

8.3 Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output Calibration.............. 236

8.4 Auxiliary Output Calibration......................................................................... 240

SECTION 9 – TROUBLESHOOTING / SERVICE ......................................................... 243

9.1 Overview...................................................................................................... 243

9.2 Troubleshooting Aids................................................................................... 245

9.3 Power-up Tests ........................................................................................... 247

9.4 Status Tests................................................................................................. 248

9.5 Background Tests........................................................................................ 250

9.6 Controller Failure Symptoms....................................................................... 252

9.7 Troubleshooting Procedures ....................................................................... 253

9.8 Parts Replacement Procedures................................................................... 261

9.9 Maintenance................................................................................................ 270

SECTION 10 – PARTS LIST.......................................................................................... 271

10.1 Exploded View............................................................................................. 271

SECTION 11 – APPENDIX A – MANUAL TUNING....................................................... 273

11.1 Overview...................................................................................................... 273

11.2 Time, Position, or Current Proportional Simplex Control............................. 274

11.3 Time Proportional Duplex or Current Proportional Duplex Control.............. 276

11.4 Two Sets of Tuning Parameters for Single Output Operation ..................... 276

viii UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Figures

Figure 1-1 Operator Interface Displays and Indicators......................................................................3

Figure 2-1 Model Number Interpretation .........................................................................................12

Figure 2-2 Dimensions ....................................................................................................................13

Figure 2-3 Mounting Method ........................................................................................................... 14

Figure 2-4 Composite Wiring Diagram ............................................................................................ 18

Figure 2-5 Line Voltage Wiring ........................................................................................................19

Figure 2-6 Input #1/Input #2 Connections ....................................................................................... 20

Figure 2-7 Two HLAI Replace 2nd LLAI Connections.....................................................................21

Figure 2-8 Electromechanical Relay Output—Model DC330X-EE-XXX..........................................22

Figure 2-9 Solid State Relay Output—Model DC330X-AA-XX........................................................ 23

Figure 2-10 10-amp Solid State Relay Output—Model DC330X-SS-XX...........................................24

Figure 2-11 Open Collector Output—Model DC330X-TT-XXX .........................................................25

Figure 2-12 Current Output—Current /Time Duplex, Time/Current Duplex, Position

Proportional, or Three Position Step Control .................................................................26

Figure 2-13 Auxiliary Output and Three Relay Outputs..................................................................... 27

Figure 2-14 Position Proportional Output or Three Position Step—Models

DC330X-EE-XXX-X2, DC330X-AA-XXX-X2.................................................................. 28

Figure 2-15 Auxiliary Output Connections—Models DC330X-XX-2XX, DC330X-XX-5XX................29

Figure 2-16 Digital Inputs Connections—Model DC330X-XX-XX3.................................................... 29

Figure 2-17 RS422/485/Modbus Communications Option Connections ...........................................30

Figure 2-18 DMCS Communications Option Connections ................................................................31

Figure 2-19 Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA 2-wire Transmitter Using Open Collector

Alarm 2 Output—Model DC330X-XT-XXX.....................................................................32

Figure 2-20 Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA 2-wire Transmitter Using Auxiliary Output—

Model DC330X-XX-2XX or DC330X-XX-5XX................................................................33

Figure 3-1 Overview of UDC 3300 Prompt Hierarchy .....................................................................36

Figure 4-1 Example of Mass Flow Compensation using Multiplier/Divider Algorithm....................102

Figure 4-2 Example of Eight Segment Characterizer....................................................................106

Figure 5-1 Operator Interface........................................................................................................ 151

Figure 5-2 Functional Overview Block Diagram of a Single Loop (Loop #1) or Dual

Loop Controller (Loop #1 and Loop #2) ....................................................................... 173

Figure 5-3 Functional Overview Block Diagram of Internal Cascade of a 2-loop Controller.......... 174

Figure 5-4 Hi/Lo Override Selector................................................................................................175

Figure 5-5 Auto/Manual Station and Backup Control Feature.......................................................190

Figure 5-6 Carbon Potential Control.............................................................................................. 203

Figure 6-1 Ramp/Soak Profile Example ........................................................................................209

Figure 6-2 Program Record Sheet ................................................................................................210

Figure 7-1 Inputs #1, #2, and #3 Wiring Terminals .......................................................................221

Figure 7-2 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath................................. 223

Figure 7-3 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Precision Resistor................... 224

Figure 7-4 Wiring Connections for RTD ........................................................................................225

Figure 7-5 Wiring Connections for Radiamatic, Millivolts, or Volts (except 0 to 10 Volts) .............226

Figure 7-6 Wiring Connections for 0 to 10 Volt Inputs................................................................... 227

Figure 7-7 Wiring Connections for 4 to 20 mA inputs.................................................................... 228

Figure 8-1 Wiring Connections for Calibrating Current Proportional Output .................................234

Figure 8-2 Wiring Connections for Calibrating Auxiliary Output ....................................................240

Figure 9-1 Chassis Removal ......................................................................................................... 262

Figure 9-2 Display/Keyboard Replacement................................................................................... 263

Figure 9-3 Removing the Printed Wiring Boards ...........................................................................264

Figure 9-4 Printed Wiring Board Identification............................................................................... 265

Figure 10-1 UDC 3300 Exploded View............................................................................................ 271

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual ix

Tables

Table 1-1 Function of Keys...............................................................................................................4

Table 2-1 Specifications ...................................................................................................................8

Table 2-2 Procedure for Mounting the Controller ...........................................................................14

Table 2-3 Permissible Wiring Bundling...........................................................................................16

Table 2-4 Input 2 Jumper Selections..............................................................................................21

Table 2-5 Universal Output Wiring Functionality and Restrictions for Figure 2-12.........................26

Table 2-6 Universal Output Wiring Functionality and Restrictions for Figure 2-13.........................27

Table 2-7 Control Relay Contact Information .................................................................................34

Table 2-8 Alarm Relay Contact Information ...................................................................................34

Table 3-1 Configuration Tips ..........................................................................................................39

Table 3-2 Configuration Procedure ................................................................................................40

Table 3-3 Tuning Group Function Prompts ....................................................................................42

Table 3-4 Tuning Loop 2 Group Function ......................................................................................44

Table 3-5 SP Ramp Group Function Prompts................................................................................45

Table 3-6 Accutune Group Function Prompts ................................................................................48

Table 3-7 Algorithm Group Function Prompts................................................................................49

Table 3-8 Output Algorithm Group Function Prompts....................................................................53

Table 3-9 Input 1 Group Function Prompts ....................................................................................54

Table 3-10 Input 2 Group Function Prompts ....................................................................................56

Table 3-11 Input 3 Group Function ..................................................................................................57

Table 3-12 Control Group Function Prompts ...................................................................................58

Table 3-13 Control 2 Group Function Prompts ................................................................................60

Table 3-14 Options Group Function Prompts...................................................................................62

Table 3-15 Communications Group Function Prompts ....................................................................64

Table 3-16 Alarms Group Function Prompts....................................................................................66

Table 3-17 Display Group Function Prompts ...................................................................................69

Table 3-18 Maintenance Group Function Prompts ..........................................................................71

Table 4-1 Tuning Group Prompt Definitions...................................................................................80

Table 4-2 Loop 2 Tuning Group Prompt.........................................................................................84

Table 4-3 Setpoint Ramp/Rate Group Definitions ..........................................................................85

Table 4-4 Accutune Group Definitions............................................................................................88

Table 4-5 Algorithm Group Definitions ...........................................................................................92

Table 4-6 Output Algorithm Group Definitions .............................................................................109

Table 4-7 Input 1 Group Definitions .............................................................................................112

Table 4-8 Input 2 Group Definitions .............................................................................................116

Table 4-9 Input 3 Group Definitions .............................................................................................117

Table 4-10 Control Group Definitions.............................................................................................118

Table 4-11 Control 2 Group Definitions..........................................................................................124

Table 4-12 Options Group Definitions ............................................................................................129

Table 4-13 Communications Group Definitions..............................................................................135

Table 4-14 Alarms Group Definitions .............................................................................................139

Table 4-15 Display Group Definitions.............................................................................................143

Table 4-16 Maintenance Group Definitions....................................................................................144

Table 5-1 Power Up Diagnostic Tests..........................................................................................148

Table 5-2 Procedure for Testing the Displays and Keys ..............................................................149

Table 5-3 Procedure for Entering a Security Code ......................................................................150

Figure 5-1 Operator Interface........................................................................................................151

Table 5-4 Lower Display Key Parameter......................................................................................153

x UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Table 5-5 Error Messages............................................................................................................154

Table 5-6 Procedure for Starting Up the Controller......................................................................155

Table 5-7 Operating Mode Definitions..........................................................................................156

Table 5-8 Changing Operating Modes .........................................................................................157

Table 5-9 Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode....................................................158

Table 5-10 Procedure for Selecting the Local Setpoint Source......................................................160

Table 5-11 Procedure for Changing the Local Setpoints ...............................................................161

Table 5-12 Procedure for Enabling (or Disabling) the Remote Setpoint ........................................162

Table 5-13 Setpoint Selection Indication........................................................................................162

Table 5-14 Procedure for Configuring a Setpoint Ramp ................................................................164

Table 5-15 Procedure for Running a Setpoint Ramp .....................................................................166

Table 5-16 Procedure for Selecting Two Sets of Tuning Constants ..............................................168

Table 5-17 Procedure for Setting Switchover Values.....................................................................169

Table 5-18 Procedure for Setting Tuning Constant Values............................................................169

Table 5-19 Procedure for Switching PID SETS from the Keyboard...............................................170

Table 5-20 Procedure for Displaying or Changing the Alarm Setpoints.........................................171

Table 5-21 Control Loop Selections ...............................................................................................172

Table 5-22 Two-loop Functionality and Restrictions (Model DC330E-EE-2XX or

Model DC330E-EE-5XX)..............................................................................................175

Table 5-23 Two-loop Functionality and Restrictions (Model DC330E-KE-2XX or

Model DC330E-KE-5XX)..............................................................................................176

Table 5-24 Procedure for Selecting 2-loop Algorithm ....................................................................177

Table 5-25 Procedure for Selecting Output Algorithm....................................................................177

Table 5-26 Procedure for Selecting Control Parameters ...............................................................178

Table 5-27 Procedure for Selecting Tuning Parameters................................................................179

Table 5-28 Digital Display Indication—Two Loops.........................................................................180

Table 5-29 Procedure for Displaying the 3PSTEP Motor Position .................................................182

Table 5-30 Digital Input Option Action on Contact Closure............................................................186

Table 5-31 Digital Input Combinations “DIG IN1” or “DIG IN2”......................................................188

Table 5-32 Digital Inputs 1 and 2 Combination ..............................................................................189

Table 5-33 Auto/Manual Station Mode Configuration Procedure...................................................191

Table 5-34 Accutune Rules and Regulations .................................................................................195

Table 5-35 Procedure for Starting TUNE (Demand) Tuning ..........................................................196

Table 5-36 Procedure for Using TUNE at Start-up for Duplex .......................................................197

Table 5-37 Procedure for Using SP Tuning at Start-up..................................................................198

Table 5-38 Procedure for Using SP Tuning at Start-up for Duplex ................................................199

Table 5-39 Accutune* Error Prompt Definitions .............................................................................201

Table 6-1 Setpoint Program Data Entry Procedure......................................................................211

Table 6-2 Prompt Hierarchy and Available Selections .................................................................212

Table 6-3 Run/Monitor Functions.................................................................................................214

Table 6-4 Procedures for Changing a Running Setpoint Program...............................................217

Table 7-1 Voltage and Resistance Equivalents for 0% and 100% Range Values........................220

Table 7-2 Equipment Needed ......................................................................................................222

Table 7-3 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using an Ice Bath........................223

Table 7-4 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using a Precision Resistor ..........224

Table 7-5 Input #1, #2, or #3 Calibration Procedure ....................................................................229

Table 7-6 Restoring Factory Calibration.......................................................................................231

Table 8-1 Set Up Wiring Procedure Current Proportional Output ................................................234

Table 8-2 Current Proportional Output Calibration Procedure .....................................................235

Table 8-3 Position Proportional and 3 Position Step Output Calibration Procedure ....................237

Table 8-4 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Auxiliary Output..............................................................240

Table 8-5 Auxiliary Output Calibration Procedure ........................................................................241

Table 9-1 Error Message Prompts ...............................................................................................245

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual xi

Table 9-2 Procedure for Identifying the Software Version............................................................246

Table 9-3 Power-up Tests............................................................................................................247

Table 9-4 Procedure for Displaying the Status Tests Results......................................................248

Table 9-5 Status Tests .................................................................................................................249

Table 9-6 Background Tests ........................................................................................................250

Table 9-7 Controller Failure Symptoms........................................................................................252

Table 9-8 Troubleshooting Power Failure Symptoms ..................................................................253

Table 9-9 Troubleshooting Current Proportional Output Failure ..................................................254

Table 9-10 Troubleshooting Position Proportional Output Failure..................................................255

Table 9-11 Troubleshooting Time Proportional Output Failure ......................................................256

Table 9-12 Troubleshooting Time/Current or Current/Time Proportional Output Failure...............257

Table 9-13 Troubleshooting Alarm Relay Output Failure ...............................................................258

Table 9-14 Troubleshooting a Keyboard Failure ............................................................................259

Table 9-15 Troubleshooting a Communications Failure.................................................................260

Table 9-16 How to Remove the Chassis........................................................................................262

Table 9-17 Display/Keyboard Assembly Replacement Procedure.................................................263

Table 9-18 Printed Wiring Board Removal from Chassis...............................................................264

Table 9-19 Second Input Board Replacement Procedure..............................................................266

Table 9-20 Power Input Board Replacement Procedure................................................................266

Table 9-21 Digital Input Board Replacement Procedure................................................................267

Table 9-22 Aux.Out/Communications Board Replacement Procedure ..........................................268

Table 9-23 MCU/Output Board Replacement Procedure...............................................................269

Table 10-1 Parts Identification........................................................................................................272

Table 10-2 Parts Not Shown ..........................................................................................................272

Table 11-1 Manual Tuning Procedure for Simplex Control ............................................................274

Table 11-2 Manual Tuning Formulas .............................................................................................275

xii UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 1

Section 1 – Overview

1.1 Introduction

Function The UDC 3300 is a microprocessor-based stand alone controller. It

combines the highest degree of functionality and operating simplicity

offered in a 1/4 DIN size controller.

With a typical accuracy of ± 0.20 % of span, the UDC 3300 is an ideal

controller for regulating temperature and other process variables in

numerous heating and cooling applications, in metal working, food, and

pharmaceuticals, and testing and environmental work.

Easy to read displays The dedicated vacuum fluorescent displays with multi-language prompts

make the operator interface easy to read, understand and operate.

Programmed sequences of displays assure quick and accurate entry of all

configurable parameters.

Easy to operate Simple keystrokes let you select input and range configuration, set the

operating parameters that meet your process control needs now, and

change them later to meet new ones.

The tactile keyboard provides positive operator feedback. Self diagnostics,

fault tolerant design and keyboard security provide maximum assurance

of trouble-free operation.

Mount anywhere The UDC is industrial control equipment that must be panel mounted.

The wiring terminals must be enclosed within the panel. The UDC is

environmentally hardened and, when suitably enclosed, can be mounted

virtually anywhere in plant or factory; on the wall, in a panel, or even on

the process machine. It withstands ambient temperatures up to 55 °C

(133 °F) and resists the effects of vibration and mechanical shock.

CE Conformity (Europe) This product is in conformity with the protection requirements of the

following European Council Directives: 73/23/EEC, the Low Voltage

Directive, and 89/336/EEC, the EMC Directive. Conformity of this

product with any other “CE Mark” Directive(s) shall not be assumed.

Product Classification: Class I: Permanently connected, panel-mounted

Industrial Control Equipment with protective earthing (grounding).

(EN61010-1).

Enclosure Rating: Panel-mounted equipment, IP 00. This controller must

be panel-mounted. Terminals must be enclosed within the panel. Front

panel IP 65 (IEC 529).

Installation Category (Overvoltage Category): Category II: Energy-

consuming equipment supplied from the fixed installation, local level

appliances, and Industrial Control Equipment. (EN61010-1)

Pollution Degree: Pollution Degree 2: Normally non-conductive pollution

with occasional conductivity caused by condensation. (Ref. IEC 664-1)

2 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

EMC Classification: Group 1, Class A, ISM Equipment (EN55011,

emissions), Industrial Equipment (EN50082-2, immunity)

Method of EMC Assessment: Technical File (TF)

Declaration of Conformity: 51309602-000

Deviation from the installation conditions specified in this manual, and

the special conditions for CE conformity in Section 2.1, may invalidate

this product’s conformity with the Low Voltage and EMC Directives.

ATTENTION: The emission limits of EN 50081-2 are designed to provide reasonable

protection against harmful interference when this equipment is operated in an

industrial environment. Operation of this equipment in a residential area may cause

harmful interference. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio

frequency energy and may cause interference to radio and television reception when

the equipment is used closer than 30 meters (98 feet) to the antenna(e). In special

cases, when highly susceptible apparatus is used in close proximity, the user may

have to employ additional mitigating measures to further reduce the electromagnetic

emissions of this equipment.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 3

1.2 Operator Interface

Displays and indicators Figure 1-1 shows the operator interface and defines the displays and

indicators. The function of the keys is shown in Table 1-1.

Figure 1-1 Operator Interface Displays and Indicators

ALM

RSP

OUT

1 2 3

1 2

1 2 F C MAN

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

SET UP

LOWER

DISPLAY MANUAL

AUTO

SETPOINT

SELECT

RUN

HOLD

DI 3300

SP 3300

Indicator definition when lit

ALM - Alarm conditions exist

DI - Digital input active

OUT - Control relay 1 or 2 on

Upper Display - six characters

• Normal Operation - four digits dedicated to display the process variable

• Configuration Mode - displays parameter value or selection

Lower Display - eight characters

• Normal Operation - displays operating parameters and values

• Configuration Mode - displays function groups and parameters

MAN - controller in manual mode

A - controller in automatic mode

F - °Fahrenheit being used

C - °Centigrade being used

Indicator definition when lit

Deviation Bargraph

• Center bar indicates PV is

within ±1% of setpoint.

• Next bar will light if PV is

between ±1% but less than

±2% in deviation.

• If PV is equal to or greater than

±10% deviation, the center bar

plus all ten deviation bars will

light.

MAN and A off —

communications

option active

Keys - See Table 1-1

T - Accutune in progress

t - PV tune in progress

L" - Loop 2 display

I - Cascade control

C - Computer setpoint active

O - Output override active

R - Run SP ramp/program

H - Hold SP ramp/program

RSP - Remote SP or SP2 active

24157

3 - LSP 3 active

4 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Function of keys Table 1-1 shows each key on the operator interface and defines its

function.

Table 1-1 Function of Keys

Key Function

SET UP •Places the controller in the Configuration Set Up group

select mode. Sequentially displays Set Up groups and

allows the FUNCTION key to display individual functions in

each Set Up group.

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2 •Used in conjunction with the SET UP key to select the

individual functions of a selected Configuration Set Up

group.

•Used to switch the display between Loop 1 and Loop 2

when the controller has a 2-Loop or Cascade configuration.

•Used during field calibration procedure.

LOWER

DISPLAY •Selects an operating parameter to be shown in the

lower display:

OUT = Output (Note 1)

OT2 = Output 2 (Cascade or 2-Loop

applications

SP = Local Setpoint (also current SP value

when using SP ramp) (Note 2)

2SP = Local Setpoint 2 (Note 2)

3SP = Local Setpoint 3 (Note 2)

RSP = Remote Setpoint

1IN = Input 1—when used with combinational

input algorithms

2IN = Input 2

3IN = Input 3

POS =3 Position Step motor position when

slidewire is connected

CSP = Computer Setpoint Override

DEV = Deviation

PIDSETX = Tuning Parameter Set X=1 or 2 (Note 3)

2PIDSETX = Loop 2 Tuning Parameter Set X=1 or 2

ET_XX.XX = Elapsed Time

TR_XX.XX = Time Remaining

RAMPXXOM = Minutes Remaining in Setpoint Ramp

*Or estimated Three Position Step motor position when no slidewire

exists.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 5

Key Function

LOWER

DISPLAY 1PV =For Cascade or 2 Loops

2PV =For Cascade or 2 Loops

AUX =Auxiliary Output

OC1 =Characterized Output 1

OC2 =Characterized Output 2

SPn = Setpoint Now (for setpoint rate)

• (Sigma) =Current Totalizer Value

BIA = Output Bias/Manual Reset Value

TUNE OFF =Appears when Limit Cycle tuning is disabled

TUNE RUN =Press ▲ and LOWER DISPLAY to initiate

Limit Cycle tuning.

Display will read TUNE RUN.

ToBEGIN =Reset SP Program to start of first segment

OTI = Internal Loop 1 Output Value is being

displayed (Override has been selected and

Loop 1 is in Automatic mode.)

Note 1: Value can be changed if in manual mode

Note 2: Value can be changed via increment/decrement keys.

Note 3: The selected set can be changed via increment/decrement

keys.

MANUAL

AUTO •Alternately selects:

AUTO Lower display automatically displays setpoint

value in engineering units.

MAN Lower display automatically indicates output in %.

SETPOINT

SELECT •Hold key down to cycle through configured setpoints.

RUN

HOLD •Alternate action switch initiates or holds the Setpoint Ramp

or Setpoint Program.

•Acknowledges a latched alarm 1.

▲•Increases the selected parameter value.

▼•Decreases the selected parameter value.

6 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 7

Section 2 – Installation

2.1 Overview

Introduction Installation of the UDC 3300 Controller consists of mounting and wiring

the controller according to the instructions given in this section.

Read the pre-installation information, check the model number

interpretation and become familiar with your model selections, then

proceed with installation.

What’s in this section? This section contains the following information:

Topic See Page

2.1 Overview

Specifications 7

2.2 Model Number Interpretation 12

2.3 Mounting 13

2.4 Wiring 15

2.5 Wiring Diagrams

Composite Wiring Diagram

Line Voltage

Input #1/Input #2

Two HLAI

Time Proportional Output

Electromechanical

Solid State

10-amp Solid State

Open Collector

Current Output/Universal Output

Two Current or Two Relay

One Current (Auxiliary) and Three Relay

Position Proportional Output

Auxiliary Output

Digital Inputs

Communications

RS422/485/Modbus

DMCS

Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA 2-wire Transmitter

Using Open Collector Alarm 2 Output

Using Auxiliary Output

2.6 Control and Alarm Relay Contact Information 34

8 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Pre-installation

information If the controller has not been removed from its shipping carton, inspect

the carton for damage and remove the controller. Inspect the unit for any

obvious shipping damage and report any damage due to transit to the

carrier.

Make sure that the carton with the controller includes

• a bag containing mounting hardware and

• a bag containing input resistors.

Check that the model number shown on the inside of the case agrees with

what you have ordered.

CE conformity special

conditions (Europe) Shielded twisted pair cables are required for all Analog I/O, Process

Variable, RTD, Thermocouple, dc millivolt, low level signal, 4-20 mA,

Digital I/O, and computer interface circuits. Refer to the Severe Electrical

Noise Environments document (51-52-05-01) for additional information.

Specifications We recommend that you review the specifications and adhere to the

operating limits listed in Table 2-1 when you install your controller.

Table 2-1 Specifications

Design

Input Accuracy ± 0.20 % of span typical (± 1 digit for display)

Field calibratable to ± 0.05 % of span typical

15 bit resolution typical

Sampling Rate Inputs sampled six times a second

Temperature Stability ± 0.01 % of Full Scale/°C change typical

Input Signal Failure

Protection Thermocouple Inputs: Upscale or downscale burnout

Burnout Current: 0.13 microamps

Failsafe Output Level: Configurable 0-100 %

Input Impedance 4-20 Milliampere Input: 250 ohms

0-10 Volt Input: 200K ohms

All Other: 10 megohms

Maximum Lead Wire

Resistance Thermocouples: 100 ohms/leg

100, 200, and 500 RTD: 100 ohms/leg

100 ohm Low RTD: 10 ohms/leg

Stray Rejection Common Mode

AC (50 or 60 Hz): 120 dB (with maximum source impedance of 100 ohms) or ± 1 LSB

(least significant bit) whichever is greater with line voltage applied.

DC: 120 dB (with maximum source impedance of 100 ohms) or a ±1 LSB whichever is

greater with 120 Vdc applied.

DC (to 1 KHz): 80 dB (with maximum source of impedance of 100 ohms) or ±1 LSB

whichever is greater with 50 Vac applied.

Normal Mode

AC (50 or 60 Hz): 60 dB (with 100 % span peak-to-peak maximum)

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 9

Design (continued)

Isolation (Functional) AC Power: Is electrically isolated from all other inputs and outputs to withstand a HIPOT

potential of 1900 Vdc for 2 seconds per Annex K of EN61010-1.

Analog Inputs and Outputs: Are isolated from each other and all other circuits at 850 Vdc

for 2 seconds.

Digital Input and Digital Output: Are isolated from all other circuits at 850 Vdc for 2

seconds.

Relay Contacts: With a working of 115/230 Vac, isolated from each other and all other

circuits at 345 Vdc for 2 seconds.

Alarm Outputs One SPDT electromechanical relay.

A second alarm is available using the second control relay. This is not available with Relay

Duplex, Position Proportional, or Three Position Step control.

Alarm Relay Contacts Rating

Resistive Load: 5 ampere at 120 Vac or 30 Vdc, 2.5 A at 240 Vac.

Controller Output

Types Current Output (Isolated)

Range can be set anywhere between 0 to 21 mA, and as direct or reverse action.

Resolution: 11 bits for 0 to 21 mA

Accuracy: 0.5 % full scale

Temperature Stability: 0.1 % F.S./°C

Load Resistance: 0 to 1000 ohms

Electromechanical Relays (One or Two)

SPDT contacts. Both Normally Open and Normally Closed contacts are brought out to the

rear terminals.

Internally socketed

Resistive Load: 5 amps @ 120 Vac or 30 Vdc, 2.5A at 240 Vac

Inductive Load: 50 VA @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac

Motor: 1/6 H.P.

Solid State Relays (One or Two)

SPST solid state contacts consisting of a triac N.O. output.

Internally socketed

Resistive Load: 1.0 amp @ 25 °C and 120 or 240 Vac

0.5 amp @ 55 °C and 120 or 240 Vac

Inductive Load: 50 VA @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac

Minimum Load: 20 milliamps

Open Collector Outputs (One or Two)

Maximum Sink Current: 20 mA

Overload Protection: 100 mA

Internally powered @ 30 Vdc

Opto-isolated from all other circuits except current output, but not from each other.

Socketed jumper assembly replaces relay.

Solid State Relays (10 amps)

One or two externally mounted SPST triac N.O. outputs for use with open collector outputs.

Resistive Load: 15 amps @ 25 °C and 120 or 240 Vac

10 amps @ 55 °C and 120 or 240 Vac

Inductive Load: 50 VA @ 120 Vac or 240 Vac

Motor Rating: 1 HP @ 25 °C

0.75 HP @ 55 °C

Controller Output

Algorithms See Section 4.7.

10 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Design (continued)

Digital Inputs

(Optional) (Isolated) +15 Vdc source for external dry contacts or isolated solid state contacts. The

Digital Input option detects the state of external contacts for either of the two inputs.

On contact closure the controller will respond according to how each digital input is

configured. Opening contact causes return to previous state.

Auxiliary Linear

Output (Optional)

(Isolated)

21 mA dc maximum into a negative or positive grounded load or non-grounded load of 0 to

1000 ohms.

Output range can be set anywhere between 0 mA to 21 mA, and as direct or reverse

action. It can be configured to represent either Input, PV, Setpoint, Deviation, or Control

output. The range of the auxiliary output, as a function of the selected variable, can be

scaled. This output can be used as a second current output for current duplex outputs.

Resolution: 12 bits over 0 mA to 21 mA

Accuracy: 0.05 % of full scale

Temperature Stability: 0.0075 % F.S./°C

Load Resistance: 0 to 1000

Communications

Interface (Optional)

DMCS Baud Rate: 19200 baud

Length of Link: 4000 ft. maximum

Link Characteristics: Two-wire, multi-drop proprietary protocol, 31 drops maximum

RS422/485 ASCII Baud Rate: 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200 baud selectable

Parity: Odd or Even

Length of Link: 4000 ft. maximum

Link Characteristics: Two-wire or four-wire, multi-drop RS422 ASCII, 15 drops maximum or

up to 31 drops for shorter link length.

RS422/485 Modbus

RTU Baud Rate: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 baud selectable

Data Format: Floating point or integer

Length of Link: 4000 ft. maximum

Link Characteristics: Two-wire, multi-drop Modbus RTU protocol, 15 drops maximum or up

to 31 drops for shorter link length.

Power Consumption 18 VA maximum (90 Vac to 264 Vac); 12 VA maximum (24 Vac/dc)

Power Inrush Current 10A maximum for 4 ms (under operating conditions)

CAUTION When applying power to more than one UDC 3300, make sure that sufficient

power is supplied. Otherwise, the controllers may not start up normally due to voltage drop

from the inrush current.

Weight 1.3 kg (3 lb.)

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 11

Environmental and Operating Conditions

Parameter Reference Rated Operative

Limits Transportation and

Storage

Ambient Temperature 25 ± 3 °C

77 ± 5 °F 15 to 55 °C

58 to 131 °F 0 to 55 °C

32 to 131 °F –40 to 66 °C

–40 to 151 °F

Relative Humidity 10 to 55* 10 to 90* 5 to 90* 5 to 95*

Vibration

Frequency (Hz)

Acceleration (g) 0

00 to 70

0.4 0 to 200

0.6 0 to 200

0.5

Mechanical Shock

Acceleration (g)

Duration (ms)) 0

30 5

30 20

Voltage (Vdc) +24 ± 1 20 to 27 20 to 27 - -

Voltage (Vac)

90 to 240 Vac

24 Vac

120 ± 1

240 ± 2

24 ± 1

90 to 240

20 to 27

90 to 264

20 to 27

- -

Frequency (Hz)

(For Vac) 50 ± 0.2

60 ± 0.2 49 to 51

59 to 61 48 to 52

58 to 62 - -

- -

* The maximum rating only applies up to 40 °C (104 °F). For higher temperatures, the RH specification is derated to

maintain constant moisture content.

12 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

2.2 Model Number Interpretation

Model number The model number interpretationis shown in Figure 2-1. Write the model

number into the spaces provided and compare it to the model number

interpretation. This information will also be useful when you wire your

controller.

Figure 2-1 Model Number Interpretation

24151

0DC3 3 0

Table VITable VTable IVTable IIITable IITable IKey Number

Output #1

C0 =

K – =

E – =

A – =

S – =

T – =

Output #2 or Alarm #2

– 0 =

– E =

– A =

– S =

– T =

B =

E =

L =

D =

Basic Controller Model

Expanded Controller Model

Limit Controller Model

Basic Model with UDC 3000 DMCS

Functionality

Current without Alarms or Output 2

Current with Alarm 1

Relay, E-M with Alarm 1

Relay, SS 1 amp with Alarm 1

Relay, SS 10 amp with Alarm 1

Open Collector Output

None

Relay, E-M

Relay, SS 1 amp

Relay, SS 10 amp

Open Collector Output

External Interface

0 –– =

1 ––

2 –– =

4 –– =

5 –– =

Software Options

– 0 – =

– A – =

– B – =

– C – =

– D – =

– E – =

Digital Inputs

–– 0

–– 3

None

RS422/485 ASCII / Modbus

Auxiliary Output (Loop 2 Current Output)

DMCS Communications

Auxiliary Output + RS422/485 / Modbus

Standard Functions (includes Accutune II)

Setpoint Programming (SPP)—DMCS Model

SPP

Math Option + SPP

2 Loops/Internal Cascade + SPP

Math Option + 2 Loops/Internal Cascade +

SPP

None

Two Digital Inputs

PV Input

1 – =

2 – =

3 – =

1 5 =

1 6 =

Optional Input(s)

– 0 =

– 1 =

– 2 =

– 3 =

– 4 =

T/C, RTD, Radiamatic, mV, 0-5V, 1-5V

T/C, RTD, Radiamatic, mV, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA

T/C, RTD, Radiamatic, mV, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA,

0-10V

Relative Humidity (includes optional input)

Carbon, Oxygen, or Dewpoint (includes optional input)

None

T/C, RTD, Radiamatic, mV, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA

Slidewire Input

T/C, RTD, Radiamatic, mV, 0-5V, 1-5V, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA,

0-10V

Two High Level AIs instead of 2nd Universal AI

Options

0 –––––

1 –––––

– 0 ––––

– A ––––

–F ––––

––0 –––

–– B –––

–– T –––

––– 0 ––

––– P ––

––– T ––

––– U ––

–––– 0 –

–––– D –

––––– 0

90 to 264 Vac Power

24 Vac/dc Power

None

CSA, FM, and UL

FM and UL

Gray Elastomer Bezel

Blue Elastomer Bezel

Tan Elastomer Bezel

None

Rear Terminal Cover

Customer ID Tag

Rear Terminal Cover & Tag

None

DIN Cutout Adapter

None

Manuals

0 – =

F – =

G – =

T – =

S – =

Certificate

– 0 =

– C =

English

French

German

Italian

Spanish

None

Certificate of Conformance

(F3391)

– F – = Math Option + SPP + HealthWatch

– G –

= 2 Loops/Internal Cascade + SPP +

HealthWatch

– H – = Math Option + 2 Loops/Internal Cascade +

SPP + HealthWatch

– 1 – = Standard Functions (includes Accutune II

and HealthWatch)

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 13

2.3 Mounting

Physical considerations The controller can be mounted on either a vertical or tilted panel using the

mounting kit supplied. Adequate access space must be available at the

back of the panel for installation and servicing activities.

The overall dimensions and panel cutout requirements for mounting the

controller are shown in Figure 2-2.

Overall dimensions Figure 2-2 shows the overall dimensions for mounting the controller.

Figure 2-2 Dimensions

Panel Cutout

ALM

RSP

OUT

1 2

1 2 F C MAN

PV 1 2 3 4

3.780

1 2

C M

ALM

RSP

OUT

1 2

1 2 F C MAN

FUNCTION

L1/L2

LOWER

DISPLAY

MANUAL

AUTO SETPOINT

SELECT

SET UP

1 2 3

.945 Max Panel

Thickness 10

.394 Max (2)

5.82

147.3

21.6

.850

.093

2.4 with optional

rear cover

90.7

3.57

24152

RUN

HOLD

+0.008

3.622 +0.03

-0.0

+0.008

3.622 +0.03

-0.0

3.780

14 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Mounting method Before mounting the controller, refer to the nameplate on the inside of the

case and make a note of the model number. It will help later when

selecting the proper wiring configuration.

Figure 2-3 shows you the mounting method for the UDC 3300 controller.

Figure 2-3 Mounting Method

Panel

22605

Mounting procedure Refer to Figure 2-3 and follow the procedure in Table 2-2 to mount the

controller.

Table 2-2 Procedure for Mounting the Controller

Step Action

1Mark and cut out the controller hole in the panel according to the dimension

information in Figure 2-2.

2Remove the screw cover and loosen the screw on the front of the controller.

Pull the chassis out of the case.

3Orient the case properly and slide it through the panel hole from the front.

4Remove the mounting kit from the shipping container, and install the kit as

follows:

•Install the screws into the threaded holes of the clips.

•Insert the prongs of the clips into the two holes in the top and

bottom of the case.

•Tighten both screws to secure the case against the panel.

•Carefully slide the chassis assembly into the case, press to close and

tighten the screw. Replace the screw cover.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 15

2.4 Wiring

Electrical

considerations The controller is considered “rack and panel mounted equipment” per

EN 61010-1, Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for

Measurement, Control, and Laboratory Use, Part 1: General

Requirements. Conformity with 72/23/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive

requires the user to provide adequate protection against a shock hazard.

The user shall install this controller in an enclosure that limits

OPERATOR access to the rear terminals.

Controller grounding PROTECTIVE BONDING (grounding) of this controller and the

enclosure in which it is installed shall be in accordance with National and

local electrical codes. To minimize electrical noise and transients that may

adversely affect the system, supplementary bonding of the controller

enclosure to a local ground, using a No. 12 (4 mm2) copper conductor, is

recommended.

Control/alarm circuit

wiring The insulation of wires connected to the Control/Alarm terminals shall be

rated for the highest voltage involved. Extra Low Voltage (ELV) wiring

(input, current output, and low voltage Control/Alarm circuits) shall be

separated from HAZARDOUS LIVE (>30 Vac, 42.4 Vpeak, or 60 Vdc)

wiring per Table 2-3.

Electrical Noise

Precautions Electrical noise is composed of unabated electrical signals which produce

undesirable effects in measurements and control circuits.

Digital equipment is especially sensitive to the effects of electrical noise.

Your controller has built-in circuits to reduce the effect of electrical noise

from various sources. If there is a need to further reduce these effects:

•Separate External Wiring - separate connecting wires into bundles (see

Table 2-3) and route the individual bundles through separate conduits

or metal trays.

•Use Suppression Devices - for additional noise protection, you may

want to add suppression devices at the external source. Appropriate

suppression devices are commercially available.

ATTENTION For additional noise information, refer to document

number 51-52-05-01, How to Apply Digital Instrumentation in Severe

Electrical Noise Environments.

16 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Permissible wire

bundling Table 2-3 shows which wire functions should be bundled together.

NOTE For installation where high EMI/RFI noise cannot be avoided, we

recommend you use shielded twisted pair wires for the signals in bundle 2.

Table 2-3 Permissible Wiring Bundling

Bundle No. Wire Functions

1 • Line power wiring

•Earth ground wiring

•Control relay output wiring

•Line voltage alarm wiring

2 Analog signal wire, such as:

•Input signal wire (thermocouple, 4 to 20 mA, etc.)

•4-20 mA output signal wiring

•Slidewire feedback circuit wiring

•Digital input signals

•Communications

3 • Low voltage alarm relay output wiring

•Low voltage wiring to solid state type control circuits

Identify your wiring

requirements To determine the appropriate diagrams for wiring your controller, refer to

the model number interpretation in this section. The model number of the

controller can be found on the inside of the case.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 17

Wiring the controller Using the information contained in the model number, select the

appropriate wiring diagrams from the figures listed below and wire the

controller accordingly.

Wiring Requirements Figure

Composite Wiring Diagram 2-4

Line Power 90–264 Vac or 24Vac/dc 2-5

Input #1 and Input #2 Wiring 2-6

Two HLAI Wiring 2-7

Time Proportional Output

• Electromechanical Relay Output

• Solid State Relay Output

• 10-amp Solid State Relay Output

• Open Collector Output

2-8

2-9

2-10

2-11

Current Output/Universal Output

• Two Current and Two Relay Outputs

• One Current (Auxiliary) and Three Relay Outputs 2-12

2-13

Position Proportional Output 2-14

Auxiliary Output Wiring 2-15

Digital Inputs Wiring 2-16

Communications Wiring

•RS422/485/Modbus

•DMCS 2-17

2-18

Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA 2-wire Transmitters

• Open Collector Alarm 2 Output

• Auxiliary Output 2-19

2-20

18 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

2.5 Wiring Diagrams

Composite wiring

diagram Figure 2-4 is a composite wiring diagram of the UDC 3300 controller. It

identifies the terminal designations and their functions. Refer to the

individual diagrams listed to wire the controller according to your

requirements.

Figure 2-4 Composite Wiring Diagram

L2/N

Communications

Terminals

See Figures

2-17, 2-18

Auxiliary Output

Terminals

See Figure 2-15

Outputs and Alarms

Terminals

• Time Proportional Output

See Figures 2-8, 2-9, 2-10,

2-11

• Current Output/Universal

Output

See Figures 2-12, 2-13

• Position Proportional

Output

See Figure 2-14

For Control and Alarm Relay

Contact information, See

Tables 2-7 and 2-8.

Digital Inputs

Terminals

See Figure 2-16

AC Line Voltage

Terminals

See Figure 2-5

Input #2 Terminals

See Figure 2-6

Two HLAI Terminals

See Figure 2-7

Input #1

Terminals

See Figure 2-6

24158

Transmitter Power for

4-20 mA 2-wire

Transmitters

• Using Alarm 2 Output

See Figure 2-19

• Using Auxiliary Output

See Figure 2-20

I/O shield ground

(Do not use for

Communications shield)

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 19

Line voltage wiring This equipment is suitable for connection to 90-264 Vac or 24 Vac/dc,

50/60 Hz, power supply mains. It is the user’s responsibility to provide a

switch and non-time delay (North America), quick-acting, high breaking

capacity, Type F, (Europe) 1/2 A, 250 V fuse(s) or circuit-breaker for 90-

264 V; or 1 A, 125 V fuse or circuit breaker for 24 Vac/dc operation, as

part of the installation. The switch or circuit-breaker should be located

close to the controller, within easy reach of the operator. The switch or

circuit-breaker should be marked as the disconnecting device for the

controller (4 mm2).

CAUTION Applying 90-264 Vac to a controller rated for 24 Vac/dc

will severely damage the controller and is a fire and smoke hazard.

When applying power to multiple instruments, make sure that sufficient

current is supplied. Otherwise, the instruments may not start up normally

due to the voltage drop caused by the in-rush current.

Figure 2-5 shows the wiring connections for line voltage.

Figure 2-5 Line Voltage Wiring

L2/N

Ground

Hot

Neutral

AC/DC

Line

Voltage

PROTECTIVE BONDING (grounding) of this controller and the enclosure in which it is installed, shall be

in accordance with National and local electrical codes. To minimize electrical noise and transients that

may adversly affect the system, supplementary bonding of the controller enclosure to a local ground,

using a No. 12 (4 mm

22607

2) copper conductor, is recommended.

Provide a switch and non-time delay (North America), quick-acting, high breaking capacity, Type F, (Europe)

1/2 A, 250 V fuse(s) or circuit-breaker for 90-264 V; or 1 A, 125 V fuse or circuit breaker for 24 Vac/dc

operation, as part of the installation.

20 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Input #1/Input #2

connections Figure 2-6 shows the wiring connections for Input #1 and Input #2.

Figure 2-6 Input #1/Input #2 Connections

Use Thermocouple

extension wire only

Thermocouple RTD Carbon, mV or Volts

except 0-10 Volts

mV or Volt

source

0-10 Volts 4-20 milliamps

–

0–10

Volt

source

+100K

100K Power

Supply

–+

Xmitter

–

250Ω

Remove screw and

install C/J on the "R" terminal,

connect tang to "–" terminal. 2

–

INPUT #1 3

–

The 250Ω load resistor for

4-20 mA or the voltage divider

for 0-10 volts or the 500 ohm

C/J compensation resistor is

supplied with the controller

when the input is specified.

These items must be installed

when you wire the controller

before start-up.

When installing the cold

junction (Part number

30757088-001) for a T/C

input, remove the screws

from terminals 25 and 27

(Input 1) or 22 and 24 (Input

2), and install the assembly

into place.

24159

For Relative Humidity

option, use Input 1 as the

wet bulb input and Input 2

and the dry bulb input.

For Carbon Potential

option, use Input 1 as the

Carbon Probe input.

L2/N

Use Thermocouple

extension wire only

Thermocouple RTD mV or Volts

except 0-10 Volts

Carbon, mV

or Volt

source

0-10 Volts 4-20 milliamps

–

0–10

Volt

source

+100K

100K Power

Supply

–+

Xmitter

–

250Ω

Remove screw and

install C/J on the "R" terminal,

connect tang to "–" terminal. 2

–

INPUT #2 3

Input #2 is not

available with

Position

Proportional

Output.

R+

–

Refer to Table 2-4 for Input 2 Jumper selections.

mV or Volt

source

Carbon,

mV or Volt

source

For Relative Humidity

option, use Input 1 as the

wet bulb input and Input 2

as the dry bulb input.

For Carbon Potential

option, use Input 1 as the

Carbon Probe input.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 21

Two HLAI replace

second LLAI

connections

Figure 2-7 shows the wiring connections for replacing the second LLAI

with two HLAI.

Figure 2-7 Two HLAI Replace 2nd LLAI Connections

L2/N

–

1-5V Connections 4-20 mA Connections

250Ω

–

The 250Ω load resistors are supplied by Honeywell with the controller when the input is

specified. These items must be installed when you wire the controller before start-up.

24161

–

High Level

Analog Input

Connections

See Below

Input 3 Source

Input 2 Source

–

250Ω

Transmitter 3

Transmitter 2

–

Power

Supply

–+

ATTENTION:

Remove Input 2 jumper when

replacing second LLAI with two

HLAI. Refer to Table 2-3.

ATTENTION:

Remove Input 2 jumper when

replacing second LLAI with two

HLAI. Refer to Table 2-4.

Input 2 jumper Table 2-4 shows the location of the second input jumper and the input

types available for each jumper position.

Table 2-4 Input 2 Jumper Selections

Jumper

Location

Power/Input PWA

2nd Input

24162

Jumper

Position W1 W2 None (remove jumper)

Input Types

Available Slidewire Thermocouple, RTD, mV,

Radiamatic, Carbon, Oxygen,

4-20 mA, 0-20 mA, 1-5 V, 0-5 V

Two HLAI replace LLAI

22 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Time proportional

output There are three types of Time Proportional outputs available on the

UDC 3300.

• Electromechanical Relay Output (Model DC330X-EE-XXX)–Figure 2-8

• Solid State Relay Output (Model DC330X-AA(SS)-XXX)–Figure 2-9

• Open Collector Output (Model DC330X-TT-XXX)–Figure 2-11

The Alarm wiring connections are the same for all three outputs.

For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information, see Tables 2-7 and 2-8.

Figure 2-8 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models

with Electromechanical Relay Output.

Figure 2-8 Electromechanical Relay Output—Model DC330X-EE-XXX

Alarm

Relay#1

To terminal

7 or 9

Alarm

Relay#2

To terminal

4 or 6

Output

Relay#1

L2/N

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

Output

Relay#1

Output

Relay#2

Alarm

Relay#1

L2/N

N.O.

To terminal

7 or 9

Relay Load Load

Supply

Power

To terminal

1 or 3

Relay Load Load

Supply

Power

To terminal

1 or 3

Relay Load Load

Supply

Power

To terminal

4 or 6

Time Proportional Simplex

Time Proportional Duplex

Alarm #2 is not available with Time Proportional Duplex or Three Position Step Control or Position Proportional Control.

Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @120 Vac or 30 Vdc and 2.5 Amps at 240 Vac.

Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

Alarm Relay #2 Load Load

Supply

Power

Alarm Relay #1 Load Load

Supply

Power

Load

Supply

Power

Alarm Relay #1 Load

24163

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 23

Time proportional

output, continued Figure 2-9 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models

with Solid State Relay Output (Model DC330X-AA-XX).

For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information, see Tables 2-7 and 2-8.

Figure 2-9 Solid State Relay Output—Model DC330X-AA-XX

Alarm

Relay#2

Alarm

Relay#1

L2/N

Output

Relay#1

To terminal

7 or 9

To terminal

4 or 6

AC Load

Supply

Power

Relay Load

Dummy Resistor

N.O.

Time Proportional Duplex

Time Proportional Simplex

Alarm

Relay#1

L2/N

Output

Relay#1

To terminal

7 or 9

Output

Relay#2

AC Load

Supply

Power

Relay Load

Dummy Resistor

N.O.

AC Load

Supply

Power

Relay Load

Dummy Resistor

If the load current is less than the minimum rated value of 20 mA, there may be a residual voltage across both ends of

the load even if the relay is turned off. Use a dummy resistor as shown to counteract this. The total current through the

resistor and the load current must exceed 20 mA.

Alarm #2 not available with Time Proportional Duplex or Three Position Step Control or Position Proportional control.

Solid State relays are rated at 0.5 amps. Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

AC Load

Supply

Power

Alarm Relay #2 Load

AC Load

Supply

Power

Alarm Relay #1 Load

AC Load

Supply

Power

Alarm Relay #1 Load

24164

Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @120 Vac or 30 Vdc and 2.5 Amps at 240 Vac.

Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.

WARNING: Only connect Vac to solid state relays.

24 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Time proportional

output, continued Figure 2-10 shows the wiring connections for the external 10-amp Solid

State Relay Output (Model DC330X-SS-XX).

Figure 2-10 10-amp Solid State Relay Output—Model DC330X-SS-XX

–+

Green

White

Black

Output 1

Output 2

L2/N

L1 HOT LOAD

Solid

State

Relay

–

24165

External solid state relays are rated at 15 amps @25°C derated to 10 amps at 55°C.

Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 25

Time proportional

output, continued Figure 2-11 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models

with Open Collector Output (DC330X-TT-XXX)

For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information, see Tables 2-7 and 2-8.

Figure 2-11 Open Collector Output—Model DC330X-TT-XXX

Customer Supplied

Solid State Relay

Customer Supplied

Electromechanical Relay

To terminal

4 or 6

–

Customer Supplied

Electromechanical Relay

–

Alarm

Relay#1

To terminal

7 or 9

Alarm

Relay#2

Alarm

Relay#1

To terminal

7 or 9

To terminal

4 or 6

–

Customer Supplied

Solid State Relay

–

Alarm

Relay#1

To terminal

7 or 9

Output #2

Alarm

Relay#1

To terminal

7 or 9

–

Alarm

Relay#2

Output #1

Output #2

Output #1

Time Proportional Simplex

Time Proportional Duplex

CAUTION Open collector outputs are internally powered.

Connecting an external supply will damage the controller.

Alarm #2 not available with Time Proportional Duplex or Three Position Step Control or Position Proportional control.

N.C

N.O.

N.C

N.O.

N.C

.N.O.

N.C

.N.O.

Alarm Relay

#2 Load Load

Supply

Power

Alarm Relay

#1 Load Load

Supply

Power

Alarm Relay

#2 Load Load

Supply

Power

Alarm Relay

#1 Load Load

Supply

Power

Alarm Relay

#1 Load Load

Supply

Power

Alarm Relay

#1 Load Load

Supply

Power

24166

3Can also use10 amp solid state relay, Part Number 30756018-003

Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @120 Vac or 30 Vdc and 2.5 Amps at 240 Vac.

Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.

26 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Current output/

universal output

connections

Figure 2-12 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models

with Current Output (Model DC330X-KE-XXX and Model

DC330X-C0-XXX). See Table 2-5 for wiring restrictions.

For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information, see Tables 2-7 and 2-8.

Figure 2-12 Current Output—Current /Time Duplex, Time/Current Duplex, Position Proportional,

or Three Position Step Control

ATTENTION:

All current outputs are isolated from each other, case ground, and all inputs.

L2/N

Controller Load

0–1000 Ohms

–

Current Output

4–20 mA

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

For Duplex Current Output use Auxiliary Output for Output 2 (cool) (see Figure 2-14).

To terminal

7 or 9

Output#1

Alarm#2

Relay To terminal

4 or 6

Load

Supply

Power

Output or Alarm

Relay 2 Load

Load

Supply

Power

Output or Alarm

Relay 3 Load

24167

Output#2

Alarm#1

Relay

See Table 2-7 for relay

terminal connections for

Output Algorithm selected.

Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @120 Vac or 2.5 Amps at 240 Vac.

Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.

Relays are NOT available on DC330X-C0-XXX.

Table 2-5 Universal Output Wiring Functionality and Restrictions for Figure 2-12

Controller with Two Current Outputs and Two Relay Outputs

SINGLE LOOP OR CASCADE CONTROL OUTPUT

Output Type Current Auxiliary Relay #1 Relay #2 Relay #3

Time Simplex Not used Not used N/A Output 1 Alarm 1

Current Output 1 Not used N/A Alarm 2 Alarm 1

Position (not available on

Cascade Control) Not used Not used N/A Output 1 Output 2

Time Duplex or TPSC Not used Not used N/A Output 1 Output 2

Current Duplex 100% Output 1 Not used N/A Alarm 2 Alarm 1

Current Duplex 50% Output 1 Output 2 N/A Alarm 2 Alarm 1

Current/Time or

Time/Current Output 1 or 2 Not used N/A Output 1 or 2 Alarm 1

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 27

Current output/

universal output

connections, continued

Figure 2-13 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models

with a Current Output (Auxiliary Output) and three Relay Outputs (Model

DC330X-EE-2XX). See Table 2-6 for wiring restrictions.

For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information, see Tables 2-7 and 2-8.

Figure 2-13 Auxiliary Output and Three Relay Outputs

Alarm

Relay#1

16 +

17 –

N.O.

To terminal

7 or 9

Relay Load Load

Supply

Power

To terminal

1 or 3

Relay Load Load

Supply

Power

To terminal

4 or 6

Alarm #2 is not available with Time Proportional Duplex or Three Position Step Control or Position Proportional Control.

Electromechanical relays are rated at 5 Amps @120 Vac or 2.5 Amps at 240 Vac.

Customer should size fuses accordingly. Use Fast Blo fuses only.

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

Load

Supply

Power

Alarm Relay #1 Load

24160

Output

Relay#2

Output

Relay#1

Auxiliary

Load

0-1000

–

Connect

shield to

ground at

one end

only

All current outputs are isolated from each other, case ground, and all inputs.

Table 2-6 Universal Output Wiring Functionality and Restrictions for Figure 2-13

Controller with One Current Output (Auxiliary Output) and Three Relay Outputs

SINGLE LOOP OR CASCADE CONTROL OUTPUT

Output Type Current Auxiliary Relay #1 Relay #2 Relay #3

Time Simplex N/A Not used Output 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 1

Current N/A Output 1 Not used Alarm 2 Alarm 1

Position (not available on

Cascade Control) N/A Not used Output 1 Output 2 Alarm 1

Time Duplex or TPSC N/A Not used Output 1 Output 2 Alarm 1

Current Duplex 100% N/A Output N/A Alarm 2 Alarm 1

Current Duplex 50%

(N/A) N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

Current/Time or

Time/Current N/A Output 1 or 2 Output 1 or 2 Alarm 2 Alarm 1

28 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Position proportional

output connections Figure 2-14 shows the Output and Alarm wiring connections for models

with Position Proportional Output or Three Position Step Control (Models

DC330X-EE-XXX-X2, DC330X-AA-XXX-X2).

For Control and Alarm Relay Contact information, see Tables 2-7 and 2-8.

Calibration Position Proportional Output or Three Position Step models must have the

output calibrated after installation (see Section 8—Position Proportional

Output Calibration) to ensure that the displayed output (slidewire

position) agrees with the actual final control element position.

Three Position Step models only require that the motor time be entered.

Full calibration is not required.

Figure 2-14 Position Proportional Output or Three Position Step—Models DC330X-EE-XXX-X2,

DC330X-AA-XXX-X2

L2/N

Slidewire 100 to 1000 Ω

mechanically linked

to motor

Connect shield to ground

at one end only

Neutral Hot

Motor Power

Supply

Open Closed

To terminal

7 or 9

Open

Alarm

Relay#1

Output

Relay#1

Output

Relay#2

N.C.

N.O.

N.C.

N.O.

Closed

Wiper

Alarm #2 is not available with Position Proportional output or Three Position Step control.

Do not run slidewire cable in the same conduit as AC power.

Electrical noise suppression may be required. Refer to Section 12.

Slidewire input is not required for Three Position Step control but can be used for motor position indication.

Alarm Relay

#1 Load Load

Supply

Power

24168

5 Amp Fast Blo fuse

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 29

Auxiliary output

connections Figure 2-15 shows the wiring connections for the Auxiliary Output option

(Models DC330X-XX-2XX, DC330X-XX-5XX).

Figure 2-15 Auxiliary Output Connections—Models DC330X-XX-2XX, DC330X-XX-5XX

L2/N

–

Auxiliary Load

0 –1000Ω

–

Connect shield to

ground at one end only

22619

For Duplex Current Output use Control Output for Output 1 (heat)

Attention:

Both current outputs (control and auxiliary) are isolated from

each other, case ground, and all inputs.

Digital inputs

connections Figure 2-16 shows the wiring connections for the Digital Inputs option

(Model DC330X-XX-XX3).

Figure 2-16 Digital Inputs Connections—Model DC330X-XX-XX3

L2/N

Digital Input

Switch #1

Digital Input

Switch #2

Connect shield

to ground at

one end only

Switch

Common 22620

30 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Communications option

connections There are two types of Communications option available:

•RS422/485/Modbus (Model DC330X-XX-1XX or

DC330X-XX-5XX)—Figure 2-17 [also refer to Document

#51-51-25-35 (RS422/485 ASCII) or #51-52-25-66 and #51-52-25-70

(Modbus)]

•DMCS (Model DC330X-XX-4XX)—Figure 2-18 (also refer to

Document #82-50-10-23)

Figure 2-17 RS422/485/Modbus Communications Option Connections

L2/N

Master

TX+

SHD

TX–

RX+

RX–

Do not mix half and

full duplex wiring.

Do not run these

lines in the same

conduit as AC power

CAUTION

L2/N

Master

TX–/RX–

SHD

TX+/RX+

Do not run these

lines in the same

conduit as AC power

MODBUS OR

RS422/485

HALF DUPLEX

To Other

Communication

Instruments

(maximum 15)

SHD

TX+/RX+

TX–/RX–

MODBUS OR

RS422/485

FULL DUPLEX

RX+

SHD

RX–

TX+

TX–

120 Ohm

Resistor

To Other

Communication

Instruments

(maximum 15) 120 Ohm Resistor

on Last Leg

120 Ohm

Resistor

120 Ohm

Resistor

120 Ohm Resistor

on Last Leg

24169

Use shielded twisted pair cables

(Belden 9271 Twinax or equivalent)

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 31

Figure 2-18 shows the wiring connections for the DMCS Communications

option (Model DC330X-XX-4XX).

Figure 2-18 DMCS Communications Option Connections

L2/N

Master

SHD

Do not run these

lines in the same

conduit as AC power

SHD

D +

D –

DMCS

Communications

D +

D –

To Other

Communication

Instruments*

DMCS is a proprietary

protocol. Host computer

must be either the

Honeywell Gateway 500

or LPM Series 9000.

120 Ohm Resistor

on Last Leg

120 Ohm

Resistor

24170

1Use shielded twisted pair cables

(Belden 9271 Twinax or equivalent)

*DMCS: Maximum 31 drops.

32 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Transmitter power for

4-20 mA 2-wire

transmitter—open

collector alarm 2 output

The wiring diagram example shown in Figure 2-19 (Model

DC330X-XT-XXX) provides 30 Vdc at terminals 5 and 6 with the

capability of driving up to 22 mA, as required by the transmitter which is

wired in series.

If the transmitter terminal voltage must be limited to less than 30 volts,

you can insert a zener diode between the positive transmitter terminal and

terminal 5. For example, an IN4733A zener diode will limit the voltage at

the transmitter to 25 Vdc.

Configure:

A2S1TYPE = NONE

A2S2TYPE = NONE

Figure 2-19 Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA 2-wire Transmitter Using Open Collector Alarm 2

Output—Model DC330X-XT-XXX

24171

L2/N

–

2-wire

Transmitter

250 ohm

resistor

–

If necessary, install zener diode here to

reduce voltage at transmitter.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 33

Transmitter power for

4-20 mA 2-wire

transmitter—auxiliary

output

The wiring diagram example shown in Figure 2-20 (Model

DC330X-XX-2XX or DC330X-XX-5XX) provides 30 Vdc at terminal 16

with the capability of driving up to 22 mA, as required by the transmitter

which is wired in series.

If the transmitter terminal voltage must be limited to less than 30 volts,

you can insert a zener diode between the positive transmitter terminal and

terminal 16. For example, an IN4733A zener diode will limit the voltage

at the transmitter to 25 Vdc.

Configure:

AUX OUT = OUTPUT

Calibrate the Auxiliary Output using the procedure given in Section 8.4 –

Auxiliary Output Calibration.

ZERO VAL = 4095

SPAN VAL = 4095

Figure 2-20 Transmitter Power for 4-20 mA 2-wire Transmitter Using Auxiliary Output—

Model DC330X-XX-2XX or DC330X-XX-5XX

24172

L2/N

–

2-wire

Transmitter

250 ohm

resistor

–

If necessary, install zener

diode here to reduce

voltage at transmitter.

34 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

2.6 Control and Alarm Relay Contact Information

Control relays Table 2-7 lists the Control Relay contact information.

ATTENTION Control relays operate in the standard control mode;

i.e., energized when output state is on.

Table 2-7 Control Relay Contact Information

Unit Power Control Relay

Wiring Control Relay

Contact #1 or #2 Output

Indicator Status

N.O. Open

Off N.C. Closed Off

N.O. Open

Closed Off

On N.C. Closed

Open Off

Alarm relays Table 2-8 lists the Alarm Relay contact information.

ATTENTION Alarm relays are designed to operate in a failsafe mode;

i.e., de-energized during alarm state. This results in alarm actuation

when power is OFF or when initially applied, until the unit completes self

diagnostics. If the unit loses power, the alarms will function.

Table 2-8 Alarm Relay Contact Information

Variable NOT

in Alarm State Variable

in Alarm StateUnit

Power Alarm

Relay

Wiring Relay

Contact Indicators Relay

Contact Indicators

N.O. Open Open

Off

N.C. Closed

Off

Closed

Off

N.O. Closed Open

N.C. Open

Off

Closed

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 35

Section 3 – Configuration

3.1 Overview

Introduction Configuration is a dedicated operation where you use straightforward

keystroke sequences to select and establish (configure) pertinent control

data best suited for your application.

What’s in this section? The table below lists the topics that are covered in this section.

Topic Page

3.1 Overview 35

3.2 Configuration Prompts 36

3.3 How to Get Started 38

3.4 Configuration Tips 39

3.5 Configuration Procedure 40

3.6 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group 42

3.7 Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group 44

3.8 Setpoint Ramp/Rate/Programming Set Up Group 45

3.9 Accutune Set Up Group 47

3.10 Algorithm Data Set Up Group 49

3.11 Output Algorithm Set Up Group 53

3.12 Input 1 Parameters Set Up Group 54

3.13 Input 2 Parameters Set Up Group 56

3.14 Input 3 Parameters Set Up Group 57

3.15 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group 58

3.16 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group 60

3.17 Options Parameters Set Up Group 62

3.18 Communications Parameters Set Up Group 64

3.19 Alarms Parameters Set Up Group 66

3.20 Display Parameters Set Up Group 69

3.21 Calibration Group 70

3.22 Maintenance Group 71

3.23 Status Group 72

3.24 Configuration Record Sheet for Basic and DMCS Models 73

3.25 Configuration Record Sheet for Extended Model 75

Prompts To assist you in the configuration process, there are prompts that appear in

the upper and lower displays. These prompts let you know what group of

configuration data (Set Up prompts) you are working with and also, the

specific parameters (Function prompts) associated with each group.

Figure 3-1 shows you an overview of the prompt hierarchy.

As you will see, the configuration data is divided into 15 main Set Up

groups plus prompts for calibration and prompts that show the status of

the continuous background tests that are being performed.

36 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

3.2 Configuration Prompts

Diagram: prompt

hierarchy Figure 3-1 shows an overview of the UDC 3300 Set Up prompts and their

associated Function prompts. Read from left to right.

Figure 3-1 Overview of UDC 3300 Prompt Hierarchy

Set Up Group Function Prompts

TUNING PROP BD

or GAIN GAINVALn RATE MIN RSET MIN

RSET RPM

MAN RSET PROPBD2

GAIN 2

RATE2MIN RSET2MIN

RSET2RPM

CYC SEC

CYC SX3

CYC2 SEC

CYC2 SX3

SECURITY LOCKOUT AUTO MAN SP SEL RUN HOLD PVEUVALx

GAINVALx

TUNINGL2 PROP3BD

or GAIN3 GAINVALn RATE3MIN RSET3MIN

RSET3RPM

MANRSET3 PROPBD4

GAIN 4

RATE4MIN RSET4MIN

RSET4RPM

CYC3 SEC

CYC3 SX3

CYC4 SEC

CYC4 SX3

PVEUVALx GAINVALx

SP RAMP SP RAMP TIME MIN FINAL SP SP RATE EU/HR UP EU/HR DN EUHRUP2 EUHRDN2

SP PROG STRT SEG END SEG RAMPUNIT RECYCLES SOAK DEV PROG END STATE

ToBEGIN SEGxRAMP

SEGxRATE

SEGx SP* * x = 1 to 12. Program concludes after segment 12

ACCUTUNE FUZZY ACCUTUNE ACCUTUN2 SP CHANG KPG SP CHAN2 KPG 2 CRITERIA

CRITERA2 AT ERROR

AT ERR2

ALGORTHM CONT ALG PIDLOOPS CONT2ALG OUT OVRD TIMER PERIOD START L DISP

INP ALG1 MATH K CALC HI CALC LO ALG1 INA ALG1 INB ALG1 INC ALG1BIAS

PCO SEL PCT CO ATM PRES INP ALG2 MATH K2 CALC HI CALC LO ALG2 INA

ALG2 INB ALG2 INC PCT H2 ALG2BIAS 8SEG CH1 Xx VALUE* Yx VALUE* 8SEG CH2

Xx VALU2 Yx VALU2 TOTALIZER TOT SEC RSET ? TOT RATE * x = 0 to 8

OUT ALG OUT ALG 4-20 RNG OUT2 ALG RLYSTATE RLY TYPE

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 37

Set Up Group Function Prompts

INPUT 1 IN1 TYPE XMITTER1 ANALYTIC IN1 HI IN1 LO RATIO 1 BIAS IN1 FILTER 1

BURNOUT1 EMISSIV1

INPUT 2 IN2 TYPE XMITTER2 ANALYTIC IN2 HI IN2 LO RATIO 2 BIAS IN2 FILTER 2

BURNOUT2 EMISSIV2

INPUT 3 IN3 TYPE XMITTER3 IN3 HI IN3 LO RATIO 3 BIAS IN3 FILTER 3

CONTROL PV SOURC PID SETS SW VALUE LSP’S RSP SRC AUTOBIAS SP TRACK PWR

MODE

PWR OUT SP HiLIM SP LoLIM ACTION OUT RATE PCT/M UP PCT/M DN OUTHiLIM

OUTLoLIM I Hi LIM I Lo LIM DROPOFF DEADBAND OUT HYST FAILMODE FAILSAFE

MAN OUT AUTO OUT PBorGAIN MINorRPM

CONTROL2 PV 2 SRC FORCE MA PID SETS SW VALUE LSP’S RSP SRC AUTOBIAS SPTRACK

SP HiLIM SP LoLIM ACTION OUT RATE PCT/M UP PCT/M DN OUTHiLIM OUTLoLIM

I Hi LIM I Lo LIM DROPOFF DEADBAND FAILMODE FAILSAFE

OPTIONS AUX OUT

CUR OUT2

4 mA VAL 20mA VAL DIG IN 1 DIG1 COM DIG IN 2 DIG2 COM

COM ComSTATE Com ADDR ComADDR2 SHEDTIME SHEDENAB PARITY BAUD DUPLEX

WSFLOAT TX DELAY SHEDMODE SHEDSP UNITS CSP RATO CSP BIAS CSP2RATO

CSP2BIAS LOOPBACK

ALARMS A1S1 VAL A1S2 VAL A2S1 VAL A2S2 VAL A1S1TYPE A1S2 TYPE A2S1TYPE A2S2TYPE

A1S1 H L A1S1 EV A1S2 H L A1S2 EV A2S1 H L A2S1 EV A2S2 H L A2S2 EV

AL HYST ALM OUT1 BLOCK

DISPLAY DECIMAL DECIMAL2 TEMPUNIT PWR FREQ RATIO 2 LANGUAGE

CALIB USED FOR FIELD CALIBRATION

MAINTNCE TIME1 HRS.MIN1 TIME2 HRS.MIN2 TIME3 HRS.MIN3 COUNTER1 COUNTS1

COUNTER2 COUNTS2 COUNTER3 COUNTS3 RESET ID RES TYPE

STATUS VERSON FAILSAFE FAILSF 2 RAM TEST CONFTEST CALTEST FACT CRC

38 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

3.3 How To Get Started

Read the configuration

tips Read “Configuration Tips” shown on the next page. These tips will help

you to easily and quickly accomplish the tasks at which you will be

working when you configure your controller.

Read configuration

procedure Read “Configuration Procedure”. This procedure tells you how to

access the Set Up groups, and the Function parameters within each of

these groups that are shown in the Prompt Hierarchy in Figure 3-1.

Set up groups The Set Up groups and Function parameters are listed in the order of

their appearance. The list includes the name of the prompt, the range of

setting selections available, the factory setting, and the section to

reference for further details, if necessary.

Parameter explanations

or definitions If you need a detailed explanation of any prompt listed, refer to Section 4

– Configuration Parameter Definitions.

Section 4 lists the Set Up and Function prompts, the selections or range

of settings that you can make for each, plus a detailed explanation or

definition of each parameter.

Configuration record

sheet Located on the last page of this section is a “Configuration Record

Sheet”. When you make your configuration selections, record them on

this sheet. Then you will have a record of how the controller was

configured.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 39

3.4 Configuration Tips

Introduction Listed below in Table 3-1 are some tips that will help you enter the

configuration data more quickly.

Table 3-1 Configuration Tips

Function Tip

Displaying Groups Use the SET UP key to display the Set Up groups. The group titles are listed in this

section in the order that they appear in the controller.

Displaying

Functions Use the FUNCTION key to display the individual parameters under each group. The

prompts are listed in the order of their appearance in each group.

Scrolling To get to a Set Up group prompt more quickly, hold the SET UP key in. To get to a

Function prompt more quickly, hold the FUNCTION key in. The display will scroll through

the parameters.

ATTENTION The prompting scrolls at a rate of 2/3 seconds when the SET UP or

FUNCTION key is held in. Also, [ ] [ ] keys will move group prompts forward or

backward at a rate twice as fast.

Changing values

quickly When changing the value of a parameter, you can use a single [ ] or [ ] key. Hold the key

in to increase the rate of change. Stop pressing the key for 1/2 second, then press again to

restart at a slow rate.

When changing the value of a parameter, you can adjust a more significant digit in the upper

display by holding in one key [ ] or [ ], and pressing the other [ ] or [ ] at the same time.

The adjustment will move one digit to the left. Press the key again and you will move one

more digit to the left. (Holding the [ ] and [ ] keys down will change the value twice as

quickly.)

Restoring to the

original value

When you change the value or selection of a parameter while in Set Up mode and decide not

to enter it, press RUN/HOLD once, the original value or selection will be recalled.

Exiting SET UP

mode To exit Set Up mode, press the LOWER DISPLAY key. This returns the display to the same

state it was in immediately preceding entry into the Set Up mode.

Timing out from

Set Up mode

If you are in Set Up mode and do not press any keys for 30 seconds, the controller will time

out and revert to the mode and display that was being used prior to entry into Set Up mode.

Key Error When a key is pressed and the prompt “KEY ERROR” appears in the lower display, it will be

for one of the following reasons:

• parameter not available

• not in Set Up mode, press SET UP key first

• key malfunction, do keyboard test (operation)

• Individual key locked out

40 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

3.5 Configuration Procedure

Introduction Each of the Set Up groups and their functions are pre-configured at the

factory.

The factory settings are shown in Tables 3-3 through 3-18 which follow

this procedure.

If you want to change any of these selections or values, follow the

procedure in Table 3-2. This procedure tells you the keys to press to get to

any Set Up group and any associated Function parameter prompt.

If you need a detailed explanation of any prompt, refer to Section 4 –

Configuration Parameter Definitions.

Procedure Follow the procedure listed in Table 3-2 to access the Set Up groups and

Function prompts.

ATTENTION The prompting scrolls at a rate of 2/3 seconds when the

SET UP or FUNCTION key is held in. Also, [ ] [ ] keys will move

group prompts forward or backward at a rate twice as fast.

Table 3-2 Configuration Procedure

Step Operation Press Result

1Select Set Up mode

SET UP SET UP

Upper Display

Lets you know you are in the

configuration mode and a Set Up group

title is being displayed in the lower

display.

TUNING *

Lower Display

This is the first Set Up group title.

2Select any Set Up group

SET UP Successive presses of the SET UP key will

sequentially display the other Set Up group titles shown

in the prompt hierarchy in Figure 3-1.

You can also use the [ ] [ ] keys to scan the Set Up

groups in both directions.

Stop at the Set Up group title which describes the group

of parameters you want to configure. Then proceed to

the next step.

3Select a Function Parameter FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

Upper Display

1.0 Shows you the current value or selection

for the first function prompt of the

particular Set Up group that you have

selected.

Lower Display

GAIN Shows the first Function prompt within

that Set Up group.

Example displays show Set Up group “Tuning”, Function

prompt “Gain”, and the value selected.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 41

Step Operation Press Result

4Select other Function

Parameters FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

Successive presses of the FUNCTION key will

sequentially display the other function prompts of the

Set Up group you have selected.

Stop at the function prompt that you want to change,

then proceed to the next step.

5Change the value or

selection

These keys will increment or decrement the value or

selection that appears for the function prompt you have

selected.

See “Configuration Tips” for instructions to increase or

decrease value quickly.

Change the value or selection to meet your needs.

If the display flashes, you are trying to make an

unacceptable entry.

6Enter the value or selection FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

SET UP

This key selects another function prompt.

This key selects another Set Up group.

The value or selection you have made will be entered

into memory after another key is pressed.

7Exit Configuration LOWER

DISPLAY

This exits configuration mode and returns the controller

to the same state it was in immediately preceding entry

into the Set Up mode. It stores any changes you have

made.

42 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

3.6 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group

Function prompts Table 3-3 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning Set Up group. How

the Algorithm and Control Set Up groups are configured determines

which prompts will appear.

Table 3-3 Tuning Group Function Prompts

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

PROP BD

GAIN

Proportional Band

Gain

0.1 to 9999 %

0.001 to 1000

- -

1.000

Section

4.2

GAINVALn*** or

Gain Value being used by

Gain Scheduling when

enabled in Control Setup

group “PID SETS”

Read Only - -

RATE MIN Rate in Minutes 0.00 to 10.00 minutes 0.00

RSET MIN

RSET RPM

Reset in minutes/repeat

Reset in repeats/minute

0.02 to 50.00 1.00

- -

MAN RSET Manual Reset –100 to 100 % output 0

PROPBD2

GAIN 2

Proportional Band 2

Gain 2

0.1 to 9999 %

0.001 to 1000

- -

1.000

RATE2MIN Rate 2 in Minutes 0.00 to 10.00 minutes 0.00

RSET2MIN

RSET2RPM

Reset 2 in minutes/repeat

Reset 2 in repeats/minute

0.02 to 50.00 1.00

- -

CYC SEC*

CYC SX3*

Cycle Time (Heat) 1 to 120 20

CYC2 SEC*

CYC2 SX3*

Cycle Time (Cool) 1 to 120 20

SECURITY Security Code 0 to 4095 0

LOCKOUT Configuration Lockout NONE

CALIB

+ CONF

+ VIEW

MAX

CALIB

AUTO MAN** Manual/Auto Key Lockout DISABL

ENABLE ENABLE

SP SEL** Setpoint Select Key Lockout DISABL

ENABLE ENABLE

*Cycle times are in either 1 second or 1/3 second increments, depending upon the RLY TYPE configuration in the

Output Algorithm Set Up group.

**Only appears if LOCKOUT = NONE.

***Requires Math software option

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 43

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

RUN HOLD** Run/Hold Key Lockout DISABL

ENABLE ENABLE Section

4.2

PVEUVAL1

PVEUVAL2

PVEUVAL3

PVEUVAL4

PVEUVAL5

PVEUVAL6

PVEUVAL7

PVEUVAL8

PV1 (through PV8) Value for

Gain Scheduling PV value within the PV limits.

In engineering units 0

GAINVAL1*

GAINVAL2*

GAINVAL3*

GAINVAL4*

GAINVAL5*

GAINVAL6*

GAINVAL7*

GAINVAL8*

Gain 1 (through Gain 8)

Value for Gain Scheduling 0.001 to 1000 floating

Gain or Proportional Band 1.000

* ATTENTION If units of percent proportional band (PB) are selected under the Control Set Up prompt, function

prompt PBorGAIN, then the displayed values are in %PB, but the lower display will still show Gain.

**Only appears if LOCKOUT = NONE.

44 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

3.7 Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group (Cascade or

Two Loops

Function prompts Table 3-4 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning 2 Set Up group. This

group is only displayed if the controller is configured for Cascade or

2-Loop control (prompt PIDLOOPS in Algorithm Data Set Up group).

Table 3-4 Tuning Loop 2 Group Function

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

PROPBD3

GAIN 3

Proportional Band 3

Gain 3

0.1 to 9999

0.001 to 1000

- -

1.000

Section

4.3

GAINVALn or

Gain Value being used by

Gain Scheduling when

enabled

Read Only - -

RATE3MIN Rate 3 in Minutes 0.00 to 10.00 minutes 0.00

RSET3MIN

RSET3RPM

Reset 3 in minutes/repeat

Reset 3 in repeats/minute

0.02 to 50.00 1.00

- -

MANRSET3 Manual Reset 3 –100 to 100 % Output 0.0

PROPBD4

GAIN 4

Proportional Band 4

Gain 4

0.1 to 9999 %

0.001 to 1000

- -

1.000

RATE4MIN Rate 4 in Minutes 0.00 to 10.00 minutes 0.00

RSET4MIN

RSET4RPM

Reset 4 in minutes/repeat

Reset 4 in repeats/minute

0.02 to 50.00 1.00

- -

CYC3 SEC*

CYC3 SX3*

Cycle Time 3 (Heat) 1 to 120 20

CYC4 SEC*

CYC4 SX3*

Cycle Time 4 (Cool) 1 to 120 20

PVEUVAL1

PVEUVAL2

PVEUVAL3

PVEUVAL4

PVEUVAL5

PVEUVAL6

PVEUVAL7

PVEUVAL8

PV1 (through PV8) Value for

Gain Scheduling PV value within the PV limits.

In engineering units 0

GAINVAL1**

GAINVAL2**

GAINVAL3**

GAINVAL4**

GAINVAL5**

GAINVAL6**

GAINVAL7**

GAINVAL8**

Gain 1 (through Gain 8)

Value for Gain Scheduling 0.001 to 1000 floating

Gain or Proportional Band 1.000

*Cycle times are in either 1 second or 1/3 second increments, depending upon the RLY TYPE configuration in the

Output Algorithm Set Up group.

** ATTENTION If units of percent proportional band (PB) are selected under the Control Set Up prompt, function

prompt PBorGAIN, then the displayed values are in %PB, but the lower display will still show Gain.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 45

3.8 SP Ramp, SP Rate, or SP Programming Set Up Group

Single Setpoint Ramp The Setpoint Ramp Set Up group

contains the Function parameters that let

you configure a single setpoint ramp to occur between the current local

setpoint and a final setpoint over a time interval (SP RAMP).

Setpoint rate The Setpoint Ramp Set Up group also contains the function parameters

that let you configure a specific rate of change for any Local Setpoint

change (SP RATE). It includes selections for Rate Up and Rate Down.

Function prompts Table 3-5 lists all the function prompts in the SP Ramp Set Up group.

Table 3-5 SP Ramp Group Function Prompts

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

If SP Rate and SP Programming are disabled

SP RAMP Single Setpoint Ramp

Selection DISABL

ENABLE

ENABL2

ENAB12

DISABL Section

4.4

TIME MIN Single Setpoint Ramp Time

(SP ramp enabled) 0 to 255 minutes 3

FINAL SP Single Setpoint Final

Setpoint (SP ramp enabled) Enter a value within the setpoint limits. 1000

If SP Ramp and SP Programming are disabled

SP RATE Setpoint Rate DISABL

ENABLE

ENABL2

ENAB12

DISABL

EU/HR UP Rate Up Value for

Loop 1 (SP Rate enabled) 0 to 9999

in engineering units per hour 0

EU/HR DN Rate Down Value for

Loop 1 (SP Rate enabled) 0 to 9999

in engineering units per hour 0

EU/HRUP2 Rate Up Value for

Loop 2 (SP Rate enabled) 0 to 9999

in Units per Hour 0

EU/HRDN2 Rate Down Value for

Loop 2 (SP Rate enabled) 0 to 9999

in Units per Hour 0

If SP Ramp and SP Rate are disabled

SP PROG* Setpoint Ramp/Soak

Programming DISABL

ENABLE

ENABL2

ENAB12

SP PROG must be enabled to view

the remaining prompts.

DISABL

STRT SEG Start Segment Number 1 to 11 ––

END SEG End Segment Number 2 to 12

Always end in a soak segment

(2, 4, ... 12)

––

RAMPUNIT Engineering Units for Ramp

Segments TIME (hours.minutes)

EU/MIN (engineering units/minute)

EU/HR (engineering units/hour)

TIME

46 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

RECYCLES Number of Program

Recycles 0 to 99 recycles –– Section

4.4

SOAK DEV Guaranteed Soak Deviation

Value 0 to 99

The number selected will be the PV

value (in engineering units) above or

below the setpoint outside of which

the timer halts.

––

PROG END Program Termination State LASTSP (Hold at last setpoint in the

program)

F SAFE (Manual mode/Failsafe

output)

––

STATE Program State at Program

End DISABL

HOLD ––

KEYRESET Reset/Rerun SP Program DISABL

TOBEGN

RERUN

DISABL

HOTSTART Hot Start DISABL

ENABL DISABL

SEG1RAMP or

SEG1RATE Segment #1 Ramp Time or

Segment #1 Ramp Rate 0-99 hours.0-59 minutes

Engineering units/minute or

Engineering units/hour

Select TIME, EU/MIN, or EU/HR at

prompt RAMPUNIT. All ramps will

use the same selection.

––

SEG2 SP Segment #2 Soak Setpoint

Value Within the Setpoint limits ––

SEG2TIME Segment #2 Soak Duration 0-99 hours.0-59 minutes ––

SEG3RAMP or

SEG3RATE

SEG4 SP

SEG4TIME

SEG5RAMP or

SEG5RATE

SEG6 SP

SEG6TIME

SEG7RAMP or

SEG7RATE

SEG8 SP

SEG8TIME

SEG9RAMP or

SEG9RATE

SG10 SP

SG10TIME

SG11RAMP or

SG11RATE

SG12 SP

SG12TIME

Same as above Selections are same as above. ––

*Requires SP Programming option

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 47

3.9 Accutune Set Up Group

Introduction The Accutune Set Up group offers these selections:

• FUZZY

Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression—Uses fuzzy logic to suppress or

eliminate any overshoot that may occur when the PV approaches

setpoint.

• TUNE

Demand Tuning—The tuning process is initiated through the operator

interface keys or via a digital input (if configured). The algorithm then

calculates new tuning parameters and enters them in the tuning group.

TUNE does operate with 3 Position Step Control.

• SP*

SP Tuning—SP tuning continuously adjusts the PID parameters in

response to setpoint changes. You can select tuning on minimum

setpoint changes of 5 % up to 15 % span. Perform SP tuning after you

have configured the controller.

SP tuning does not operate with 3 Position Step Control algorithm.

• TUN+PV*

SP+PV*

PV Tuning—The (TUNE) Demand Tuning or the (SP) Setpoint

Tuning portions of these selections work as stated above. PV Adapt

will occur during Process Variable (PV) disturbances (0.3 % span or

larger) which result from non-linearities, process dynamics, load

changes, or other operating conditions. When this condition exists, the

controller monitors the process response for 1 and 1/2 process cycles

around the setpoint to determine whether there has been a true process

change or a momentary upset.

Process retuning occurs as the process dynamics are learned. When the

process is being learned with possible retune, a t is shown in the upper

left display digit.

*SP + PV Tuning not available on Basic Model DC330B.

48 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Function prompts Table 3-6 lists the function prompts in the Accutune Set Up group.

Table 3-6 Accutune Group Function Prompts

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

FUZZY Fuzzy Overshoot

Suppression DISABL

ENABLE

ENABL2

ENAB12

DISABL Section

4.5

ACCUTUNE Accutune—Loop 1 DISABL

TUNE (Demand Tuning)

SP (SP Tuning)

TUN+PV

SP+PV

DISABL

ACCUTUN2 Accutune—Loop 2 DISABL

TUNE (Demand Tuning)

SP (SP Tuning)

TUN+PV

SP+PV

DISABL

SP CHANG* Setpoint Change Value—

Loop 1 5 to 15 % Input Span 10

KPG* Process Gain—Loop 1 0.10 to 10.00 1.00

SP CHAN2* Setpoint Change Value –

Loop 2 5 to 15 % Input Span 10

KPG 2* Process Gain – Loop 2 0.10 to 10.00 1.00

CRITERIA* Tuning Criteria—Loop 1 NORMAL

FAST FAST

CRITERA2* Tuning Criteria – Loop 2 NORMAL

FAST FAST

AT ERROR

AT ERR 2

(depending on

Loop)

Accutune Error Codes Read Only

RUNING (Accutune process in

operation)

NONE

OUTLIM

IDFAIL

ABORT

LOW PV

- -

*Applies to SP and SP+PV only.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 49

3.10 Algorithm Data Set Up Group

Introduction This data deals with various algorithms residing in the controller:

•Control algorithms,

• Input Math algorithms,

•selecting the 1 or 2 PID Loops,

•Output Override,

•2 Eight Segment Characterizers,

•the Timer function, and

•Totalizer function.

•Gain Scheduler

ATTENTION Math option (two algorithms, two characterizers,

totalizer) and Two Loops of Control are only available on Expanded

Model DC330E.

Function prompts Table 3-7 lists all the function prompts in the Algorithm Set Up group.

Table 3-7 Algorithm Group Function Prompts

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

CONT ALG Control Algorithm ON-OFF

PID A

PID B

PD+MR

3PSTEP

PID A Section

4.6

PIDLOOPS

(NOTE 1)

PID Loop Selection 1 LOOP

2LOOPS

CASCAD

1 or 2

CONT2ALG

(NOTE 1)

Control 2 Algorithm PID A

PID B

PD+MR

PID A

OUT OVRD

(NOTE 2)

Output Override Select DISABL

HI SEL

LO SEL

DISABL

TIMER Timer Enable/Disable ENABLE

DISABL DISABL

PERIOD* Timeout Period 00:00 to 99:59 00:01

START* Start Initiation KEY (Run/Hold key)

ALARM2 KEY

L DISP* Lower Display Selection TI REM (time remaining)

E time (elapsed time) TI REM

*Prompt appears only when Timer is enabled.

NOTE 1: Two Loops and Cascade are only available on Expanded Model DC330E.

NOTE 2: Does not apply to Three Position Step Control.

50 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

INP ALG1 Input 1 Algorithm

(formulas are located in

Section 4)

ATTENTION All Input

Algorithms operate in

engineering units except

feedforward which operates

in percent of output units.

PV or RSP source in the

Control Set Up group must

be set to IN AL1.

NONE MuDIV

W AVG MULT

F FWRD CARB A

FFWDMu CARB B

RELHUM CARB C

SUMMER CARB D

HI SEL FCC

LO SEL DEW PT

√MuDIV OXYGEN

√MULT

NONE Section

4.6

MATH K Weighted Average Ratio or K

Constant for Math Selections 0.001 to 1000 floating - -

CALC HI Calculated Variable High

Scaling Factor for Input

Algorithm

–999. to 9999. floating

(in engineering units) - -

CALC LO Calculated Variable Low

Scaling Factor for Input

Algorithm

–999. to 9999. floating

(in engineering units) - -

ALG1 INA Input Algorithm 1

Input A Selection INP 1 IN AL1

INP 2 IN AL2

LP1OUT INP 3

LP2OUT

- -

ALG1 INB Input Algorithm 1

Input B Selection INP 1 IN AL1

INP 2 IN AL2

LP1OUT INP 3

LP2OUT

- -

ALG1 INC Input Algorithm 1

Input C Selection NONE LP2OUT

INPUT 1 IN AL1

INPUT 2 IN AL2

LP1OUT INP 3

- -

PCO SEL Percent Carbon Source

(Input 3 must be enabled) DISABL

ONLINE DISABL

PCT CO Percent Carbon Monoxide 0.020 to 0.350 (fractional percent of

CO) 0.200

ATM PRES Atmospheric Pressure

Compensation 590.0 to 760.0 (mm Hg) 760.0

ALG1BIAS Input Algorithm1 Bias -999 to 9999 floating (in engineering

units) 0.000

INP ALG2* Input 2 Algorithm

(formulas are located in

Section 4)

ATTENTION All Input

Algorithms operate in

engineering units except

feedforward which operates

in percent of range units.

NONE LO SEL

W AVG √MuDIV

F FWD √MULT

FFWDMu MuDIV

A–B/C MULT

HI SEL DEW PT

NONE

MATH K2 Weighted Average Ratio or K

Constant for Math Selections 0.001 to 1000 - -

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 51

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

CALC HI Calculated Variable High

Scaling Factor for Input

Algorithm 2

–999. To 9999. Floating

(in engineering units) - -

CALC LO Calculated Variable Low

Scaling Factor for Input

Algorithm 2

–999. To 9999. Floating

(in engineering units) - -

ALG2 INA Input Algorithm 2

Input A Selection INP 1 IN AL1

INP 2 IN AL2

LP1OUT INP 3

LP2OUT

- -

ALG2 INB Input Algorithm 2

Input B Selection INP 1 IN AL1

INP 2 IN AL2

LP1OUT INP 3

LP2OUT

- -

ALG2 INC Input Algorithm 2

Input C Selection NONE LP2OUT

INP 1 IN AL1

INP 2 IN AL2

LP1OUT INP 3

- -

PCT H2 Hydrogen Content for

Dewpoint 1.0 to 99.0 % 1.0

ALG2 BIAS Input Algorithm2 Bias -999 to 9999 floating (in engineering

units) 0.000

8SEG CH1* Eight Segment Characterizer

If Characterizer 1 is

enabled, the following Xn

VALUE and Yn VALUE

parameters appear.

DISABL

INPUT1

INPUT2

L1 OUT

L2 OUT

DISABL

X0 VALUE

X1 VALUE

X2 VALUE

X3 VALUE

X4 VALUE

X5 VALUE

X6 VALUE

X7 VALUE

X8 VALUE

Xn Input Value (X Axis)

(n = 0 through 8)

0 to 99.99 % 0

Y0 VALUE

Y1VALUE

Y2VALUE

Y3VALUE

Y4VALUE

Y5VALUE

Y6VALUE

Y7VALUE

Y8 VALUE

Yn Output Value (Y Axis)

(n = 0 through 8)

0 to 99.99 % 0

8SEG CH2* Eight Segment Characterizer

If Characterizer 2 is

enabled, the following Xn

VALU2 and Yn VALU2

parameters appear.

DISABL

INPUT1

INPUT2

L1 OUT

L2 OUT

DISABL

52 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

X0 VALU2

X1 VALU2

X2 VALU2

X3 VALU2

X4 VALU2

X5 VALU2

X6 VALU2

X7 VALU2

X8 VALU2

Xn Input Value (X Axis)

(n = 0 through 8)

0 to 99.99 % 0

Y0 VALU2

Y1 VALU2

Y2 VALU2

Y3 VALU2

Y4 VALU2

Y5 VALU2

Y6 VALU2

Y7 VALU2

Y8 VALU2

Yn Output Value (Y Axis)

(n = 0 through 8)

0 to 99.99 % 0

TOTALIZE* Totalization Function DISABL

INPUT1

IN AL1

IN AL2

DISABL

ΣXXXXXXX Current Scale Factor

(upper display)

Actual Current Totalized

Value (lower display)

Σ*En

Where:

n = Totalizer Scale Factor Value

- -

TOT SCAL Totalizer Scale Factor *E0

*E1

*E2

*E3

*E4

*E5

*E6

TOT SEC Totalizer Reset Lock UNLOCK

LOCK UNLOCK

Σ RSET ? Totalizer Reset NO

YES NO

TOT RATE Totalizer Rate of Integration SECOND (once per second)

MINUTE (once per minute)

HOUR (once per hour)

DAY (once per day)

ML/DAY (millions per day)

SECOND

*Not available on DC330B

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 53

3.11 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction This data deals with various Output types that are available for use in the

controller. It also lists the Digital Output Status, the Current Duplex

functionality, and Relay Time Cycle increments.

Function prompts Table 3-8 lists all the function prompts in the Output Algorithm Set Up

group.

Table 3-8 Output Algorithm Group Function Prompts

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

OUT ALG Loop 1 Output Algorithm TIME Time Simplex

CURRNT Current Simplex

POSITN Position Proportional

TIME D Time Duplex

CUR D Current Duplex

CUR TI Current/Time Duplex

TI CUR Time/Current Duplex

CURRNT Section

4.7

4–20 RNG Current Duplex Range 100PCT

50 PCT 100PCT

OUT2 ALG* Loop 2 Output Algorithm NONE

TIME

CURRNT

CUR D

CUR TI

TI CUR

CURRNT

RLYSTATE Digital Output State at 0 %

Output 1OF2OF (Output relays 1 and 2 are

both de-energized)

1ON2OF (Output relay 1 is

energized, output relay 2

is de-energized)

1OF2ON (Output relay 1 is de-

energized, output relay 2

is energized)

1ON2ON (Output relays 1 and 2 are

both energized)

1OF2ON

RLY TYPE Relay Cycle Time Increments MECHAN (Cycle time in one second

increments)

SOL ST (Cycle time in 1/3 second

increments: 1 = .33

seconds, 120 = 40

seconds)

MECHAN

*Not available on DC330B

54 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

3.12 Input 1 Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction This data deals with various parameters required to configure Input 1.

Function prompts Table 3-9 lists all the function prompts in the Input 1 Set Up group.

Table 3-9 Input 1 Group Function Prompts

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

IN1 TYPE Input 1 Actuation Type DISABL W TC H

B TC W TC L

E TC H 100 PT

E TC L 100 LO

J TC H 200 PT

J TC L 500 PT

K TC H RAD RH

K TC L RAD RI

NNM H 0-20mA

NNM L 4-20mA

NM90 H 0-10mV

NM90 L 0-50mV

NIC TC 0-5 V

R TC 1-5 V

S TC 0-10 V

T TC H CARBON

T TC L OXYGEN

0-10mV Section

4.8

XMITTER1 Transmitter Characterization B TC S TC

E TC H T TC H

E TC L T TC L

J TC H W TC H

J TC L W TC L

K TC H 100 PT

K TC L 100 LO

NNM H 200 PT

NNM L 500 PT

NM90 H RAD RH

NM90 L RAD RI

NIC TC LINEAR

R TC SQROOT

ANALYT*

LINEAR

ANALYTIC* Analytic Selections

XMITTER1 must be set to

ANALYT for this prompt to

appear

NONE

ORP mV

CONDmS

CONDuS

RSTVM^

TDS PPm

TDS PPb

CONCPt

DO PPm

DO PPb

NONE

IN1 HI Input 1 High Range Value

(Linear Inputs only) –999. To 9999. Floating

(in engineering units) 1000

IN1 LO Input 1 Low Range Value

(Linear Inputs only) –999. to 9999. floating

(in engineering units) 0

RATIO 1 Input 1 Ratio –20.00 to 20.00

(floats to 3 decimal places) 1.000

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 55

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

BIAS IN1 Input 1 Bias –999. to 9999.

(in engineering units) 0

FILTER 1 Input 1 Filter 0 to 120 seconds 0

BURNOUT1 Burnout Protection NONE

DOWN

NO_FS

NONE

EMISSIV1 Emissivity 0.01 to 1.00 0.00

*Not available on DC330B

56 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

3.13 Input 2 Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction This data deals with various parameters required to configure Input 2.

Function prompts Table 3-10 lists all the function prompts in the Input 2 Set Up group.

Table 3-10 Input 2 Group Function Prompts

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

IN2 TYPE Input 2 Actuation Type DISABL NM90 L 500 PT

B TC NIC TC RAD RH

E TC H R TC RAD RI

E TC L S TC 0-20mA

J TC H T TC H 4-20mA

J TC L T TC L 0-10mV

K TC H W TC H 0-50mV

K TC L W TC L 0-5 V

NNM H 100 PT 1-5 V

NNM L 100 LO 0-10 V

NM90 H 200 PT SLIDEW

0-10mV Section

4.9

XMITTER2 Transmitter Characterization B TC S TC

E TC H T TC H

E TC L T TC L

J TC H W TC H

J TC L W TC L

K TC H 100 PT

K TC L 100 LO

NNM H 200 PT

NNM L 500 PT

NM90 H RAD RH

NM90 L RAD RI

NIC TC LINEAR

R TC SQROOT

ANALYT*

LINEAR

ANALYTIC* Analytic Selections

XMITTER2 must be set to

ANALYT for this prompt to

appear

NONE

ORP mV

CONDmS

CONDuS

RSTVM^

TDS PPm

TDS PPb

CONCPt

DO PPm

DO PPb

NONE

IN2 HI Input 2 High Range Value

(Linear Inputs only) –999. to 9999. floating

(in engineering units) 1000

IN2 LO Input 2 Low Range Value

(Linear Inputs only) –999. to 9999. floating

(in engineering units) 0

RATIO 2 Input 2 Ratio –20.00 to 20.00 1.000

BIAS IN2 Input 2 Bias –999. to 9999.

(in engineering units) 0

FILTER 2 Input 2 Filter 0 to 120 seconds 0

BURNOUT2 Burnout Protection NONE

DOWN

NO_FS

NONE

EMISSIV2 Emissivity 0.01 to 1.00 0.00

*Not available on DC330B

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 57

3.14 Input 3 Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction This data deals with various parameters required to configure Input 3.

Function prompts Table 3-11 lists all the function prompts in the Input 3 Set Up group.

Table 3-11 Input 3 Group Function

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

IN3 TYPE* Input 3 Actuation Type DISABL

0-20mA

4-20mA

0-5 V

1-5 V

DISABL Section

4.10

XMITTER3 Transmitter Characterization B TC S TC

E TC H T TC H

E TC L T TC L

J TC H W TC H

J TC L W TC L

K TC H 100 PT

K TC L 100 LO

NNM H 200 PT

NNM L 500 PT

NM90 H RAD RH

NM90 L RAD RI

NIC TC LINEAR

R TC SQROOT

LINEAR

IN3 HI Input 3 High Range Value

(Linear Inputs only) –999. to 9999. floating

(in engineering units) 1000

IN3 LO Input 3 Low Range Value

(Linear Inputs only) –999. to 9999. floating

(in engineering units) 0

RATIO 3 Input 3 Ratio –20.00 to 20.00 1.000

BIAS IN3 Input 3 Bias –999. to 9999.

(in engineering units) 0

FILTER 3 Input 3 Filter 0 to 120 seconds 0

*Not available on DC330B

58 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

3.15 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction The functions listed in this group define how the Single Loop process

controller or Loop 1 of a Two Loop process controller will control the

process.

Function prompts Table 3-12 lists all the function prompts in the Control Set Up group.

Table 3-12 Control Group Function Prompts

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

PV SOURC Process Variable Source INP 1 IN AL1 INP 3

INP 2 IN AL2 INP 1 Section

4.11

PID SETS Tuning Parameter Sets 1 ONLY

2KEYBD

2PV SW

2SP SW

GAIN S (Gain scheduling

automatically disables Accutune for

this loop)

1 ONLY

SW VALUE Automatic Switchover Value Value in engineering units within PV

or SP range limits 0.00

LSP’S Local Setpoint Source 1 ONLY

TWO

THREE (Selection automatically

disables RSP SRC)

1 ONLY

RSP SRC Remote Setpoint Source NONE IN AL1 INP 3

INP 2 IN AL2 NONE

AUTOBIAS Automatic Bias ENABLE

DISABL DISABL

SP TRACK Local Setpoint Tracking NONE

RSP

NONE

PWR MODE Power Up Mode Recall MANUAL

A LSP

A RSP

AM SP

AM LSP

MANUAL

PWR OUT TPSC Output Start-up Mode LAST

F’SAFE LAST

SP HiLIM Setpoint High Limit 0 to 100 % of span input in

engineering units 1000

SP LoLIM Setpoint Low Limit 0 to 100 % of span input in

engineering units 0

ACTION Control Output Direction DIRECT

REVRSE REVRSE

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 59

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

OUT RATE

ATTENTION

Does not apply to 3

Position Step

Control algorithm.

Output Change Rate ENABLE

DISABL DISABL Section

4.11

PCT/M UP Output Rate Up Value 0 to 9999 % per minute 0

PCT/M DN Output Rate Down Value 0 to 9999 % per minute 0

OUTHiLIM High Output Limit –5.0 to 105 % of output 100

OUTLoLIM Low Output Limit –5.0 to 105 % of output 0.0

I Hi LIM High Reset Limit Within the range of the output limits 100.0

I Lo LIM Low Reset Limit Within the range of the output limits 0.0

DROPOFF Controller Dropoff Value –5 to 105 % of output 0

DEADBAND Output Relay Deadband Time Duplex:

–5.0 to 25.0 %

On/Off Duplex:

0.0 to 25.0 %

Position Prop. and 3P Step:

0.5 to 5.0 %

1.0

OUT HYST Output Relay Hysteresis 0.0 to 100.0 % of PV Span for On/Off

control. 0.5

FAILMODE Failsafe Mode NO LAT

LATCH NO LAT

FAILSAFE Failsafe Output Value for all

outputs except 3P Step Set within the range of the output

limits. 0 to 100 % 0.0

Failsafe Output Value for 3P

Step 0 PCT (motor goes to closed position)

100PCT (motor goes to open position) - -

SW_FAIL PDMR/Position Proportional

motor position when

slidewire fails

0 PCT (motor goes to closed position)

100PCT (motor goes to open position)

MAN OUT Power-up Preset Output for

Manual Output Within the range of output limits - -

AUTO OUT Power-up Preset Output for

Automatic Output Within the range of output limits - -

PBorGAIN Proportional Band or

Gain Units PB PCT

GAIN GAIN

MINorRPM Reset Units RPM

MIN MIN

60 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

3.16 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction The functions listed in this group define how Loop 2 of a Two Loop

process controller will control the process.

Only available on Expanded Controller Model DC330E-XX-XXX.

Function prompts Table 3-13 lists all the function prompts in the Control 2 Set Up group.

Table 3-13 Control 2 Group Function Prompts

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

PV 2 SRC Process Variable Source INP 1

INP 2

IN AL1

IN AL2

INP 3

INP 2 Section

4.12

FORCE MA Force Manual DISABL

LINK12 DISABL

PID SETS Tuning Parameter Sets 1 ONLY

2KEYBD

2PV SW

2SP SW

GAIN S (Gain scheduling

automatically disables Accutune for

this loop)

1 ONLY

SW VALUE Automatic Switchover Value Value in engineering units within PV

or SP range limits 0.00

LSP’S Local Setpoint Source 1 ONLY

TWO

THREE (Selection automatically

disables RSP SRC)

1 ONLY

RSP SRC Remote Setpoint Source NONE

INP 2

IN AL1

IN AL2

INP 3

NONE

AUTOBIAS Automatic Bias ENABLE

DISABL DISABL

SPTRACK Local Setpoint Tracking NONE

RSP

NONE

SP HiLIM Setpoint High Limit 0 to 100 % of PV span input in

engineering units 1000

SP LoLIM Setpoint Low Limit 0 to 100 % of PV span input in

engineering units 0

ACTION Control Output Direction DIRECT

REVRSE REVRSE

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 61

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

OUT RATE Output Change Rate ENABLE

DISABL DISABL Section

4.12

PCT/M UP Output Rate Up Value 0 to 9999 % per minute 0

PCT/M DN Output Rate Down Value 0 to 9999 % per minute 0

OUTHiLIM High Output Limit –5 to 105 % of output 100

OUTLoLIM Low Output Limit –5 to 105 % of output 0

I HiLIM High Reset Limit Within the range of the output limits 100.0

I LoLIM Low Reset Limit Within the range of the output limits 0.0

DROPOFF Controller Dropoff Value –5 to 105 % of output 0

DEADBAND Output Relay Deadband –5.0 to 5.0 % 1.0

FAILMODE Failsafe Mode NO LAT

LATCH NO LAT

FAILSAFE Failsafe Output Value Set within the range of the output

limits. 0 to 100 % 0

62 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

3.17 Options Set Up Group

Introduction This data deals with various options that are available with your

controller. If your controller does not have any of these options the

prompts will not appear.

Function prompts Table 3-14 lists all the function prompts in the Options Set Up group.

Table 3-14 Options Group Function Prompts

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

AUX OUT

CUR OUT2*

Auxiliary Output One Loop

Selection

Auxiliary Output Two

Loops/Cascade Selection

DISABL LSP 1

INP 1 IN AL1

INP 2 IN AL2

INP 3 PV 2

CBOUT DEV 2

PV OUTPT2

DEV SP L2

OUTPUT LSP1 2

SP CBOUT2

DISABL Section

4.13

4mA VAL Auxiliary Output Low Scaling

Factor Low scale value to represent 4 mA.

Value in % for output, all others in

engineering units.

0.0

20mA VAL Auxiliary Output High Scaling

Factor High scale value to represent 20 mA.

Value in % for output, all others in

engineering units.

DIG IN 1 Digital Input 1 Selections NONE

TO MAN

TO LSP

TO 2SP

TO 3SP

TO DIR

ToHOLD

ToPID2

PV 2IN

PV 3IN

RERUN

TO RUN

ToBEGN

STOP I

MAN FS

ToLOCK

ToAout

TIMER

AM STA

ToTUNE

SPinit

TRACK1

TRACK2

ToOUT2

TO RSP

D L1/2

RST FB

ToPURG

LoFIRE

MAN LT

REStot

HealthWatch option

prompts*:

RESETT1

RESETT2

RESETT3

R ALL T

RESETC1

RESETC2

RESETC3

R ALL C

RALLTC

NONE

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 63

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

DIG1 COM Digital Input 1 Combinations DISABL

+PID2

+ToDIR

+ToSP2

+DISAT

+ToSP1

+RUN

DISABL Section

4.13

DIG IN 2 Digital Input 2 Selections Same as DIG IN 1 NONE

DIG2 COM Digital Input 2 Combinations Same as DIG1 COM DISABL

*Not available on DC330B

64 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

3.18 Communications Set Up Group

Introduction This data deals with the Communications option that is available with

your controller. This option allows the controller to be connected to a host

computer via an RS422/485 or Modbus protocol.

If your controller does not have this option the prompts will not appear.

Function prompts Table 3-15 lists all the function prompts in the Communications Set Up

group.

Table 3-15 Communications Group Function Prompts

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

ComSTATE Communications Option

State DISABL

MOD3K

MODBUS

RS422

DISABL Section

4.14

Com ADDR Communications Station

Address 1 to 99 0

ComADDR2 Loop 2 Communications

Station Address 1 to 99

When ComSTATE = MODBUS,

ComADDR2 = Com ADDR

SHEDENAB Shed Enable DISABL

ENABL DISABL

SHEDTIME Shed Time 0 to 255 sample periods

(1 sample period = 0.333 seconds)

0 = No Shed

PARITY Parity ODD

EVEN

Fixed at NONE when ComSTATE =

MODBUS

ODD

BAUD Baud Rate 2400

4800

9600

19200

2400

DUPLEX Duplex Operation HALF

FULL

ATTENTION

•When ComSTATE = MODBUS,

this selection is fixed at HALF.

•When the RS422/485/Auxiliary

output option board is installed, this

selection is fixed at HALF.

HALF

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 65

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

WS_FLOAT Word swap order FP_B Floating point big endian

FP_BB Floating point big endian with

byte-swapped

FP_L Floating point little endian

FP_LB Floating point little endian

with byte-swapped

TX DELAY Transmission Delay 1 to 500 milliseconds 1

SHEDMODE Shed Controller Mode and

Output Level LAST

ToAUTO

FSAFE

TO MAN

LAST

SHEDSP Shed Setpoint Recall TO LSP

TO CSP TO LSP

UNITS Communication Units PERCNT

ENG PERCNT

CSP RATO Loop 1 Computer Setpoint

Ratio –20.0 to 20.0 1.0

CSP BIAS Loop 1 Computer Setpoint

Bias –999. to 9999.

(in engineering units) 0

CSP2RATO* Loop 2 or Cascade

Computer Setpoint Ratio –20.0 to 20.0 1.0

CSP2BIAS* Loop 2 or Cascade

Computer Setpoint Bias –999. to 9999.

(in engineering units) 0

LOOPBACK Local Loop Back DISABL

ENABLE DISABL

*Not available on DC330B

66 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

3.19 Alarms Set Up Group

Introduction This data deals with the Alarms function that is available with your

controller.

There are two alarms available. Each alarm has two setpoints. You can

configure each of these two setpoints to alarm on one of several events

and you can configure each setpoint to alarm high or low. You can also

configure the two setpoints to alarm on the same event and to alarm both

high and low, if desired.

Function prompts Table 3-16 lists all the function prompts in the Alarms Set Up group.

Table 3-16 Alarms Group Function Prompts

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

A1S1 VAL Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Value Value in engineering units 90

A1S2 VAL Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 Value Value in engineering units 10

Section

4.15

A2S1 VAL Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 Value Value in engineering units 95

A2S2 VAL Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 Value Value in engineering units 5

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 67

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

A1S1TYPE Alarm 1 Setpoint 1 Type NONE

INP 1

INP 2

INP 3

PV (Loop 1 Process Variable)

DEV (Loop 1 Deviation)

OUTPUT (Loop 1 Output)

SHED (Both Loops)

EV ON (Event On – SP Program)

EV OFF (Event Off – SP Program)

MANUAL (Loop 1)

REM SP (Loop 1 Remote Setpoint)

F SAFE (Loop 1 Failsafe)

PVRATE (Loop 1 PV Rate of Change)

Expanded models:

PV 2 (Loop 2 Process Variable)

DEV 2 (Loop 2 Deviation)

OUT 2 (Loop 2 Output)

MAN 2 (Loop 2 Manual )

RSP 2 (Loop 2 Remote Setpoint)

F SAF2 (Loop 2 Failsafe)

PVRAT2 (Loop 2 PV Rate of Change)

BREAK

BREAK2

TOTAL

HealthWatch:**

TIMER1 (HealthWatch Maintenance

Timer 1)

TIMER2 (HealthWatch Maintenance

Timer 2)

TIMER3 (HealthWatch Maintenance

Timer 3)

COUNT1 (HealthWatch Maintenance

Counter 1)

COUNT2 (HealthWatch Maintenance

Counter 2)

COUNT3 (HealthWatch Maintenance

Counter 3)

NONE Section

4.15

A1S2TYPE Alarm 1 Setpoint 2 Type Same as A1S1TYPE NONE

A2S1TYPE Alarm 2 Setpoint 1 Type Same as A1S1TYPE NONE

A2S2TYPE Alarm 2 Setpoint 2 Type Same as A1S1TYPE NONE

A1S1 H L Alarm 1, Setpoint 1 State LOW

HIGH HIGH

A1S1 EV SP Programming Event

Alarm State for Alarm 1,

Setpoint 1

BEGIN

END - -

A1S2 H L Alarm 1, Setpoint 2 State LOW

HIGH LOW

A1S2 EV SP Programming Event

Alarm State for Alarm 1,

Setpoint 2

BEGIN

END - -

68 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

A2S1 H L Alarm 2, Setpoint 1 State LOW

HIGH HIGH Section

4.15

A2S1 EV SP Programming Event

Alarm State for Alarm 2,

Setpoint 1

BEGIN

END - -

A2S2 H L Alarm 2, Setpoint 2 State LOW

HIGH LOW

A2S2 EV SP Programming Event

Alarm State for Alarm 2,

Setpoint 2

BEGIN

END - -

AL HYST Alarm Hysteresis 0.0 to 100.0 % of output or span, as

appropriate 0.1

ALM OUT1* Latching Alarm for Output 1 NO LAT

LATCH NO LAT

BLOCK Alarm Blocking DISABL

BLOCK1

BLOCK2

BLK 12

DISABL

*For CE conformity, Performance Criterion A, select NO LAT.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 69

3.20 Display Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction This data deals with the Decimal Place, Units of Temperature, Power

Frequency, and Process ID Tag.

Function prompts Table 3-17 lists all the function prompts in the Display Set Up group.

Table 3-17 Display Group Function Prompts

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

DECIMAL Control Loop 1 Decimal

Place XXXX

XXX.X

XX.XX

X.XXX

ATTENTION Auto-ranging will occur

to whichever decimal place has been

selected.

XXXX Section

4.16

DECIMAL2 Control Loop 2 Decimal

Place XXXX

XXX.X

XX.XX

X.XXX

XXXX

TEMPUNIT Control Loop 1 Temperature

Units DEG F

DEG C

NONE

PWR FREQ Power Frequency 60 HZ

50 HZ 60 HZ

RATIO 2 Ratio for Input 2—Set from

the front of the controller DISABL

ENABLE DISABL

LANGUAGE Display Language ENGLIS

FRENCH

GERMAN

SPANIS

ITALAN

ENGLIS

70 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

3.21 Calibration Group

Calibration data The prompts used here are for field calibration purposes. Refer to Section

7 – Calibration in this manual for complete information and instructions.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 71

3.22 Maintenance Set Up Group

Introduction The Maintenance group prompts are part of the HealthWatch feature

(available only on DC330E model). These prompts let you count and

time the activity of discrete events such as relays, alarms, control modes

and others, to keep track of maintenance needs.

Function prompts Table 3-18 lists all the function prompts in the Maintenance Set Up group.

Table 3-18 Maintenance Group Function Prompts

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

TIME1 TIMER 1 DISABL

LASTR

AL1SP1

AL1SP2

AL2SP1

AL2SP2

MANUAL

GSOAK

SOOTNG

DIGIN1

DIGIN2

MAN2

DISABL Section

4.18

HRS.MIN1

DAYS.HRS1

ELAPSED TIME 1 Read only

TIME2 TIMER 2 Same as TIME1 DISABL

HRS.MIN2

DAYS.HRS2

ELAPSED TIME 2 Read only

TIME3 TIMER 3 Same as TIME1 DISABL

HRS.MIN3

DAYS.HRS3

ELAPSED TIME 3 Read only

72 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Function Prompt

Lower Display Function

Name Selections or

Range of Setting

Upper Display

Factory

Setting Refer

COUNTER1 COUNTER 1 DISABL

MANUAL

AL1SP1

AL1SP2

AL2SP1

AL2SP2

DIGIN1

DIGIN2

OUT1*1K

OUT2*1K

GSOAK

PWRCYC

PV_RNG

FAILSF

TUNE

MAN2

PVRNG2

FSF2

TUNE2

DISABL Section

4.18

COUNTS1 NUMBER OF COUNTS 1 Read only

COUNTER2 COUNTER 2 Same as COUNTER1 DISABL

COUNTS2 NUMBER OF COUNTS 2 Read only

COUNTER3 COUNTER 3 Same as COUNTER1 DISABL

COUNTS3 NUMBER OF COUNTS 3 Read only

PASSWORD PASSWORD 0-9999 0

RES TYPE RESET TYPE NONE

TIMER1

TIMER2

TIMER3

ALL TM

COUNT1

COUNT2

COUNT3

ALL CO

ALL TC

NONE

3.23 Status Group

Status test data The prompts used here are read only. They are used to determine the

reason for a controller failure. Refer to Section 9 – Troubleshooting in this

manual for complete information.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 73

3.24 Configuration Record Sheet

Basic Model: DC330B-XX-XXX

DMCS Model: DC330D-XX-XXX

Keep a record Enter the value or selection for each prompt on this sheet so you will have

a record of how your controller was configured.

Group

Prompt Function

Prompt Value or

Selection Factory

Setting Group

Prompt Function

Prompt Value or

Selection Factory

Setting

TUNING

SP RAMP

ACCUTUNE

PROP BD

GAIN

GAINVALn

RATE MIN

RSET MIN

RSET RPM

MAN RSET

PROPBD2

GAIN 2

RATE2MIN

RSET2MIN

RSET2RPM

CYC SEC

CYC SX3

CYC2 SEC

CYC2 SX3

SECURITY

LOCKOUT

AUTO MAN

SP SEL

RUN HOLD

SP RAMP

TIME MIN

FINAL SP

PVHOTSTART

SP RATE

EU/HR UP

EU/HR DN

SP PROG

FUZZY

ACCUTUNE

AT ERROR

__________

Read Only

__________

Read Only

- -

1.000

- -

0.00

1.00

- -

1.000

0.00

1.00

- -

CALIB

ENABLE

DISABL

1000

DISABL

NONE

ALGORTHM

OUT ALG

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

CONT ALG

TIMER

PERIOD

START

L DISP

INP ALG1

MATH K

CALC HI

CALC LO

ALG1 INA

ALG1 INB

ALG1 INC

ALG1BIAS

PCT CO

OUT ALG

4–20 RNG

RLYSTATE

RLY TYPE

IN1 TYPE

XMITTER1

IN1 HI

IN1 LO

RATIO 1

BIAS IN1

FILTER 1

BURNOUT1

EMMISIV1

IN2 TYPE

XMITTER2

IN2 HI

IN2 LO

RATIO 2

BIAS IN2

FILTER 2

BURNOUT2

EMMISIV2

__________

PID A

DISABL

0.01

KEY

TI REM

NONE

- -

0.200

CURRNT

100PCT

1OF2ON

MECHAN

0-10mV

LINEAR

1000

1.00

NONE

0.00

0-10mV

LINEAR

1000

1.00

NONE

0.00

74 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Group

Prompt Function

Prompt Value or

Selection Factory

Setting Group

Prompt Function

Prompt Value or

Selection Factory

Setting

CONTROL

OPTIONS

PV SOURC

PID SETS

SW VALUE

LSP’S

RSP SRC

AUTOBIAS

SP TRACK

PWR MODE

PWR OUT

SP HiLIM

SP LoLIM

ACTION

OUT RATE

PCT/M UP

PCT/M DN

OUTHiLIM

OUTLoLIM

I Hi LIM

I Lo LIM

DROPOFF

DEADBAND

OUT HYST

FAILMODE

FAILSAFE

MAN OUT

AUTO OUT

PBorGAIN

MINorRPM

AUX OUT

4mA VAL

20mA VAL

DIG IN 1

DIG1 COM

DIG IN 2

DIG2 COM

__________

INP 1

1 ONLY

0.00

1 ONLY

NONE

DISABL

NONE

MANUAL

LAST

1000

REVRSE

DISABL

100

0.0

100.0

0.0

1.0

0.5

NO LAT

0.0

- -

GAIN

MIN

DISABL

0.0

NONE

DISABL

NONE

DISABL

COM

ALARMS

DISPLAY

ComSTATE

Com ADDR

SHEDENAB

SHEDTIME

PARITY

BAUD

DUPLEX

WSFLOAT

TX DELAY

SHEDMODE

SHEDSP

UNITS

CSP RATO

CSP BIAS

LOOPBACK

A1S1 VAL

A1S2 VAL

A2S1 VAL

A2S2 VAL

A1S1TYPE

A1S2TYPE

A2S1TYPE

A2S2TYPE

A1S1 H L

A1S1 EV

A1S2 H L

A1S2 EV

A2S1 H L

A2S1 EV

A2S2 H L

A2S2 EV

AL HYST

ALM OUT1

BLOCK

DECIMAL

TEMPUNIT

PWR FREQ

RATIO 2

LANGUAGE

__________

DISABL

ODD

2400

HALF

FP B

LAST

TO LSP

PERCNT

1.0

DISABL

NONE

HIGH

- -

LOW

- -

HIGH

- -

LOW

- -

0.1

NO LAT

DISABL

XXXX

NONE

60 HZ

DISABL

ENGLIS

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 75

3.25 Configuration Record Sheet

Expanded Model: DC330E-XX-XXX

Keep a record Enter the value or selection for each prompt on this sheet so you will have

a record of how your controller was configured.

Group

Prompt Function

Prompt Value or

Selection Factory

Setting Group

Prompt Function

Prompt Value or

Selection Factory

Setting

TUNING PROP BD

GAIN

GAINVALn

RATE MIN

RSET MIN

RSET RPM

MAN RSET

PROPBD2

GAIN 2

RATE2MIN

RSET2MIN

RSET2RPM

CYC SEC

CYC SX3

CYC2 SEC

CYC2 SX3

SECURITY

LOCKOUT

AUTO MAN

SP SEL

RUN HOLD

PVEUVAL1

PVEUVAL2

PVEUVAL3

PVEUVAL4

PVEUVAL5

PVEUVAL6

PVEUVAL7

PVEUVAL8

GAINVAL1

GAINVAL2

GAINVAL3

GAINVAL4

GAINVAL5

GAINVAL6

GAINVAL7

GAINVAL8

__________

Read Only

__________

- -

1.000

- -

0.00

1.00

- -

1.000

0.00

1.00

- -

CALIB

ENABLE

1.000

TUNING2

SP RAMP

PROPBD3

GAIN 3

GAINVALn

RATE3MIN

RSET3MIN

RSET3RPM

MANRSET3

PROPBD4

GAIN 4

RATE4MIN

RSET4MIN

RSET4RPM

CYC3 SEC

CYC3 SX3

CYC4 SEC

CYC4 SX3

PVEUVAL1

PVEUVAL2

PVEUVAL3

PVEUVAL4

PVEUVAL5

PVEUVAL6

PVEUVAL7

PVEUVAL8

GAINVAL1

GAINVAL2

GAINVAL3

GAINVAL4

GAINVAL5

GAINVAL6

GAINVAL7

GAINVAL8

SP RAMP

TIME MIN

FINAL SP

PVHOTSTART

SP RATE

EU/HR UP

EU/HR DN

EU/HRUP2

EU/HRDN2

SP PROG

__________

Read Only

__________

- -

1.000

- -

0.00

1.00

- -

1.000

0.00

1.0

- -

1.000

DISABL

1000

DISABL

76 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Group

Prompt Function

Prompt Value or

Selection Factory

Setting Group

Prompt Function

Prompt Value or

Selection Factory

Setting

ACCUTUNE

ALGORTHM

FUZZY

ACCUTUNE

ACCUTUN2

SP CHANG

KPG

SP CHAN2

KPG 2

CRITERIA

CRITERA2

AT ERROR

AT ERR2

CONT ALG

PIDLOOPS

CONT2ALG

OUT OVRD

TIMER

PERIOD

START

L DISP

INP ALG1

MATH K

CALC HI

CALC LO

ALG1 INA

ALG1 INB

ALG1 INC

PCO SEL

PCT CO

ATM PRES

INP ALG2

MATH K2

CALC HI

CALC LO

ALG2 INA

ALG2 INB

ALG2 INC

PCT H2

8SEG CH1

X0 VALUE

X1 VALUE

X2 VALUE

X3 VALUE

X4 VALUE

X5 VALUE

X6 VALUE

X7 VALUE

X8 VALUE

Y0 VALUE

Y1 VALUE

Y2 VALUE

Y3 VALUE

Y4 VALUE

Y5 VALUE

Y6 VALUE

Y7 VALUE

Y8 VALUE

__________

Read Only

__________

DISABL

1.00

FAST

NONE

PID A

1 or 2

PID A

DISABL

0.01

KEY

TI REM

NONE

- -

DISABL

0.200

760.0

NONE

- -

1.0

DISABL

ALGORITHM

(continued)

OUT ALG

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

8SEG CH2

X0 VALU2

X1 VALU2

X2 VALU2

X3 VALU2

X4 VALU2

X5 VALU2

X6 VALU2

X7 VALU2

X8 VALU2

Y0 VALU2

Y1 VALU2

Y2 VALU2

Y3 VALU2

Y4 VALU2

Y5 VALU2

Y6 VALU2

Y7 VALU2

Y8 VALU2

TOTALIZE

•XXXXXXX

TOT SCAL

TOT SEC

• RSET ?

TOT RATE

OUT ALG

4–20 RNG

OUT2 ALG

RLYSTATE

RLY TYPE

IN1 TYPE

XMITTER1

ANALYTIC

IN1 HI

IN1 LO

RATIO 1

BIAS IN1

FILTER 1

BURNOUT1

EMMISIV1

IN2 TYPE

XMITTER2

ANALYTIC

IN2 HI

IN2 LO

RATIO 2

BIAS IN2

FILTER 2

BURNOUT2

EMMISIV2

IN3 TYPE

XMITTER3

IN3 HI

IN3 LO

RATIO 3

BIAS IN3

FILTER 3

__________

DISABL

- -

UNLOCK

SECOND

CURRNT

100PCT

CURRNT

1OF2ON

MECHAN

0-10mV

LINEAR

DISABL

1000

1.00

NONE

0.00

0-10mV

LINEAR

DISABL

1000

1.00

NONE

0.00

DISABL

LINEAR

1000

1.00

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 77

Group

Prompt Function

Prompt Value or

Selection Factory

Setting Group

Prompt Function

Prompt Value or

Selection Factory

Setting

CONTROL

CONTROL2

OPTIONS

PV SOURC

PID SETS

SW VALUE

LSP’S

RSP SRC

AUTOBIAS

SP TRACK

PWR MODE

PWR OUT

SP HiLIM

SP LoLIM

ACTION

OUT RATE

PCT/M UP

PCT/M DN

OUTHiLIM

OUTLoLIM

I Hi LIM

I Lo LIM

DROPOFF

DEADBAND

OUT HYST

FAILMODE

FAILSAFE

MAN OUT

AUTO OUT

PBorGAIN

MINorRPM

PV2 SRC

FORCE MA

PID SETS

SW VALUE

LSP’S

RSP SRC

AUTOBIAS

SPTRACK

SP HiLIM

SP LoLIM

ACTION

OUT RATE

PCT/M UP

PCT/M DN

OUTHiLIM

OUTLoLIM

I Hi LIM

I Lo LIM

DROPOFF

DEADBAND

FAILMODE

FAILSAFE

AUX OUT

CUR OUT2

4mA VAL

20mA VAL

DIG IN 1

DIG1 COM

DIG IN 2

DIG2 COM

__________

INP 1

1 ONLY

0.00

1 ONLY

NONE

DISABL

NONE

MANUAL

LAST

1000

REVRSE

DISABL

100

0.0

100.0

0.0

1.0

0.5

NO LAT

0.0

- -

GAIN

MIN

INP 2

DISABL

1 ONLY

0.00

1 ONLY

NONE

DISABL

NONE

1000

REVRSE

DISABL

100

100.0

0.0

1.0

NO LAT

DISABL

0.0

NONE

DISABL

NONE

DISABL

COM

ALARMS

DISPLAY

MAINTNCE

ComSTATE

Com ADDR

ComADDR2

SHEDTIME

PARITY

BAUD

DUPLEX

TX DELAY

SHEDMODE

SHEDSP

UNITS

CSP RATO

CSP BIAS

CSP2RATO

CSP2BIAS

LOOPBACK

A1S1 VAL

A1S2 VAL

A2S1 VAL

A2S2 VAL

A1S1TYPE

A1S2TYPE

A2S1TYPE

A2S2TYPE

A1S1 H L

A1S1 EV

A1S2 H L

A1S2 EV

A2S1 H L

A2S1 EV

A2S2 H L

A2S2 EV

AL HYST

ALM OUT1

BLOCK

DECIMAL

DECIMAL2

TEMPUNIT

PWR FREQ

RATIO 2

LANGUAGE

TIME1

TIME2

TIME3

COUNTER1

COUNTER2

COUNTER3

PASSWORD

RES TYPE

__________

DISABL

ODD

2400

HALF

LAST

TO LSP

PERCNT

1.0

DISABL

NONE

HIGH

- -

LOW

- -

HIGH

- -

LOW

- -

0.1

NO LAT

DISABL

XXXX

NONE

60 HZ

DISABL

ENGLIS

DISABL

NONE

78 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 79

Section 4 – Configuration Prompt Definitions

4.1 Overview

Introduction This section provides information for all the user configurable parameters

listed in Section 3 - Configuration. If you are not familiar with these

parameters, this section gives you the parameter prompt, the selection or

range of setting that you can make, and a definition of how each parameter

setting affects controller performance. It will also refer you to any other

prompts that might be affected by your selection.

What’s in this

section? The table below lists the topics that are covered in this section. They are

listed in the order of their appearance in the controller.

Topic See Page

4.1 Overview 79

4.2 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group 80

4.3 Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group 84

4.4 Setpoint Ramp/Rate/Programming Set Up Group 85

4.5 Accutune Set Up Group 88

4.6 Algorithm Data Set Up Group 92

4.7 Output Algorithm Set Up Group 109

4.8 Input 1 Set Up Group 112

4.9 Input 2 Set Up Group 116

4.10 Input 3 Set Up Group 117

4.11 Loop 1 Control Set Up Group 118

4.12 Loop 2 Control Set Up Group 124

4.13 Options Set Up Group 129

4.14 Communications Set Up Group 135

4.15 Alarms Set Up Group 139

4.16 Display Parameters Set Up Group 143

4.17 Calibration Data 144

4.18 Maintenance Set Up Group 144

4.19 Status Test Data 146

80 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

4.2 Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction Tuning consists of establishing the appropriate values for the tuning

constants for a single loop controller. These parameters are also for Loop

1 of a 2-Loop or Cascade control configuration.

The Accutune feature automatically selects Gain, Rate, and Reset.

This section also contains Keyboard Lockout/Security selections.

Set this group last Because this group contains functions that have to do with security and

lockout, we recommend that you configure this group last, after all the

other configuration data has been loaded.

Tuning group

prompts Table 4-1 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning Set Up group and

their definitions.

Table 4-1 Tuning Group Prompt Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

PROP BD

GAIN

0.1 to 9999 %

0.001 to 1000

PROPORTIONAL BAND (simplex) is the percent of the

range of the measured variable for which a proportional

controller will produce a 100 % change in its output.

GAIN is the ratio of output change (%) over the measured

variable change (%) that caused it.

G = 100%

PB%

where PB is the proportional band (in %)

If the PB is 20 %, then the Gain is 5. And, at those

settings, a 3 % change in the error signal (SP-PV) will

result in a 15 % change in the controller’s output due to

proportional action. If the Gain is 2, then the PB is 50 %.

Also defined as "HEAT" Gain on Duplex models for

variations of Heat/Cool applications.

The selection of Proportional Band or Gain is made in the

CONTROL parameter group under prompt PBorGAIN.

GAINVALn Read Only LOOP 1 GAIN—This is the value being provided by Gain

Scheduling when enabled.

RATE MIN 0.00 to 10.00 minutes

0.08 or less = OFF RATE action, in minutes, affects the controller's output

whenever the deviation is changing; and affects it more

when the deviation is changing faster.

Also defined as "HEAT" Rate on Duplex models for

variations of Heat/Cool applications.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 81

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

RSET MIN

RSET RPM

0.02 to 50.00 RSET MIN = Reset in Minutes per Repeat

RSET RPM = Reset in Repeats per Minute

RESET (Integral Time) adjusts the controller’s output in

accordance with both the size of the deviation

(SP–PV) and the time it lasts. The amount of the

corrective action depends on the value of Gain. The Reset

adjustment is measured as how many times proportional

action is repeated per minute or how many minutes before

one repeat of the proportional action occurs.

Used with control algorithm PID-A or PID-B.

Also defined as "HEAT" Reset on Duplex models for

variations of Heat/Cool applications.

The selection of minutes per repeat or repeats per minute

is made in the CONTROL parameters group under prompt

MINorRPM.

MAN RSET –100 to +100

(in % output) MANUAL RESET is only applicable if you use control

algorithm PD WITH MANUAL RESET in the Algorithm Set

Up group. Because a proportional controller will not

necessarily line out at setpoint, there will be a deviation

(offset) from setpoint. This eliminates the offset and lets

the PV line out at setpoint.

Bias appears on the lower display.

PROPBD2

GAIN 2

0.1 to 9999 %

0.001 to 1000

PROPORTIONAL BAND 2 or GAIN 2, RATE 2, and

RESET 2 parameters are the same as previously

described for “Heat” except that they refer to the cool

zone tuning constants on duplex models or the second set

of PID constants, whichever is pertinent.

RATE2MIN 0.00 to 10.00 minutes

0.08 or less = OFF

RSET2MIN

RSET2RPM 0.02 to 50.00

ATTENTION

Set 2 Tuning Parameters are not available when the

Accutune selection for Loop 1 is SP+PV.

CYC SEC

CYC SX3

1 to 120

ATTENTION If 1/3 second

increments are used, value

of 120 = .33 seconds x 120

= 40 seconds maximum.

CYCLE TIME (HEAT) determines the length of one time

proportional output relay cycle. Defined as "HEAT" cycle

time for Heat/Cool applications.

CYC SEC—Electromechanical relays

CYC SX3—Solid state relays

Cycle times are in either second or 1/3-second increments

depending upon the configuration of RLY TYPE in the

Output Algorithm Set Up group.

CYC2 SEC

CYC2 SX3

1 to 120

ATTENTION If 1/3 second

increments are used, value

of 120 = .33 seconds x 120

= 40 seconds maximum.

CYCLE TIME 2 (COOL) is the same as above except it

applies to Duplex models as the cycle time in the "COOL"

zone of Heat/Cool applications or for the second set of

PID constants.

CYC2 SEC—Electromechanical relays

CYC2 SX3—Solid state relays

Cycle times are in either second or 1/3-second increments

depending upon the configuration of RLY TYPE in the

Output Algorithm Set Up group.

82 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

SECURITY 0 to 4095 SECURITY CODE—The level of keyboard lockout may be

changed in the Set Up mode. Knowledge of a security

code may be required to change from one level to another.

Select this number here, copy it, and keep it in a secure

location.

NOTE: The Security Code is for keyboard entry only and is

not available via communications.

Can only be changed if LOCKOUT selection is NONE.

LOCKOUT

NONE

CALIB

+ CONF

+ VIEW

MAX

LOCKOUT applies to one of the functional groups:

Configuration, Calibration, Tuning, Accutune. DO NOT

CONFIGURE UNTIL ALL CONFIGURATION IS

COMPLETE.

NONE—No lockout; all groups are read/write.

CALIB—All groups are available for read/write except for

the Calibration and Keyboard Lockout groups.

+ CONF—Tuning, SP Ramp, and Accutune groups are

read/write. All other groups are read only. Calibration and

Keyboard Lockout groups are not available.

+VIEW—Tuning and Setpoint Ramp parameters are

read/write. No other parameters are viewable.

MAX—Tuning and Setpoint Ramp parameters are

available for read only. No other parameters are viewable.

AUTO MAN

DISABL

ENABLE

MANUAL/AUTO KEY LOCKOUT—Allows you to disable

the Manual/Auto key.

Disable

Enable

Can only be viewed if LOCKOUT is configured for NONE.

SP SEL

DISABL

ENABLE

SETPOINT SELECT KEY LOCKOUT—Allows you to

disable the Setpoint Select key.

Disable

Enable

Can only be viewed if LOCKOUT is configured for NONE.

RUN HOLD

DISABL

ENABLE

RUN/HOLD KEY LOCKOUT—Allows you to disable the

Run/Hold key, for either SP Ramp or SP Program. The

Run/Hold key is never disabled when used to

acknowledge a latched alarm 1.

Disable

Enable

Can only be viewed if LOCKOUT is configured for NONE.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 83

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

PVEUVAL1

PVEUVAL2

PVEUVAL3

PVEUVAL4

PVEUVAL5

PVEUVAL6

PVEUVAL7

PVEUVAL8

PV1 Value for Gain

Scheduling

PV2 Value for Gain

Scheduling

PV3 Value for Gain

Scheduling

PV4 Value for Gain

Scheduling

PV5 Value for Gain

Scheduling

PV6 Value for Gain

Scheduling

PV7 Value for Gain

Scheduling

PV8 Value for Gain

Scheduling

Gain Scheduling allows you to schedule eight user-defined

Gain Values (GAINVALn) applied over eight user-defined

PV bands (PVEUVALn).*

PVEUVAL1 is the first PV value to be used in the

schedule. Enter a value, in engineering units, that is within

the PV limits.

To complete the PV selections for the segments, enter a

PV value for all the PVEUVAL prompts listed.

The table on the following page shows the relationship

between the GAIN Values and the PVEU Values.

Gain Scheduling prompts are only available when

PID SETS in the Control Set Up group is configured

for GAIN S.

*Apply to Expanded Model DC330E-XX-X(C or E)X only

(requires math option).

GAINVAL1

GAINVAL2

GAINVAL3

GAINVAL4

GAINVAL5

GAINVAL6

GAINVAL7

GAINVAL8

Gain Value 1 for Gain

Scheduling

Gain Value 2 for Gain

Scheduling

Gain Value 3 for Gain

Scheduling

Gain Value 4 for Gain

Scheduling

Gain Value 5 for Gain

Scheduling

Gain Value 6 for Gain

Scheduling

Gain Value 7 for Gain

Scheduling

Gain Value 8 for Gain

Scheduling

GAIN VAL 1 is the first of eight user-defined Gain values.

Enter a Gain Value you want to be used with PVEUVAL n

previously entered. Gain values are between 0.001 and

1000 floating.

To complete the Gain selections, enter a Gain value for all

the GAINVAL prompts listed.

The table below shows the relationship between the GAIN

Values and the PVEU Values.

Gain PV band over which each

Value X Gain applies

1 Low range limit to PVEUVAL2

2 PVUEVAL2 to PVEUVAL3

3 PVUEVAL3 to PVEUVAL4

4 PVUEVAL4 to PVEUVAL5

5 PVUEVAL5 to PVEUVAL6

6 PVUEVAL6 to PVEUVAL7

7 PVUEVAL7 to PVEUVAL8

8 PVUEVAL8 to High Range Limit

ATTENTION When PB is configured (instead of Gain) in

the Control group prompt PBorGAIN, the displayed

GAINVALn is in units of %PB. The lower display will still

show Gain.

Gain Scheduling prompts are only available when

PID SETS in the Control Set Up group is configured for

GAIN S.

84 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

4.3 Loop 2 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction Tuning 2 (Loop 2) consists of establishing the appropriate values for the

tuning constants for Loop 2 on 2-Loop or Internal Cascade control.

Loop 2 is only available on Expanded Model DC330E.

Tuning 2 group

prompts Table 4-2 lists all the function prompts in the Tuning 2 Set Up group and

their definitions.

Table 4-2 Loop 2 Tuning Group Prompt

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

PROPBD3 or

GAIN 3 or

GAINVALn

RATE3MIN

RSET3MIN or

RSET3RPM

MANRSET3

PROPBD4 or

GAIN 4

RATE4MIN

RSET4MIN or

RSET4RPM

CYC3 SEC or

CYC3 SX3

CYC4 SEC or

CYC4 SX3

PVEUVAL1

PVEUVAL2

PVEUVAL3

PVEUVAL4

PVEUVAL5

PVEUVAL6

PVEUVAL7

PVEUVAL8

GAINVAL1

GAINVAL2

GAINVAL3

GAINVAL4

GAINVAL5

GAINVAL6

GAINVAL7

GAINVAL8

Same as TUNING The definitions listed for the parameters at the left are the

same as those listed previously for the Tuning Set Up

group parameters except they are for Loop 2.

The table below shows you how to use them for Duplex

Heat/Cool applications.

DUPLEX OUTPUT RANGES

0 to 50 %—TUNING SETS 2 AND 4: COOL

50 to 100 %—TUNING SETS 1 AND 3: HEAT

Duplex Heat

Output or Loop 1 Loop 2

Range Cool

0 to 50 % Cool PID SET 2 PID SET 4

Gain 2 Gain 4

Rate 2 Rate 4

Reset 2 Reset 4

Cycle 2 Cycle 4

50 to 100 % Heat PID SET 1 PID SET 3

Gain Gain 3

Rate Rate 3

Reset Reset 3

Cycle Cycle 3

Set 4 Tuning Parameters are not available when

ACCUTUN2 is configured for SP+PV.

Gain Scheduling prompts are only available when

PID SETS in the Loop 2 Control Set Up group is

configured for GAIN S.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 85

4.4 Setpoint Ramp/Rate/Programming Set Up Group

Introduction This data deals with enabling Single Setpoint Ramp function or Setpoint

Rate on one or both control loops. You can start or stop the single SP

Ramp by pressing the RUN/HOLD key.

A single setpoint ramp can be configured to occur between the current

local setpoint and a final local setpoint over a time interval of from 1 to

255 minutes.

There is also a configurable rate of change for any local setpoint change.

ATTENTION SP RAMP and SP RATE will probably cause the SP portion

of Accutune to abort. PV Tune will continue to function normally;

however, during tuning (TUNE configuration) SP Ramp and Program are

placed into HOLD until tuning completes.

SP Ramp/Rate/

Programming group

prompts

Table 4-3 lists all the function prompts in the Setpoint Ramp/Rate Set Up

group and their definitions.

Table 4-3 Setpoint Ramp/Rate Group Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

SP RAMP*

*SP Ramp parameters

(TIME MIN and FINAL

SP) appear when Ramp

is enabled and SP Rate

and SP Programming

are disabled.

DISABL

ENABLE

ENABL2

ENAB12

SINGLE SETPOINT RAMP—Make a selection to enable

or disable the setpoint ramp function. Make sure you

configure a ramp time and a final setpoint value.

SP Rate and SP Programming must be disabled.

DISABLE SETPOINT RAMP—Disables the setpoint ramp

option.

ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP—Allows the single setpoint

ramp prompts for Loop 1 to be shown.

ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP 2—Allows the single setpoint

ramp to run in Loop 2.

ENABLE SETPOINT RAMP 12—Allows the single

setpoint ramp to be run on Loop 1 and Loop 2.

TIME MIN 0 to 255 minutes SETPOINT RAMP TIME—Enter the number of minutes

desired to reach the final setpoint. A ramp time of “0”

implies an immediate change of setpoint.

86 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

FINAL SP Within setpoint limits SETPOINT RAMP FINAL SETPOINT—Enter the value

desired for the final setpoint. The controller will operate at

the setpoint set here when ramp is ended.

ATTENTION If the ramp is on HOLD, the held setpoint can

be changed by the and keys. However, the ramp time

remaining and original ramp rate is not changed.

Therefore, when returning to RUN mode, the setpoint will

ramp at the same rate as previous to the local setpoint

change and will stop if the final setpoint is reached before

the time expires. If the time expires before the final

setpoint is reached, it will jump to the final setpoint.

ATTENTION SP RAMP and SP RATE will cause the SP

portion of Accutune to abort. PV Tune will continue to

function normally. Ramp is placed into HOLD while tuning

(TUNE configuration).

SP RATE*

*SP Rate parameters

(EU/HR UP, EU/HR DN,

EU/HRUP2, EU/HRDN2)

appear when Rate is

enabled and SP Ramp

and SP Programming

are disabled.

DISABL

ENABLE

ENABL2

ENAB12

SETPOINT RATE—Lets you configure a specific rate of

change for any local setpoint change.

SP Ramp and SP Programming must be disabled.

DISABLE SETPOINT RATE—Disables the setpoint rate

option.

ENABLE SETPOINT RATE—Allows the SP rate feature

for Loop 1.

ENABLE SETPOINT RATE 2—Allows the SP rate feature

for Loop 2.

ENABLE SETPOINT RATE 12—Allows the SP rate

feature for Loop 1 and Loop 2.

EU/HR UP 0 to 9999 in engineering

units per hour RATE UP—Rate up value for Loop 1. When making a

setpoint change, this is the rate at which the controller will

change from the original setpoint up to the new one. The

ramping (current) setpoint can be viewed as SPn in the

lower display.

Entering a 0 will imply an immediate change in Setpoint

(i.e., no rate applies).

EU/HR DN 0 to 9999 in engineering

units per hour RATE DOWN—Rate down value for Loop 1. When

making a setpoint change, this is the rate at which the

controller will change from the original setpoint down to

the new one. The ramping (current) setpoint can be

viewed as SPn in the lower display.

Entering a 0 will imply an immediate change in Setpoint

(i.e., no rate applies).

EU/HRUP2 0 to 9999 in engineering

units per hour RATE UP—Rate up value for Loop 2. When making a

setpoint change, this is the rate at which the controller will

change from the original setpoint up to the new one. The

ramping (current) setpoint can be viewed as SPn in the

lower display.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 87

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

EU/HRDN2 0 to 9999 engineering units

per hour RATE DOWN—Rate down value for Loop 2. When

making a setpoint change, this is the rate at which the

controller will change from the original setpoint down to

the new one. The ramping (current) setpoint can be

viewed as SPn in the lower display.

Entering a 0 will imply an immediate change in Setpoint

(i.e., no rate applies).

SP PROG

(option)

DISABL

ENABLE

ENABL2

ENAB12

SETPOINT RAMP/SOAK PROGRAM—Available only

with controllers that contain this option.

SP RAMP and SP RATE must be disabled.

DISABLE—Disables setpoint programming.

ENABLE—Enables setpoint programming for Loop1 only.

ENABL2—Enables setpoint programming for Loop 2 only.

ENAB12—Enables setpoint programming for both Loop 1

and Loop 2.

For reasons of convenience, the information for the

prompts when SP PROG is enabled are included in

Section 6 – Setpoint Programming Option.

88 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

4.5 Accutune Set Up Group

Introduction Accutune continuously adjusts the PID parameters in response to process

variable disturbances and/or setpoint changes. Also, it can be used during

start-up without prior initialization or process knowledge.

Accutune offers the following selections:

• FUZZY—Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression

• TUNE—Demand Tuning (operates with SP Ramp or SP Program), or

• SP*—Setpoint Tuning, or

• TUN+PV*—Demand Tuning plus PV Adaptive Tune, or

• SP+PV*—Setpoint Tuning plus PV Adaptive Tune

Descriptions of their functions are listed with each selection in Table 4-4.

*Not available on Basic Model DC330B

ATTENTION Selecting Gain Scheduling in the Control or Control 2 Set

Up groups automatically disables Accutune for that group.

Accutune group

prompts Table 4-4 lists all the function prompts in the Accutune Set Up group and

their definitions.

Table 4-4 Accutune Group Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

FUZZY

DISABL

ENABLE

ENABL2

ENAB12

FUZZY OVERSHOOT SUPPRESSION—Can be enabled

or disabled independently of whether Demand Tuning or

SP Tuning is enabled or disabled.

DISABLE—Disables Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression.

ENABLE ON LOOP 1 ONLY—The UDC uses Fuzzy Logic

to suppress or minimize any overshoot that may occur

when PV approaches SP. It will not recalculate any new

tuning parameters.

ENABLE ON LOOP 2 ONLY—Same as ENABLE except

for Loop 2 only.

ENABLE ON BOTH LOOPS—Same as ENABLE except

for both Loops.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 89

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

ACCUTUNE

DISABL

TUNE

TUN+PV

SP+PV

ACCUTUNE for Loop 1

DISABLE —Disables the Accutune function.

DEMAND TUNING—If TUNE is selected, and tuning is

initiated through the operator interface or digital input (if

configured), the algorithm calculates new tuning

parameters and enters them into the tuning group. This

tuning requires no process knowledge and does not

require line out for initialization.

SETPOINT TUNING —This selection tunes on setpoint

changes only. It employs time domain analysis to

accelerate line out at any desired setpoint without prior

initialization or process knowledge.

SP is the recommended start-up mode—to be used when

no knowledge of the process tuning values is available. In

the Start-up mode, and after enabling ACCUTUNE, the

operator simply lines out the process variable in manual

mode, selects the desired SP value and switches to

automatic mode.

DEMAND TUNING PLUS PV ADAPTIVE TUNE—This

selection provides “TUNE” On Demand tuning plus PV

Adaptive tuning whenever a PV process disturbance of

0.3 % span or greater occurs. It will take 1-1/2 process

cycles around setpoint before any process recognition and

re-tuning can occur due to PV disturbances.

SETPOINT TUNING PLUS PV ADAPTIVE TUNE—This

selection tunes on setpoint changes but also whenever a

PV process disturbance of 0.3 % span or greater occurs. It

will take 1-1/2 process cycles around setpoint before any

process recognition and re-tuning can occur due to PV

disturbances.

ACCUTUN2

DISABL

TUNE

TUN+PV

SP+PV

ACCUTUNE for Loop 2—Available only if configured for

2-Loop or Cascade control.

DISABLE ACCUTUNE—Disables the Accutune function

for Loop 2.

DEMAND TUNING—Same as ACCUTUNE.

SETPOINT TUNING—Same as ACCUTUNE.

DEMAND TUNING PLUS PV ADAPTIVE TUNE—Same

as ACCUTUNE.

SETPOINT TUNING PLUS PV ADAPTIVE TUNE—Same

as ACCUTUNE.

SP CHANG* 5 to 15 % SETPOINT CHANGE LOOP 1—The minimum setpoint

change on Loop 1 that will result in re-tuning must be

configured between 5 % and 15 %; i.e., if the range is 0 to

2400 and 5 % is configured, re-tuning will occur if the

setpoint change is 120 or larger.

90 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

KPG* 0.10 to 10.00 PROCESS GAIN LOOP 1—This is the Gain of the

process being tuned on Loop 1. It is automatically

calculated during tuning process. This is normally a READ

only value. It should only need to be changed if the

controller fails to identify the process. In this case, set the

value to the algebraic value of PV in percent, divided by

output in percent while in the manual mode.

ATTENTION Note you must disable Accutune to change

tuning constant values from the keyboard.

SP CHAN2* 5 to 15 % SETPOINT CHANGE LOOP 2—The minimum setpoint

change on Loop 2 that will result in re-tuning must be

configured between 5 % and 15 %.

KPG 2* 0.10 to 10.00 PROCESS GAIN LOOP 2—This is the Gain of the

process being tuned on Loop 2. It is automatically

calculated during tuning process. This is normally a READ

only value. It should only need to be changed if the

controller fails to identify the process. In this case, set the

value to the algebraic value of PV in percent, divided by

output in percent while in the manual mode.

ATTENTION Note you must disable Accutune to change

tuning constant values from the keyboard.

CRITERIA*

NORMAL

FAST

TUNING CRITERIA (SETPOINT ADAPTIVE)—Select a

criteria best suited for your process on Loop 1.

NORMAL—Original critical damping (no overshoot).

FAST—A more aggressive tuning with a minimal possible

overshoot of less than 0.5 %.

CRITERA2*

NORMAL

FAST

TUNING CRITERIA FOR LOOP 2 (SETPOINT

ADAPTIVE)—Select a criteria best suited for your process

on Loop 2.

NORMAL—Original critical damping (no overshoot).

FAST—A more aggressive tuning with a minimal possible

overshoot of less than 0.5 %.

For Example: Slightly underdamped

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 91

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

AT ERROR

AT ERR 2

(depending on loop)

Read Only RUNING

NONE

OUTLIM*

IDFAIL*

ABORT

LOW PV*

ACCUTUNE ERROR STATUS—When an error is

detected in the Accutune process, an error prompt will

appear.

RUNNING—An Accutune process is still active checking

process gain, even though “T” is not lit. It does not affect

keyboard operation.

NONE—No errors occurred during last Accutune

procedure.

OUTPUT REACHED LIMITS (HIGH OR LOW)—Output

set insufficiently to get to SP value.

ATTENTION This error will cause the controller to switch

from Automatic to Manual mode. The output is then set to

the value present at the beginning of the Accutune

process.

IDENTIFICATION PROCESS FAILED—An illegal value

for Gain, Rate, or Reset was calculated.

CURRENT ACCUTUNE PROCESS ABORTED—Caused

by one of the following conditions:

•changing to manual mode

•digital input detected

•changing SP while PV (error) tune in progress

•in heat region of output but a cool output is

calculated, or vice versa.

LOW PV—PV not changed sufficiently or the PV has

increased by more than 4 % and Deadtime not

determined.

*Applies to SP and SP+PV tuning only.

92 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

4.6 Algorithm Data Set Up Group

Introduction This data deals with various algorithms residing in the controller:

•Control algorithms,

• Input Math algorithms,

•selecting the 1 or 2 PID Loops,

•Output Override,

•2 Eight Segment Characterizers,

•the Timer function,

•Totalizer function, and

•Gain Scheduling.

ATTENTION Math option (two algorithms, two characterizers, totalizer)

and Two Loops of Control are only available on Expanded Model

DC330E.

Algorithm group

prompts Table 4-5 lists all the function prompts in the Algorithm Set Up group and

their definitions.

Table 4-5 Algorithm Group Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

CONT ALG The CONTROL ALGORITHM lets you select the type of

control that is best for your process.

ON-OFF ON/OFF is the simplest control type. The output can be

either ON (100 %) or OFF (0 %). The Process Variable

(PV) is compared with the setpoint (SP) to determine the

sign of the error (ERROR = PV–SP). The ON/OFF

algorithm operates on the sign of the error signal.

In Direct Acting Control, when the error signal is positive,

the output is 100 %; and when the error signal is negative,

the output is 0 %. If the control action is reverse, the

opposite is true. An adjustable overlap (Hysteresis Band)

is provided between the on and off states.

Other prompts affected: OUT HYST

DUPLEX ON/OFF is an extension of this algorithm when

the output is configured for Duplex. It allows the operation

of a second ON/OFF output. There is a deadband

between the operating ranges of the two inputs and an

adjustable overlap (hysteresis) of the on and off states of

each output. Both Deadband and Hysteresis are

separately adjustable. With no relay action the controller

will read 50 %.

Other prompts affected: OUT HYST and DEADBAND

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 93

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

CONT ALG PID A

ATTENTION PID A should

not be used for Proportional

only action; i.e., no integral

(reset) action. Instead, use

PD+MR with rate set to 0.

PID A is normally used for three-mode control. This means

that the output can be adjusted somewhere between 100

% and 0 %. It applies all three control actions—

Proportional (P), Integral (I), and Derivative (D)—to the

error signal.

Proportional (Gain)—Regulates the controller’s output in

proportion to the error signal (the difference between

Process Variable and Setpoint).

Integral (Reset)—Regulates the controller’s output to the

size of the error and the time the error has existed. (The

amount of corrective action depends on the value of

proportional Gain.)

Derivative (Rate)—Regulates the controller’s output in

proportion to the rate of change of the error. (The amount

of corrective action depends on the value of proportional

Gain.)

PID B PID B—Unlike the PID A equation, the controller gives

only an integral response to a setpoint change, with no

effect on the output due to the gain or rate action, and it

gives full response to PV changes. Otherwise controller

action is as described for the PID A equation. See note on

PID A.

PD+MR PD WITH MANUAL RESET is used whenever integral

action is not wanted for automatic control. The equation is

computed with no integral contribution. The MANUAL

RESET, which is operator adjustable, is then added to the

present output to form the controller output.

Switching between manual and automatic mode will be

bumpless.

If you select PD with Manual Reset you can also configure

the following variations:

•PD (Two Mode) control,

•P (Single Mode) control.

Set Rate (D) to 0.

Other prompts affected: MAN RSET in the Tuning Set Up

group

94 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

CONT ALG

(continued) 3PSTEP THREE POSITION STEP—The Three Position Step

Control algorithm allows the control of a valve (or other

actuator) with an electric motor driven by two controller

relay outputs; one to move the motor upscale, the other

downscale without a feedback slidewire linked to the

motor shaft. The deadband is adjustable in the same

manner as the duplex output algorithm.

The Three Position Step Control algorithm provides an

output display (OUT) which is an estimated motor position,

since the motor is not using any slidewire feedback.

Although this output indication is only an approximation, it

is “corrected” each time the controller drives the motor to

one of its stops (0 % or 100 %). It avoids all the control

problems associated with the feedback slidewire (wear,

dirt, noise). When operating in this algorithm, the

estimated OUT display is shown to the nearest percent

(i.e., no decimal).

Refer to the Operation section for motor position displays.

As a customer configurable option, when a second input

board is installed, the motor slidewire can be connected to

the controller. The actual slidewire position is then shown

on the lower display as POS. This value is used for

display only. It is NOT used in the Three Position Step

algorithm. To configure this option, set Input 2 actuation

to SLIDEW. Calibrate the slidewire.

Other prompts affected: DEADBAND

PIDLOOPS*

*Only available on

Expanded Model

DC330E Dual loop.

1 LOOP

2LOOPS*

CASCAD*

PID LOOPS—This is the PID loop selection.

1 LOOP—Select to use one loop of control.

2 LOOPS—Select to use two PID loops of control, each

with two sets of tuning parameters and a set of control

parameters.

CASCADE—Select for Cascade Control. In a cascade

control system the output of one PID loop is used to adjust

the setpoint of the second control loop and the second

loop’s output actually adjusts the final control element.

ATTENTION To enable a cascade loop, hold in the

SETPOINT SELECT key until the RSP Annunciator

lights and an “I” appears as the upper display’s leftmost

character to indicate Cascade mode. Pressing the key

again disables the Cascade Loop and the annunciators

turn off.

CONT2ALG The CONTROL 2 ALGORITHM lets you select the type of

control for Loop 2 that is best for your process. Only

available if the controller is configured for Cascade or

2-Loop control.

3Pstep and On/Off are not available for the second control

loop.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 95

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

PID A

ATTENTION PID A should

not be used for Proportional

only action; i.e., no integral

(reset) action. Instead, use

PD+MR with rate set to 0.

PID A is normally used for three-mode control. This means

that the output can be adjusted somewhere between 100

% and 0 %. It applies all three control actions—

Proportional (P), Integral (I), and Derivative (D)—to the

error signal.

Proportional (Gain)—Regulates the controller’s output in

proportion to the error signal (the difference between

Process Variable and Setpoint).

Integral (Reset)—Regulates the controller’s output to the

size of the error and the time the error has existed. (The

amount of corrective action depends on the value of

proportional Gain.)

Derivative (Rate)—Regulates the controller’s output in

proportion to the rate of change of the error. (The amount

of corrective action depends on the value of proportional

Gain.)

PID B PID B—Unlike the PID A equation, the controller gives

only an integral response to a setpoint change, with no

effect on the output due to the gain or rate action, and it

gives full response to PV changes. Otherwise controller

action is as described for the PID A equation. See note on

PID A.

PD+MR PD WITH MANUAL RESET is used whenever integral

action is not wanted for automatic control. The equation is

computed with no integral contribution. The MANUAL

RESET, which is operator adjustable, is then added to the

present output to form the controller output.

Switching between manual and automatic mode will be

bumpless.

If you select PD with Manual Reset you can also configure

the following variations

• PD (Two Mode) control,

• P (Single Mode) control.

Set Rate (D) to 0.

Other prompts affected: MANRSET3

OUT OVRD OUTPUT OVERRIDE SELECT—This selection lets you

select high or low output override. Only available if the

controller is configured for 2-Loop operation. (NOTE 1)

ATTENTION Loop 1 must be in Automatic for this

selection to work. While the output is being overridden, an

“O” appears as the leftmost digit of the upper display.

DISABL DISABLE—Disables Output Override.

HI SEL HIGH SELECT—The controller will select the higher of

output 1 or output 2 and direct it to output 1 rear terminals.

LO SEL LOW SELECT—The controller will select the lower of

output 1 or output 2 and direct it to output 1 rear terminals.

96 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

TIMER ENABLE

DISABL TIMER allows you to enable or disable the timer option.

The timer option allows you to configure a timeout period

and to select timer start by either the keyboard

(RUN/HOLD key) or Alarm 2. A digital input can also be

configured to start the timer.

When the timer is enabled, it has exclusive control of the

alarm 1 relay; any previous alarm configuration is ignored.

At timeout, the timer is ready to be re-activated by

whatever action has been configured. Alarm 1 is activated

at the end of the timeout period.

PERIOD 0:00 to 99:59 PERIOD allows you to configure the length of timeout

period (from 0 to 99 hours:59 minutes).

START KEY

ALARM2 START allows you to select whether the timer starts with

the keyboard (Run/Hold key) or Alarm 2.

L DISP TI REM

E TIME L DISP allows you to select whether time remaining (TI

REM) or elapsed time (E TIME) is displayed for the timer

option.

The time is shown on the lower display in HH:MM format

along with a rotating “clock” character.

•If the “clock” rotation is clockwise, elapsed time is

indicated.

•If the “clock” rotation is counterclockwise, time

remaining is indicated.

INPUT MATH ALGORITHMS—The controller is provided with two input algorithms. Each algorithm can be

configured to provide a derived (calculated) PV or a derived Remote setpoint. Up to three inputs may be applied to

the calculation. In addition, the two algorithms may be “linked” to combine two calculations by configuring one

algorithm to be an input to the other algorithm. See Inputs A, B, and C for definitions per equation.

All algorithms operate in engineering units except Feedforward which operates in percent of output units.

ATTENTION For the General Math functions, when Input C is set to NONE, the value of Input C used in the

functions is automatically set to 1.0, except for Summer where it is set to 0.0.

INP ALG1 INPUT ALGORITHM 1 has the following selections from

which to choose:

NONE NONE—No algorithm configured

W AVG*

*Standard feature on

DC330E

WEIGHTED AVERAGE—When you configure for

Weighted Average, the controller will compute a PV or SP

for the control algorithm from the following equation:

(Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) + (K x Input B x Ratio B + Bias B)

PV = (1 + K)

Both Inputs must have the same range in engineering

units.

F FWRD*

*Standard feature on

DC330E

FEEDFORWARD SUMMER—Feedforward uses Input A,

following a Ratio and Bias calculation as a value summed

directly with the PID computed output value and sent, as

an output value, to the final control element. Applies to

Loop 1 only. (NOTE 1)

This algorithm will only function in automatic mode.

The following formula applies:

Controller Output = PID Output + (Input A x Ratio A + Bias A ) x (100/Input A Range)

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 97

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

FFWDMu FEEDFORWARD MULTIPLIER—Feedforward uses Input

A, following a Ratio and Bias calculation as a value

multiplied directly with the PID computed output value and

sent, as an output value, to the final control element.

(NOTE 1)

The following formula applies:

Controller Output = PID Output x (Input A x Ratio A + Bias A )/Input A Range

RELHUM RELATIVE HUMIDITY—Input 1 reads the wet bulb

temperature. Input 2 reads the dry bulb temperature. Both

inputs must be 100 ohm RTD inputs.

ATTENTION The Relative Humidity selection will

automatically force both Analog Input actuations to the

100 ohm low setting.

The controller will indicate measured Relative Humidity as

a Process Variable (PV) with a setpoint range of 0 % to

100 % RH.

SUMMER SUMMER WITH RATIO AND BIAS—The following

formula applies:

PV = (Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) + (Input B x Ratio B + Bias B) + (Input C x Ratio C + Bias C)

HI SEL INPUT HIGH SELECT WITH RATIO AND BIAS—This

selection specifies the PV or SP as the higher of Input 1 or

Input 2. The following formula applies:

PV = higher of (Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) or (Input B x Ratio B + Bias B)

LO SEL INPUT LOW SELECT WITH RATIO AND BIAS—This

selection specifies the PV or SP as the lower of Input 1 or

Input 2. The following formula applies:

PV = lower of (Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) or (Input B x Ratio B + Bias B)

MuDIV (note 2) MULTIPLIER DIVIDER WITH SQUARE ROOT—The

following formula applies:

*PV = K x (Input B x Ratio B + Bias B)

(Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) x (Input C x Ratio C + Bias C) x (Calc Hi – Calc Lo)

See Figure 4-1 at the end of this section for an example of Mass Flow

Compensation using Multiplier/Divider Algorithm.

MULT (note 2) MULTIPLIER WITH SQUARE ROOT—The following

formula applies:

(Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) x (Input C x Ratio C + Bias C) x (Input B x Ratio B + Bias B)*PV = K x x (Calc Hi – Calc Lo)

MuDIV MULTIPLIER DIVIDER—The following formula applies:

*PV = K x (Input B x Ratio B + Bias B)

(Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) x (Input C x Ratio C + Bias C) x (Calc Hi – Calc Lo)

MULT MULTIPLIER—The following formula applies:

*PV = K x [(Input A x Ratio A + Bias A) x (Input C x Ratio C + Bias C) x (Input B x Ratio B + Bias B)] x (Calc Hi – Calc Lo)

CARB A CARBON POTENTIAL A—Make this selection if you have

a Cambridge or Marathon monitor type Zirconium Oxide

sensor.

98 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

CARB B CARBON POTENTIAL B—Make this selection if you have

a Corning type Zirconium Oxide sensor. This algorithm

requires a temperature range within the region of 1400 to

2000°F.

CARB C CARBON POTENTIAL C—Make this selection if you have

an A.A.C.C. type Zirconium Oxide sensor. This algorithm

requires a temperature range within the region of 1400 °F

to 2000 °F.

CARB D CARBON POTENTIAL D—Make this selection if you have

a Barber Coleman, MacDhui, or Bricesco type Zirconium

Oxide sensor. This algorithm requires a temperature range

within the region of 1400 to 2000°F.

FCC CARBON POTENTIAL FCC—Make this selection if you

have a Furnace Controls Corp Accucarb type Zirconium

Oxide sensor. This algorithm requires a temperature range

within the region of 1400 °F to 2000 °F.

DEW PT DEWPOINT OF CARBONIZING ATMOSPHERE—Use

this selection if you are using any Zirconium Oxide Carbon

Probe and you want to measure the atmosphere in terms

of Dewpoint. The range is –50 °F to 100 °F or

–48 °C to 38 °C. This algorithm requires a temperature

range within the region of 1000 °F to 2200 °F.

OXYGEN PERCENT OXYGEN RANGE—Make this selection if you

are using a Zirconium Oxide Oxygen Probe to measure

Percent of Oxygen in a range of 0 to 40 % O2. This

algorithm requires a temperature range within the region

of 800 °F to 3000 °F.

ATTENTION The Carbon and Dewpoint selections will automatically set the first input actuation to Carbon.

The Oxygen selection will automatically set the first input actuation to Oxygen.

MATH K 0.001 to 1000 floating WEIGHTED AVERAGE RATIO OR MASS FLOW

ORIFICE CONSTANT (K) FOR MATH SELECTIONS—

Only applicable for algorithms W AVG or General Math

selections ¥MuDIV, ¥MULT, MuDIV, or MULT.

CALC HI –999. To 9999. Floating

(in engineering units) CALCULATED VARIABLE HIGH SCALING FACTOR

FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 1—Used only when either

Summer, Input Hi/Lo, or one of the General Math functions

was selected as the Input Algorithm. Range is used for

either PV or RSP, depending upon Algorithm application.

CALC LO –999. To 9999. Floating

(in engineering units) CALCULATED VARIABLE LOW SCALING FACTOR

FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 1—Used only when either

Summer, Input Hi/Lo, or one of the General Math functions

was selected as the Input Algorithm. Range is used for

either PV or RSP, depending upon Algorithm application.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 99

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

ALG1 INA

INP 1

INP 2

LP1OUT

LP2OUT

IN AL1

IN AL2

INP 3

ALGORITHM 1, INPUT A SELECTION will represent one

of the available selections.

Input 1

Input 2

Output 1 (NOTE 1)

Output 2

Input Algorithm 1

Input Algorithm 2

Input 3

ALG1 INB

INP 1

INP 2

LP1OUT

LP2OUT

IN AL1

IN AL2

INP 3

ALGORITHM 1, INPUT B SELECTION will represent one

of the available selections.

Input 1

Input 2

Output 1 (NOTE 1)

Output 2

Input Algorithm 1

Input Algorithm 2

Input 3

ALG1 INC

NONE

INP 1

INP 2

LP1OUT

LP2OUT

IN AL1

IN AL2

INP 3

ALGORITHM 1, INPUT C SELECTION will represent one

of the available selections.

None

Input 1

Input 2

Output 1 (NOTE 1)

Output 2

Input Algorithm 1

Input Algorithm 2

Input 3

PCO SEL

DISABL

ONLINE

PERCENT CARBON SOURCE allows a live Input 3 value

to be substituted for the static % CO value (PCT CO).

DISABLED

ONLINE—Input 3 must be enabled

PCT CO 0.020 to 0.350 (fractional

percent of CO) PERCENT CARBON is only applicable when Carbon

Potential is selected. Enter the value in percent carbon

monoxide that is applicable for the enriching gas used in

fractional form.

FOR EXAMPLE:

Natural Gas = 20.0 % CO, then setting is 0.200

Propane Gas = 23.0 % CO, setting is 0.230

ATM PRES 590.0 to 760.0 (mm Hg) ATMOSPHERIC PRESSURE COMPENSATION is only

applicable when Relative Humidity is selected. Enter the

value of the atmospheric pressure of the process.

ALG1 BIAS -999 to 9999 floating (in

engineering units) INPUT ALGORITHM 1 BIAS—Does not apply to

selections: FFWRD, FFWDM2, HISEL, or LOSEL.

100 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

INP ALG2

ATTENTION

• All Input Algorithms

operate in engineering

units except Feed-

forward which operates

in percent of range units.

• For General Math

functions, when Input C

is disabled, the value of

Input C used in the

functions is

automatically set to 1.0.

NONE

W AVG

F FWR2

FFWDM2

A-B/C*

HI SEL

LO SEL

MuDIV

MULT

MuDIV

MULT

DEW PT

INPUT ALGORITHM 2—The selections from which to

choose are listed to the left.

The formulas are the same as shown for IN ALG 1.

* ATTENTION Selection A–B/C algorithm subtracts

Input B with Ratio/Bias from Input A with Ratio/Bias and

divides the result by Input C with Ratio/Bias using

engineering units.

EXAMPLE:

PV or SP = K (A–B)

C (Calc Hi – Calc Lo)

MATH K2 0.001 to 1000 floating WEIGHTED AVERAGE RATIO OR MASS FLOW

ORIFICE CONSTANT (K) FOR MATH SELECTIONS—

Only applicable for algorithm W AVG or General Math

selections MuDIV, MULT, MuDIV, or MULT.

CALC HI –999. To 9999. Floating

(in engineering units) CALCULATED VARIABLE HIGH SCALING FACTOR

FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 2—Does not apply to

Feedforward algorithms. Range is used for either PV or

RSP, depending upon Algorithm application.

CALC LO –999. To 9999. Floating

(in engineering units) CALCULATED VARIABLE LOW SCALING FACTOR

FOR INPUT ALGORITHM 2—Does not apply to

Feedforward algorithms. Range is used for either PV or

RSP, depending upon Algorithm application.

ALG2 INA

INP 1

INP 2

LP1OUT

LP2OUT

IN AL1

IN AL2

INP 3

ALGORITHM 2, INPUT A SELECTION will represent one

of the available selections.

Input 1

Input 2

Output 1 (NOTE 1)

Output 2

Input Algorithm 1

Input Algorithm 2

Input 3

ALG2 INB

INP 1

INP 2

LP1OUT

LP2OUT

IN AL1

IN AL2

INP 3

ALGORITHM 2, INPUT B SELECTION will represent one

of the available selections.

Input 1

Input 2

Output 1 (NOTE 1)

Output 2

Input Algorithm 1

Input Algorithm 2

Input 3

ALG2 INC

NONE

INP 1

INP 2

LP1OUT

LP2OUT

IN AL1

IN AL2

INP 3

ALGORITHM 2, INPUT C SELECTION will represent one

of the available selections.

None

Input 1

Input 2

Output 1 (NOTE 1)

Output 2

Input Algorithm 1

Input Algorithm 2

Input 3

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 101

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

PCT H2 1.0 to 99.0 (% H2)HYDROGEN CONTENT FOR DEWPOINT is only

applicable when Dewpoint is selected. Enter a value for

the percentage of Hydrogen content that is applicable.

ALG2BIAS -999 to 9999 floating (in

engineering units) INPUT ALGORITHM 2 BIAS—Does not apply to

selections: FFWR2, FFWM2, HI SEL, or LO SEL.

102 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Figure 4-1 Example of Mass Flow Compensation using Multiplier/Divider Algorithm

Example - Mass Flow Compensation

A gas flow rate of 650 SCFM develops a differential pressure of 90" H O across an orifice plate

at reference conditions of 30 psig and 140 F. Compensate this gas flow for temperature and

pressure variations.

Apply Multiplier/Divider Algorithm:

Flow = K DPfxP

ref

PV = K (Input B x Ratio + Bias )BB

(Input A x Ratio + Bias ) x (Input C x Ratio + Bias )

AAC

CX (Calc – Calc )HI LO

Where:

f = flowing conditions

ref = reference conditions (in absolute units)

Note: If temperature and pressure signals are already ranged in absolute units,

no Bias is required for inputs B and C.

Assign inputs using Engineering units:

Let:

Input A = DP = IN1 (in H O)

Input B = T = IN2 + Bias2 = IN2 F + 460 ( R)

Input C = P = IN3 + Bias3 = IN3psig + 14.7(psia)

T = 140 F + 460 = 600 R

P = 30 psig + 14.7 = 44.7 psia

Calc = 650.0

Calc = 0.0

ref

Lo Flow in SFCM at Reference Conditions

K = to be determined next

22049

Example continued

on next page

PV = Q = DPf(IN3 + 14.7)x

SCFM (IN2 + 460) K2

x(650.0 - 0.0)

DPf

(IN3 + 14.7)

x(IN2 + 460)

ref

SCFM

Q = x650

Note: When IN2 and IN3 are at the reference conditions of 600 R (140 F) and 44.7psia (30

psig) respectively and DP = 90" H O, the equation must calculate 650 SCFM. To accomplish

this, divide the DP value by "90" to normalize the equation.

Rearranging terms:

Variable Constant = K 2

DPf(IN3 + 14.7)

x(IN2 + 460) x1

Tref

Pref

650

SCFM

Q =

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 103

Figure 4-1 Example of Mass Flow Compensation using Multiplier/Divider Algorithm, continued

Example - Mass Flow Compensation

Determined value of K:

K2=x

Tref

Pref ==

0.14914

600

(90) (44.7)

Therefore K = 0.386

SCFM

Q = (0.386) (650)

(Calc - Calc )

HI LO

DPf(in H O) (IN3 + 14.7)

(IN2 + 460)

140 F + 460

170 F + 460

110 F + 460

30 psi + 14.7

50 psi + 14.7

20 psi + 14.7

50 psi + 14.7

20 psi + 14.7

459

539

395

567

415

Flow (SFCM)

DP = 45" H O (50%)

650

763

559

802

587

DP = 90" H O (100%)

Temp (T )

( R) f

Summary of Flow Values At Values Conditions

Pressure (T )

(psia) f

Reference

Conditions

22050

104 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Table 4-5 Algorithm Group Definitions, Continued

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

8SEG CH1

DISABL

INPUT1

INPUT2

L1 OUT

L2 OUT

8 SEGMENT CHARACTERIZER #1—An eight segment

characterizer can be applied to either Input 1, Input 2,

Output 1, or Output 2.

DISABLE—Disables characterizer.

INPUT 1—Characterizer is applied to Input 1.

INPUT 2—Characterizer is applied to Input 2.

LOOP 1 OUTPUT—Characterizer is applied to Loop 1

Output. (NOTE 1)

LOOP 2 OUTPUT—Characterizer is applied to Loop 2

Output.

There are eight (Xn) Input values and eight (Yn) Output

values to be selected. The following rules apply:

•When Input 2 is used, Input 2 Ratio and Bias are

applied to the Xn Values.

•When one of the Loop outputs are selected, the Xn

Input values are the Output from the control algorithm,

and the Yn Output is the final control element action.

This application is useful for non-linear control elements

or Process Variable.

A simple example is shown in Figure 4-2.

ATTENTION The X values below should be entered as increasing values (from 0% to 100%) from N = 0 to 8.

X0 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % X0 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X1 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % X1 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X2 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % X2 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X3 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % X3 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X4 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % X4 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X5 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % X5 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X6 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % X6 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X7 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % X7 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X8 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % X8 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

Y0 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % Y0 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y1 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % Y1 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y2 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % Y2 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y3 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % Y3 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y4 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % Y4 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y5 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % Y5 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y6 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % Y6 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y7 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % Y7 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y8 VALUE 0.00 to 99.99 % Y8 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 105

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

8SEG CH2

DISABL

INPUT1

INPUT2

L1 OUT

L2 OUT

8 SEGMENT CHARACTERIZER #2—A second eight

segment characterizer can be applied to either

Input 1, Input 2, Output 1, or Output 2.

DISABLE—Disables characterizer.

INPUT 1—Characterizer applied to Input 1.

INPUT 2—Characterizer applied to Input 2.

LOOP 1 OUTPUT—Characterizer applied to Loop 1

Output. (NOTE 1)

LOOP 2 OUTPUT—Characterizer applied to Loop 2

Output.

There are eight (Xn) Input values and eight (Yn) Output

values to be selected. The following rules apply:

•When Input 2 is used, Input 2 Ratio and Bias are

applied to the Xn Values.

•When one of the Loop outputs are selected, the Xn

Input values are the Output from the control algorithm,

and the Yn Output is the final control element action.

This application is useful for non-linear control elements

or Process Variable.

A simple example is shown in Figure 4-2.

ATTENTION The X values below should be entered as increasing values (from 0% to 100%) from N=0 to 8.

X0 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % X0 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X1 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % X1 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X2 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % X2 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X3 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % X3 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X4 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % X4 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X5 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % X5 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X6 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % X6 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X7 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % X7 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

X8 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % X8 INPUT VALUE (X AXIS)

Y0 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % Y0 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y1 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % Y1 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y2 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % Y2 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y3 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % Y3 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y4 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % Y4 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y5 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % Y5 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y6 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % Y6 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y7 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % Y7 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

Y8 VALU2 0.00 to 99.99 % Y8 INPUT VALUE (Y AXIS)

106 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Figure 4-2 Example of Eight Segment Characterizer

NXn

0.00

5.00

10.00

20.00

31.00

45.00

60.00

80.00

99.99

0.00

25.00

37.00

55.00

70.00

81.00

87.00

94.50

99.99

100% Y AXIS

Output

from

Characterizer

0% X4

Input to Characterizer

100%

X AXIS

Characterizer

Disabled

22673

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 107

Table 4-5 Algorithm Group Definitions, Continued

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

TOTALIZE

DISABL

INPUT1

IN AL1

IN AL2

TOTALIZER FUNCTION calculates and displays the total

flow volume as measured by Input 1 or applied to either

Input Algorithm 1 or Algorithm 2 to totalize the

compensated flow rate being calculated by the algorithm.

Displayed value is eight digits with a configurable scale

factor.

DISABLE—Disables the totalizer function.

INPUT 1—Totalizer is applied to Input 1.

IN AL1—Totalizer is applied to Input Algorithm 1.

IN AL2—Totalizer is applied to Input Algorithm 2.

ATTENTION The totalizer should always be reset to

initialize the counters whenever it is enabled. Otherwise,

the Σ (sigma) display will blink.

ΣXXXXXXX Σ*En READ ONLY

Current Scale Factor (Upper Display)

Actual Current Totalized Value (Lower Display)

TOT SCAL *E0 = 1 x 100 = 1

*E1 = 1 x 101 = 10

*E2 = 1 x 102 = 100

*E3 = 1 x 103 = 1,000

*E4 = 1 x 104 = 10,000

*E5 = 1 x 105 = 100,000

*E6 = 1 x 106 = 1,000,000

TOTALIZER SCALE FACTOR—Selects the desired Scale

Factor (i.e., Multiplier).

The desired factor is applied to the calculated value to

extend the maximum flow range that can be displayed.

TOT SEC

UNLOCK

LOCK

TOTALIZER RESET LOCK—Allows the totalizer to be

reset.

UNLOCK—Allows the totalizer value to be reset.

LOCK—Prevents the totalizer value from being reset.

Σ RSET ?

YES

TOTALIZER RESET—Appears only if the totalizer is

unlocked.

NO—No Reset

YES—Resets on next FUNCTION key press and

displays the reset value.

108 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

TOT RATE

SECOND

MINUTE

HOUR

DAY

ML/DAY

TOTALIZER INTEGRATION RATE—Determines the rate

at which the Totalizer is updated.

SECOND —Engineering units per second

MINUTE—Engineering units per minute

HOUR—Engineering units per hour

DAY —Engineering units per day

MIL/DAY—Millions of units per day

ATTENTION The source of the Totalizer is averaged

over the sample and update rates. For example, since the

loop cycle speed is six per second, then with the Totalizer

Rate set at once per minute, the source is averaged six

times per second and the Totalizer value is updated with

this average value ÷ 60 once per second.

NOTE 1: Does not apply to Three Position Step Control.

NOTE 2. If the calculated value of the quantity under the square root sign decreases to a value less than 0.010, the

calculation will become linear as the calculated value decreases below 0.010.

*Where: K = 0.001 to 1000 (configurable)

Calc Hi and Calc Lo are configurable over a range of –999 to 9999

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 109

4.7 Output Algorithm Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction This data deals with various output types in the controller, the Digital

Output Status, and the Current Duplex functionality.

Output algorithm

group prompts Table 4-6 lists all the function prompts in the Output Algorithm Set Up

group and their definitions.

Table 4-6 Output Algorithm Group Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

OUT ALG The OUTPUT ALGORITHM lets you select the type of

output you want. Not applicable with Control algorithm

prompt 3PSTEP.

Selections are hardware dependent. For example, if the

controller does not have a current output, then none of the

prompts for Output Algorithms that need a current output

will appear. Likewise, if the controller does not have a

relay output, then none of the prompts that need a relay

output will appear.

ATTENTION For all Duplex Output forms, PID heat

parameters apply for controller output greater than 50 %;

PID cool parameters apply for controller output less than

50 %.

TIME TIME SIMPLEX—This output algorithm uses Digital

Output 1 for Time Proportional Control. The output is

updated per the Loop sampling rate selection. Time

Proportional Output has a resolution of 4.44 msec. Cycle

Time is adjustable from 1 to 120 seconds.

CURRNT CURRENT SIMPLEX—Type of output using one 4 mA to

20 mA signal that can be fed into a positive or negative

grounded load of 0 to 1000 ohms. The signal can be

recalibrated for any desired range from 4 mA to 20 mA for

0 % to 100 % output.

POSITN POSITION PROPORTIONAL SIMPLEX—Type of output

using two SPDT relays and a motor which has a 100 to

1000 ohms feedback slidewire.

Forces Input 2 to SLIDEW selection.

ATTENTION Position Proportional is not available on

two-loop or cascade controllers.

Other prompts affected: DEADBAND, IN2 TYPE

TIME D TIME DUPLEX—This output algorithm uses Digital

Outputs 1 and 2 for Duplex Time Proportional Control. The

outputs are updated per the Loop sampling rate selection.

Time Proportional Output has a resolution of 4.44 msec.

Cycle Time is adjustable from 1 second to 120 seconds.

110 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

OUT ALG

(continued) CUR D CURRENT DUPLEX is similar to current simplex but uses

a second current output. The second output is usually

scaled so that zero and span correspond with 0 % and

50 % output (cool zone). When the output is 0 % to 50 %,

the controller uses tuning parameter set #2, when the

output is 50 % to 100 % it uses set #1.

Other prompts affected: 4-20 RNG

CUR TI CURRENT/TIME DUPLEX is a variation of duplex with

current active for 0 % to 50 % output (tuning set 2) and

time is active 50 % to 100 % output (tuning set 1).

Relay controls heat, current controls cool.

Other prompts affected: 4-20 RNG

TI CUR TIME CURRENT DUPLEX is similar to CUR TI except that

current is active for 50 % to 100 % and time is active for 0

% to 50 %.

Relay controls cool, current controls heat.

Other prompts affected: 4-20 RNG

4-20 RNG CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE ALGORITHM — Used with

Output Algorithm selections CUR D, CUR TI, or TI CUR.

50 PCT CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE (SPLIT)—This setting

should be used for Relay/Current and Current/Relay

Duplex Outputs. It can also be used for Current Duplex

when an Auxiliary Output board is present. This enables

the normal control current output to provide heat control

and the auxiliary current output to provide cool control. To

enable this:

•AUX OUT in the Options Set Up group must be selected

for Output.

•The Auxiliary Current Output is scaled as desired for 0-

50 % controller output.

•Deadband for this configuration only applies to the

Current Output. The Auxiliary Output must have the

Deadband scaled in.

FOR EXAMPLE: If a 2 % Deadband is desired, then enter

2.0 for the Deadband selection in the Control Algorithm

group. This will apply Deadband to the Current Output. In

the Options group, set the Auxiliary Output 4mA VAL

selection to 49.0 and the 20mA VAL selection to 0.0.

100PCT CURRENT DUPLEX RANGE (FULL) enables the Current

Output to provide both heat and cool functions for control

over 0-100 % of the controller output. The PID heat

parameters apply when the output is greater than 50 %

and the PID cool parameters apply when the output is less

than 50 %. The second current output is not required for

this type of duplex operation.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 111

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

OUT2 ALG

NONE

TIME

CURRNT

CUR D

CUR TI

TI CUR

The OUTPUT ALGORITHM lets you select the type of

output you want for the second control loop

See OUT ALG for definitions.

NONE

TIME SIMPLEX

CURRENT SIMPLEX (AUX OUT)

CURRENT DUPLEX (AUX OUT)

CURRENT/TIME DUPLEX

TIME/CURRENT DUPLEX

ATTENTION If Time Duplex or TPSC is selected as the

first control loop output, then TIME, CUR TI, and TI CUR

are not available as the second control loop output.

RLYSTATE

1OF2OF

1ON2OF

1OF2ON

1ON2ON

DIGITAL OUTPUT STATUS AT 0 % OUTPUT allows the

following selections:

1OF2OF Output 1 de-energized

Output 2 de-energized

1ON2OF Output 1 energized

Output 2 de-energized

1OF2ON Output 1 de-energized

Output 2 energized

1ON2ON Output 1 energized

Output 2 energized

RLY TYPE

MECHAN

SOL ST

RELAY CYCLE TIME INCREMENT selection is used only

for Time Simplex and Duplex output configurations and

affects both loops. This configuration sets the increment

size of the relay cycle times in the Tuning and Tuning 2

Set Up groups.

ELECTROMECHANICAL RELAY—Cycle time in one-

second increments.

SOLID STATE RELAY—Cycle time in 1/3 second

increments. This is useful for solid state relay applications

that require shorter cycle times. DO NOT use this setting

unless cycle times of less than 1 second are required.

The Lockout selection must be set to NONE in order to

view this selection.

112 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

4.8 Input 1 Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction These are the parameters required for Input 1: actuation, transmitter

characterization, high and low range values in engineering units, ratio,

bias, filter, burnout, and emissivity.

Input 1 group prompts Table 4-7 lists all the function prompts in the Input 1 Set Up group and

their definitions.

Table 4-7 Input 1 Group Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

IN1 TYPE

ATTENTION

Changing the input type

will result in the loss of

Field Calibration values

and will restore Factory

Calibration values.

DISABL

B TC

E TC H

E TC L

J TC H

J TC L

K TC H

K TC L

NNM H

NNM L

NM90 H

NM90 L

NIC TC

R TC

S TC

T TC H

T TC L

W TC H

W TC L

100 PT

100 LO

200 PT

500 PT

RAD RH

RAD RI

0-20mA

4-20mA

0-10mV

0-50mV

0-5 V

1-5 V

0-10 V

CARBON

OXYGEN

INPUT 1 ACTUATION TYPE – This selection determines

what actuation you are going to use for Input 1.

DISABLE—Disables Input.

B TC—B Thermocouple

E TC H—E Thermocouple High

E TC L—E Thermocouple Low

J TC H—J Thermocouple High

J TC L—J Thermocouple Low

K TC H—K Thermocouple High

K TC L—K Thermocouple Low

NNM H—Ni-Ni-Moly Thermocouple High

NNM L—Ni-Ni-Moly Thermocouple Low

NM90 H—NiMo-NiCo Thermocouple High

NM90 L—NiMo-NiCo Thermocouple Low

NIC TC—Nicrosil-Nisil Thermocouple

R TC—R Thermocouple

S TC—S Thermocouple

T TC H—T Thermocouple High

T TC L—T Thermocouple Low

W TC H—W5W26 Thermocouple High

W TC L—W5W26 Thermocouple Low

100 PT—100 Ohm RTD High

100 LO—100 Ohm RTD Low

200 PT—200 Ohm RTD

500 PT—500 Ohm RTD

RAD RH—Radiamatic RH

RAD RI—Radiamatic RI

0-20mA—0 to 20 Milliamperes

4-20mA—4 to 20 Milliamperes

0-10mV—0 to 10 Millivolts

0-50mV—0 to 50 Millivolts

0-5 V—0 to 5 Volts

1-5 V—1 to 5 Volts

0-10 V—0 to 10 Volts

Carbon

Oxygen

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 113

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

XMITTER Select one from the columns

below

B TC S TC

E TC H T TC H

E TC L T TC L

J TC H W TC H

J TC L W TC L

K TC H 100 PT

K TC L 100 LO

NNM H 200 PT

NNM L 500 PT

NM90 H RAD RH

NM90 L RAD RI

NIC TC LINEAR

R TC SQROOT

ANALYTIC

TRANSMITTER CHARACTERIZATION—This selection

lets you instruct the controller to characterize a linear input

to represent a non-linear one.

ATTENTION Prompt only appears when a linear

actuation is selected at prompt IN1 TYPE.

FOR EXAMPLE:

If input 1 is a 4 to 20 mA signal, but the signal represents

a type K thermocouple, select K TC H and the controller

will characterize the 4 to 20 mA signal so that it is treated

as a type K thermocouple input (high range).

Parameter definitions are the same as in IN1 TYPE.

ANALYTIC*

* Expanded models only

NONE

ORP mV

CONDmS

CONDuS

RSTVM^

TDS PPm

TDS PPb

CONCPt

DO PPm

DO PPb

Analytic Input Selections and Ranges—This prompt

appears only when XMITTER is set to ANALYTIC.

Choosing an Analytic setting here will set the Input Range

to appropriate Hi and Low values for that analytical

application. You can adjust the Input Range if you want.

Input Hi Input Low

NONE

as configured as configured

pH 14.00 0.00

ORP 1600 –999

(millivolts)

CONDUCTIVITY 20.00 0.00

(milli Siemens)

CONDUCTIVITY 2000 0.00

(micro Siemens)

RESISTIVITY 2000 0.00

(Megaohms)

TOTAL DISSOLVED SOLIDS 9999 0.00

(parts per million)

TOTAL DISSOLVED SOLIDS 9999 0.00

(parts per billion)

CONCENTRATION 20.00 0.00

(parts per thousand)

DISSOLVED OXYGEN 20.00 0.00

(parts per million)

DISSOLVED OXYGEN 2000 0.00

(parts per billion)

IN1 HI –999. To 9999. Floating

(in engineering units) INPUT 1 HIGH RANGE VALUE in engineering units is

displayed for all inputs but can only be configured for

linear or square root transmitter characterization.

Scale the #1 input signal to the display value you want for

100 %.

EXAMPLE:

Actuation (Input) = 4 to 20 mA

Process Variable = Flow

Range of Flow = 0 to 250 Gal/Min

High Range display value = 250

Then 20 mA = 250 Gal/Min

The control setpoint will be limited by the range of units

selected here.

114 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

IN1 LO –999. To 9999. Floating

(in engineering units) INPUT 1 LOW RANGE VALUE in engineering units is

displayed for all inputs but can only be configured for

linear or square root transmitter characterization. Scale

the #1 input signal to the display value you want for 0 %.

See example above. The control setpoint for Input 1 will

be limited by the range of units selected here.

RATIO 1 –20.00 to 20.00

Floats to 3 decimal places RATIO ON INPUT 1—Select the Ratio value you want on

Input 1.

BIAS IN1 –999. to 9999.

(in engineering units) BIAS ON INPUT 1 — Bias is used to compensate the

input for drift of an input value due to deterioration of a

sensor, or some other cause. Select the bias value you

want on Input 1.

FILTER 1 0 to 120 seconds

No filter = 0 FILTER FOR INPUT 1—A software digital filter is provided

for Input 1 to smooth the input signal. You can configure

the first order lag time constant from 1 to 120 seconds. If

you do not want filtering, enter 0.

BURNOUT

NONE

DOWN

NO_FS

BURNOUT PROTECTION (SENSOR BREAK) provides

most input types with upscale or downscale protection if

the input fails.

1-5V, 0-10V, or 4-20 mA inputs require no burnout or

NONE selection.

NO BURNOUT—Pre-configured Failsafe output applied if

failed input is detected (does not apply for an input out of

range). Error message INPUT 1 FAIL is flashed on the

lower display intermittently every 10 seconds.

UPSCALE BURNOUT will make the PV signal increase to

full scale when a sensor fails, and flash INPUT 1 FAIL on

the lower display intermittently every 10 seconds.

The controller remains in Automatic control mode and

adjusts the controller output signal in response to the full

scale PV signal developed by the Burnout circuitry.

DOWNSCALE BURNOUT will make the PV signal

decrease to the lower range value when a sensor fails,

and flash INPUT 1 FAIL on the lower display intermittently

every 10 seconds.

The controller remains in Automatic control mode and

adjusts the controller output signal in response to the zero

percent PV signal developed by the Burnout circuitry.

NO FAILSAFE—This selection does not provide input

failure detection and should only be used when an

absolute accuracy is the most important criteria. (For this

selection, no burnout signal is sent to the sensor.)

ATTENTION For no Burnout, i.e. NONE, to function

properly on a 4-20 mA input, there must be a dropping

resistor directly across the input terminals (i.e., not

remote), then the unit can detect the “zero” voltage that

occurs when the 4-20 mA line is opened.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 115

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

EMISSIV1 0.01 to 1.00 EMISSIVITY is a correction factor applied to the

Radiamatic input signal that is the ratio of the actual

energy emitted from the target to the energy which would

be emitted if the target were a perfect radiator.

Available only for Radiamatic inputs.

116 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

4.9 Input 2 Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction These are the parameters required for Input 2: actuation, transmitter

characterization, high and low range values in engineering units, ratio,

bias, filter, burnout, and emissivity.

ATTENTION Prompts for Input 2 appear only if the Input 2 PWA is

installed. If the Loop1 Control Algorithm is set for PID A, PID B, or

PD+MR and the Loop1 Output Algorithm is set for Position Proportional

then the Input 2 configuration prompts are not displayed.

Input 2 group prompts Table 4-8 lists all the function prompts in the Input 2 Set Up group and

their definitions.

Table 4-8 Input 2 Group Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

IN2 TYPE

ATTENTION

Changing the input type

will result in the loss of

Field Calibration values

and will restore Factory

Calibration values.

Same as for Input 1 (except

Carbon and Oxygen are not

used) plus:

SLIDEW*

INPUT 2 ACTUATION TYPE – This selection determines

what actuation you are going to use for Input 2.

SLIDEWIRE

*If the Loop 1 Output Algorithm is set for Position

Proportional, then the Input 2 actuation is forced to

slidewire (SLIDEW). If Loop 1 Control Algorithm is set for

Three Position Step Control, then the SLIDEW setting

allows the motor position to be shown on the Lower

Display. The SLIDEW setting is not available on two-loop

or cascade controllers.

XMITTER2

ANALYTIC

IN2 HI

IN2 LO

RATIO 2

BIAS IN2

FILTER 2

BURNOUT2

EMISSIV2

Input 2 ranges and

selections are same as for

Input 1.

Refer to Input 1 parameters for definitions.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 117

4.10 Input 3 Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction These are the parameters required for Input 3: actuation, transmitter

characterization, high and low range values in engineering units, ratio,

bias, and filter.

ATTENTION Input 3 prompts appear on expanded models only. Prompts

for Input 3 only appear if Input 2 PWA is installed and the actuation for

Input 2 is configured for one of the following types: 0-5 Vdc, 1-5 Vdc,

0-20 mA, or 4-20 mA.

Input 3 group prompts Table 4-9 lists all the function prompts in the Input 3 Set Up group and

their definitions.

Table 4-9 Input 3 Group Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

IN3 TYPE

ATTENTION

Changing the input type

will result in the loss of

Field Calibration values

and will restore Factory

Calibration values.

DISABL

0-20mA

4-20mA

0-5 V

1-5 V

INPUT 3 ACTUATION TYPE – This selection determines

what actuation you are going to use for Input 3.

DISABL—Disables Input 3

0-20mA—0 to 20 milliamperes

4-20mA—4 to 20 milliamperes

0-5 V—0 to 5 volts

1-5 V—1 to 5 volts

XMITTER2

IN3 HI

IN3 LO

RATIO 3

BIAS IN3

FILTER 3

Input 3 ranges and

selections are same as for

Input 1 except Burnout and

Emissivity are not available.

Refer to Input 1 parameters for definitions.

118 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

4.11 Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction The functions listed in this group deal with how the Single-Loop process

controller or Loop 1 of a Two-Loop process controller will control the

process including: PV source, Number of tuning parameter sets, Setpoint

source, Tracking, Power-up recall, Setpoint limits, Output direction, rate

and limits, Power-up preset outputs, Dropoff, Deadband, and Hysteresis.

Control group

prompts Table 4-10 lists all the function prompts in the Control Set Up group and

their definitions.

Table 4-10 Control Group Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

PV SOURCE

INP 1

INP 2

IN AL1

IN AL2

INP 3

PROCESS VARIABLE SOURCE —Select the source of

the Process Variable.

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

INPUT ALGORITHM 1

INPUT ALGORITHM 2

INPUT 3

PID SETS NUMBER OF TUNING PARAMETER SETS—This

selection lets you choose one or two sets of tuning

constants (gain, rate, and reset).

1 ONLY ONE SET ONLY—Only one set of tuning parameters is

available. Configure the values for:

Gain (proportional band),

Rate,

Reset Time, and

Cycle Time (if time proportional is used).

2KEYBD TWO SETS KEYBOARD SELECTABLE—Two sets of

tuning parameters can be configured and can be selected

at the operator interface or by using the Digital Inputs.

Press LOWER DISPLAY key until you see PID SET1 or

PID SET2 then press or to switch between

sets. Configure the values for:

Gain, Rate, Reset, Cycle Time

Gain #2, Rate #2, Reset #2, Cycle #2 Time

See Subsection 5.10 for procedures.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 119

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

PID SETS

(continued) 2PV SW TWO SETS PV AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER—When the

process variable is GREATER than the value set at

prompt SW VALUE (Switchover Value), the controller will

use Gain, Rate, Reset, and Cycle Time. The active PID

SET can be read in the lower display.

When the process variable is LESS than the value set at

prompt SW VALUE, the controller will use Gain #2, Rate

#2, Reset #2, and Cycle #2 Time. The active PID SET can

be read in the lower display.

Other prompts affected: SW VALUE

2SP SW TWO SETS SP AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER—When the

setpoint is GREATER than the value set at prompt SW

VALUE (Switchover Value), the controller will use Gain,

Rate, Reset, and Cycle.

When the setpoint is LESS than the value set at prompt

SW VALUE, the controller will use Gain #2, Rate #2,

Reset #2, and Cycle #2.

Other prompts affected: SW VALUE

GAIN S* GAIN SCHEDULING allows you to schedule eight user-

defined Gain segments applied over a user-defined PV

range. Enter Gain and PV values under Tuning Set Up

prompts. PB or GAIN selection in this group also applies.

*Part of Math option DC330E

ATTENTION Gain scheduling automatically disables

Accutune for this loop.

SW VALUE Value in engineering units

within PV or SP range limits AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER VALUE—This is the value of

Process Variable or Setpoint at which the controller will

switch from Tuning Constant Set #2 to Set #1.

Only appears when PID SETS selection is configured for

either 2 PVSW or 2 SPSW.

LSP’S LOCAL SETPOINT SOURCE—This selection determines

what your local setpoint source will be.

1 ONLY LOCAL SETPOINT—The setpoint entered from the

keyboard.

TWO TWO LOCAL SETPOINTS—This selection lets you

switch between two local setpoints using the

SETPOINT SELECT key.

THREE THREE LOCAL SETPOINTS—This selection lets you

switch between three local setpoints using the

SETPOINT SELECT key. LSP 3 is mutually exclusive

with RSP or Internal Cascade.

120 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

RSP SRC

NONE

INP 2

IN AL1

IN AL2

INP 3

REMOTE SETPOINT SOURCE—This selection

determines what your remote setpoint source will be when

toggled by the SETPOINT SELECT key or Digital Input.

Not available for Cascade PID Loop.

RSP, Cascade, and SP3 are mutually exclusive.

NONE—No remote setpoint.

INP 2—Remote Setpoint is Input 2.

IN AL1—Remote Setpoint using Input 1 algorithm.

IN AL2—Remote Setpoint using Input 2 algorithm.

INP 3—Remote Setpoint is Input 3.

ATTENTION To cycle through the available local

setpoints and remote setpoint, press and hold in the

[SETPOINT SELECT] key. When the key is released, the

setpoint selection currently displayed will be the new

setpoint selection.

AUTOBIAS

ENABLE

DISABL

AUTOBIAS is used for bumpless transfer when

transferring from local setpoint to remote setpoint. Auto

Bias calculates and adds a bias to remote setpoint input

each time a transfer is made.

Only available if no tracking is selected.

ENABLE—Enables auto bias.

DISABLE—Disables auto bias.

SP TRACK SETPOINT TRACKING—The local setpoint can be

configured to track either PV or RSP as listed below. Not

configurable when Auto Bias is set.

ATTENTION For selections other than NONE, LSP is

stored in nonvolatile memory only when there is a mode

change; i.e., when switching from RSP to LSP or from

Manual to Automatic. If power is lost, then the current LSP

value is also lost.

NONE NO TRACKING—If local setpoint tracking is not

configured, the LSP will not be altered when transfer from

RSP to LSP is made.

PV PV—Local setpoint tracks the PV when in manual.

RSP RSP—Local setpoint tracks remote setpoint when in

automatic. When the controller transfers out of remote

setpoint, the last value of the remote setpoint (RSP) is

inserted into the local setpoint.

PWR MODE POWER UP CONTROLLER MODE RECALL—This

selection determines which mode and setpoint the

controller will use when the controller restarts after a

power loss. It applies to both loops.

MANUAL MANUAL, LSP—At power-up, the controller will use

manual mode with the local setpoint displayed.

A LSP AUTOMATIC MODE, LAST LSP—At power-up, the

controller will use automatic mode with the last local

setpoint used before power down displayed.

A RSP AUTOMATIC MODE, LAST RSP—At power-up, the

controller will use automatic mode with the last remote

setpoint used before power down displayed.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 121

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

AM SP LAST MODE/LAST SETPOINT used before power down.

AM LSP LAST MODE/LAST LOCAL SETPOINT on power down.

PWR OUT

For Three Position

Step Control Only

(Note 3) LAST

F’SAFE

TPSC (Three-Position Step Control) OUTPUT START-

UP MODE—This selection determines what position the

motor will be in when powered up or in the failsafe

position.

LAST OUTPUT—At power-up in automatic mode, the

motor position will be the last one prior to power down.

When the unit goes into FAILSAFE, it will stay in

automatic mode; motor will not be driven to the configured

failsafe position.

FAILSAFE OUTPUT—At power-up in manual mode, the

motor will be driven to either the 0 % or 100 % output

position, whichever is selected at prompt FAILSAFE. For

Burnout/None, when the unit goes into FAILSAFE, it will

go to manual mode; motor will be driven to the configured

failsafe position.

SP HiLIM 0 to 100 % of PV span in

engineering units SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT*—This selection prevents the

local and remote setpoints from going above the value

selected here. The setting must be equal or less than the

upper range of the inputs.

SP LoLIM 0 to 100 % of PV span in

engineering units SET POINT LOW LIMIT*—This selection prevents the

local and remote setpoints from going below the value

selected here. The setting must be equal or greater than

the lower range of the inputs.

ACTION CONTROL OUTPUT DIRECTION—Select direct or

reverse acting.

DIRECT DIRECT ACTING CONTROL—The controller’s output

increases as the process variable increases.

REVRSE REVERSE ACTING CONTROL—The controller’s output

decreases as the process variable increases.

*The local setpoint will automatically adjust itself to be within the setpoint limit range. For example, if SP = 1500 and

the SP HiLIM is changed to 1200, the new local setpoint will be 1200.

OUT RATE

ENABLE

DISABL

OUTPUT CHANGE RATE—Enables or disables the

Output Change Rate. The maximum rate is set at prompt

PCT/M UP or PCT/M DN. Only available for PID-A, PID-B,

PD+MR control algorithms.

ENABLE—Allows output rate.

DISABLE—Disables output rate.

PCT/M UP 0 to 9999 % per minute OUTPUT RATE UP VALUE—This selection limits the rate

at which the output can change upward. Enter a value in

percent per minute. Appears only if OUT RATE is enabled.

“0” means no output rate applied.

PCT/M DN 0 to 9999 % per minute OUTPUT RATE DOWN VALUE—This selection limits the

rate at which the output can change downward. Enter a

value in percent per minute. Appears only if OUT RATE is

enabled. “0” means no output rate.

OUTHiLIM –5.0 to 105 % of output HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT—This is the highest value of output

beyond which you do not want the controller automatic

output to exceed. Use 0 % to 100 % for digital output type.

Use –5 % to 105 % for current position output.

122 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

OUTLoLIM –5.0 to 105 % of output LOW OUTPUT LIMIT—This is the lowest value of output

below which you do not want the controller automatic

output to exceed.

Use 0 % to 100 % for digital output type.

Use –5 % to 105 % for current position output.

I Hi LIM* Within the range of the

output limits HIGH RESET LIMIT—This is the highest value of output

beyond which you want no reset to occur.

I Lo LIM* Within the range of the

output limits LOW RESET LIMIT—This is the lowest value of output

beyond which you want no reset to occur.

DROPOFF* –5 to 105 % of output CONTROLLER DROPOFF VALUE—Output value below

which the controller output will drop off to the low output

limit value set in prompt OUTLoLIM.

DEADBAND

–5.0 to 25.0 %

0.0 to 25.0 %

0.5 to 5.0 %

DEADBAND is an adjustable gap between the operating

ranges of output 1 and output 2 in which neither output

operates (positive value) or both outputs operate (negative

value).

Time Duplex

On-Off Duplex

Position Proportional and Three Position Step

*Reset limits and Dropoff are not displayed when Three Position Step Control is configured.

OUT HYST 0.0 to 100.0 % of PV span HYSTERESIS (OUTPUT RELAY) is an adjustable overlap

of the ON/OFF states of each control output. This is the

difference between the value of the process variable at

which the control outputs energize and the value at which

they de-energize.

Only applicable for ON/OFF control.

FAILMODE

NO LAT

LATCH

FAILSAFE MODE

NON LATCHING—Controller stays in last mode that was

being used (automatic or manual); output goes to failsafe

value. (NOTE 1, NOTE 2)

LATCHING—Controller goes to manual mode; output

goes to failsafe value. (NOTE 2)

FAILSAFE 0 to 100 % FAILSAFE OUTPUT VALUE—The value used here will

also be the output level when you have Communications

SHED set to failsafe or when NO BURNOUT is configured

and Input 1 fails.

Applies for all output types except 3 Position Step.

0 PCT

100PCT

THREE POSITION STEP FAILSAFE OUTPUT

0 PCT—Motor goes to closed position.

100PCT—Motor goes to open position.

SW_FAIL

0 OCT

100 PCT

PDMR/Position Proportional motor position when slidewire

fails.

0 PCT—Motor goes to closed position.

100PCT—Motor goes to open position.

Note: PWR OUT must be configured for FSAF.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 123

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

MAN OUT 0 to 100 % POWER-UP PRESET MANUAL OUTPUT—At power-up,

the controller will go to manual and the output to the value

set here. (NOTE 1)

AUTO OUT 0 to 100 % POWER-UP PRESET AUTOMATIC OUTPUT—At power-

up, the controller will begin its automatic control at the

output value set here. (NOTE 1)

PBorGAIN* PROPORTIONAL BAND UNITS—Select one of the

following for the Proportional (P) term of the PID algorithm:

PB PCT PROPORTIONAL BAND selects units of percent

proportional band for the P term of the PID algorithm.

Where: PB % = 100 % FS

GAIN

GAIN GAIN selects the unitless term of gain for the P term of the

PID algorithm.

Where: GAIN = 100 % FS

PB%

MINorRPM* RESET UNITS—Selects units of minutes per repeat or

repeats per minute for the I term of the PID algorithm.

20 Repeats per Minute = 0.05 Minutes per Repeat.

RPM REPEATS PER MINUTE—The number of times per

minute that the proportional action is repeated by reset.

MIN MINUTES PER REPEAT—The time between each repeat

of the proportional action by reset.

*Selection here is used for both Loop 1 and Loop 2 if available. Also applies to Gain Scheduling on Loops 1 and 2.

NOTE 1: Does not apply to Three Position Step Control.

NOTE 2: If controller is in Manual upon failure, output will maintain its value at time of failure.

NOTE 3:These selections appear when:

1. Control Algorithm is selected for 3PSTEP.

2. Control Algorithm is selected for PD+MR and Output Algorithm is selected for Position Proportional.

124 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

4.12 Loop 2 Control Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction The functions listed in this group deal with how Loop 2 of a Two-Loop

process controller will control the process including: PV source, Number

of tuning parameter sets, Setpoint source, Tracking, Power-up recall,

Setpoint limits, Output direction, rate and limits, Dropoff, Deadband, and

Hysteresis.

Only available on Expanded Model DC330E-XX-XXX.

Control 2 group

prompts Table 4-11 lists all the function prompts in the Control 2 Set Up group and

their definitions.

Table 4-11 Control 2 Group Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

PV 2 SRC

INP 1

INP 2

IN AL1

IN AL2

INP 3

PROCESS VARIABLE 2 SOURCE—Select the source of

the Process Variable for Loop 2.

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

INPUT ALGORITHM 1

INPUT ALGORITHM 2

INPUT 3

FORCE MA

DISABL

LINK12

FORCE MANUAL/AUTO links Auto/Manual modes. If

either loop changes mode due to a front panel change,

digital input action, or failsafe action, the other loop tracks

that mode.

DISABL—Disables FORCE MA.

LINK12—Links modes for both loops.

PID SETS NUMBER OF TUNING PARAMETER SETS—This

selection lets you choose one or two sets of tuning

constants (gain, rate, and reset).

1 ONLY ONE SET ONLY—Only one set of tuning parameters is

available. Configure the values for:

Gain (proportional band)

Rate

Reset Time

Cycle Time (if time proportional is used)

2KEYBD TWO SETS KEYBOARD SELECTABLE—Two sets of

tuning parameters can be configured and can be selected

at the operator interface or by using the Digital Inputs.

Press LOWER DISPLAY key until you see PID SET3 or

PID SET4 then press or to switch between

sets. Configure the values for:

Gain #3, Rate #3 , Reset #3, Cycle #3 Time

Gain #4, Rate #4, Reset #4, Cycle #4 Time

See Subsection 5.10 for procedure.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 125

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

PID SETS

(continued) 2PV SW TWO SETS PV AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER—When the

process variable is GREATER than the value set at

prompt SW VALUE (Switchover Value), the controller will

use Gain #3, Rate #3, Reset #3, and Cycle #3 Time. The

active PID SET can be read in the lower display.

When the process variable is LESS than the value set at

prompt SW VALUE, the controller will use Gain #4, Rate

#4, Reset #4, and Cycle #4 Time. The active PID SET can

be read in the lower display.

Other prompts affected: SW VALUE

2SP SW TWO SETS SP AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER—When the

setpoint is GREATER than the value set at prompt SW

VALUE (Switchover Value), the controller will use Gain #3,

Rate #3, Reset #3, and Cycle #3.

When the setpoint is LESS than the value set at prompt

SW VALUE, the controller will use Gain #4, Rate #4,

Reset #4, and Cycle #4.

Other prompts affected: SW VALUE

GAIN S GAIN SCHEDULING allows you to schedule eight user-

defined Gain segments applied over a user-defined PV

range. Enter Gain and PV values under Loop 2 Tuning Set

Up prompts. PBorGAIN selection in Control Set Up group

also applies.

ATTENTION Gain scheduling automatically disables

Accutune for this loop.

SW VALUE Value in engineering units

within PV or SP range limits AUTOMATIC SWITCHOVER VALUE—This is the value of

Process Variable or Setpoint at which the controller will

switch from Tuning Constant Set #4 to Set #3.

Only appears when PID SETS selections 2 PVSW or 2

SPSW are selected.

LSP’S LOCAL SETPOINT SOURCE—This selection determines

what your local setpoint source will be.

1 ONLY LOCAL SETPOINT—The setpoint entered from the

keyboard.

TWO TWO LOCAL SETPOINTS—This selection lets you switch

between two local setpoints using the

SETPOINT SELECT key.

THREE THREE LOCAL SETPOINTS—This selection lets you

switch between three local setpoints using the

SETPOINT SELECT key. LSP 3 is mutually exclusive

with RSP or Internal Cascade.

126 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

RSP SRC

NONE

INP 2

IN AL1

IN AL2

INP 3

REMOTE SETPOINT SOURCE—This selection

determines what your remote setpoint source will be when

toggled by the SETPOINT SELECT or Digital Input.

NONE—No remote setpoint,

INPUT 2—Remote Setpoint is Input 2.

INPUT ALGORITHM 1—Remote Setpoint using Input 1

algorithm.

INPUT ALGORITHM 2—Remote Setpoint using Input 2

algorithm.

INP 3—Remote Setpoint is Input 3.

ATTENTION To cycle through the available local

setpoints and remote setpoint, press and hold in the

[SETPOINT SELECT] key. When the key is released, the

setpoint selection currently displayed will be the new

setpoint selection.

AUTOBIAS

ENABLE

DISABL

AUTO BIAS is used for bumpless transfer when

transferring from local setpoint to remote setpoint. Auto

Bias calculates and adds a bias to the remote setpoint

input each time a transfer is made. Available for any

analog input RSP source and if no tracking is selected.

ENABLE—Enables auto bias.

DISABLE—Disables auto bias.

SPTRACK SETPOINT TRACKING—The local setpoint can be

configured to track either PV or RSP as listed below. Not

configurable when Auto Bias is set.

ATTENTION For selections other than NONE, LSP is

stored in nonvolatile memory only when there is a mode

change; i.e., when switching from RSP to LSP or from

Manual to Automatic. If power is lost, then the current LSP

value is also lost.

NONE NO TRACKING—If local setpoint tracking is not

configured, the LSP will not be altered when transfer from

RSP to LSP is made.

PV PV—Local setpoint tracks the PV when in manual mode.

RSP RSP—Local setpoint tracks remote setpoint. When the

controller transfers out of remote setpoint, the last value of

the remote setpoint (RSP) is inserted into the local

setpoint.

SP HiLIM 0 to 100 % of span input in

engineering units with

decimal place

SETPOINT HIGH LIMIT*—This selection prevents the

local and remote setpoints from going above the value

selected here. The setting must be equal or less than the

upper range of the inputs.

SP LoLIM 0 to 100 % of span input in

engineering units with

decimal place

SETPOINT LOW LIMIT*—This selection prevents the

local and remote setpoints from going below the value

selected here. The setting must be equal or greater than

the lower range of the inputs.

ACTION CONTROL OUTPUT DIRECTION—Select direct or

reverse acting control.

DIRECT DIRECT ACTING CONTROL—The controller's output

increases as the process variable increases.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 127

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

REVRSE REVERSE ACTING CONTROL—The controller's output

decreases as the process variable increases.

OUT RATE

DISABL

ENABLE

OUTPUT CHANGE RATE—Enables or disables the

Output Change Rate. The maximum rate is set at prompt

PCT/M UP or PCT/M DN.

DISABLE—Disables output rate.

ENABLE—Allows output rate.

PCT/M UP 0 to 9999 % per minute OUTPUT RATE UP VALUE—This selection limits the rate

at which the output can change upward. Enter a value in

percent per minute. Appears only if OUT RATE is enabled.

“0” means no output rate applied.

PCT/M DN 0 to 9999 % per minute OUTPUT RATE DOWN VALUE—This selection limits the

rate at which the output can change downward. Enter a

value in percent per minute. Appears only if OUT RATE is

enabled. “0” means no output rate.

OUT HiLIM –5 to 105 % of output HIGH OUTPUT LIMIT—This is the highest value of output

beyond which you do not want the controller automatic

output to exceed.

Use 0 to 100 % for digital output type.

Use 5 to 105 % for current output.

OUT LoLIM –5 to 105 % of output LOW OUTPUT LIMIT—This is the lowest value of output

below which you do not want the controller automatic

output to exceed.

Use 0 % to 100 % for digital output type.

Use 5 % to 105 % for current output.

*The Local Setpoint will automatically adjust itself to be within the setpoint limit range. For example, if SP = 1500 and

the SP HiLIM is changed to 1200, the new Local Setpoint will be 1200.

I Hi LIM Within the range of the

output limits HIGH RESET LIMIT—This is the highest value of output

beyond which you want no reset to occur.

I Lo LIM Within the range of the

output limits LOW RESET LIMIT—This is the lowest value of output

beyond which you want no reset to occur.

DROPOFF –5 to 105 % of output CONTROLLER DROPOFF VALUE—Output value below

which the controller output will drop off to the low output

limit value set in prompt OUTLoLIM.

DEADBAND –5.0 to 5.0 % DEADBAND is an adjustable gap between the operating

ranges of output 1 and output 2 in which neither output

operates (positive value) or both outputs operate (negative

value).

FAILMODE

NO LAT

LATCH

FAILSAFE MODE

NON LATCHING—Controller stays in last mode

(automatic or manual); output goes to failsafe value.

LATCHING—Controller goes to manual mode; output

goes to failsafe value.

128 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

FAILSAFE 0 to 100 % FAILSAFE OUTPUT 2 VALUE—The value used here will

also be the output level when you have Communications

SHED set to failsafe or when NO BURNOUT is configured

and input 1 fails.

ATTENTION At power-up, the Loop 2 Output is set to

the Failsafe Output 2 value.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 129

4.13 Options Set Up Group

Introduction Configure the remote mode switch (Digital Inputs) to a specific contact

closure response, or configure the Auxiliary Output to be a specific

selection with desired scaling.

Option group prompts Table 4-12 lists all the function prompts in the Options Set Up group and

their functions.

Table 4-12 Options Group Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

AUX OUT

CUR OUT2*

ATTENTION Prompts

for the Auxiliary Output

Selection appear only if

one of the Auxiliary

Output boards is

installed.

*DE330E only

AUXILIARY OUTPUT SELECTION FOR ONE LOOP

AUXILIARY OUTPUT SELECTION FOR TWO LOOPS

This selection provides an mA output representing one of

several control parameters. The display for auxiliary output

viewing will be in engineering units for all but output.

Output will be displayed in percent.

Other prompts affected by these selections: 4mA VAL and

20mA VAL.

ATTENTION When the controller is configured for Two-

Loop operation, and the Loop 2 Output selection requires

a current output, the Auxiliary Output selection is

automatically set to Output 2 and all other selections are

locked out.

ATTENTION Output cannot be configured when Three

Position Step Control is used.

DISABL NO AUXILIARY OUTPUT

INP 1 INPUT 1—This represents the configured range of input 1.

FOR EXAMPLE:

Type J Thermocouple (0 °F to 1600 °F)

0 °F display = 0 % output

1600 °F display = 100 % output

INP 2 INPUT 2 represents the value of the configured range of

input 2.

INP 3 INPUT 3 represents the value of the configured range of

input 3.

CB OUT CONTROL BLOCK OUTPUT—Represents the

uncharacterized use of automatic control valve which

allows the characterizer to characterize the output on

Analog Output 1 and the Auxiliary Output to use the

uncharacterized output value as Output 2.

PV PROCESS VARIABLE—Represents the value of the

Process Variable. PV = Input XxRatioX + BiasX

130 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

AUX OUT DEV DEVIATION (PROCESS VARIABLE MINUS

SETPOINT)—Represents –100 % to +100 % of the

selected PV span in engineering units.

FOR EXAMPLE:

Type T Thermocouple

PV range = –300 °F to +700 °F

PV span = 1000 °F

Deviation Range = –1000 °F to +1000 °F

If PV = 500 °F

and SP = 650 °F

then Deviation Display = –150 °F

Auxiliary Output = 42.5 %

When Deviation is selected, only one operating parameter

will be entered. This value represents the deviation level

that will produce 20 mA (100 %) output. Zero deviation will

produce a center scale (12 mA or 50 %) output. A

negative deviation equal in magnitude to the auxiliary

output high value will produce a low end (4 mA or 0 %)

output.

OUTPUT OUTPUT—Represents the displayed controller Loop 1

output in percent (%). Cannot be used with

3 Position Step Control.

SP SETPOINT—Represents the Loop1 value of the setpoint

in units of PV.

LSP 1 LOCAL SETPOINT ONE—Auxiliary output represents

Loop1 local setpoint one regardless of active setpoint.

IN AL1 INPUT ALGORITHM 1 OUTPUT—Represents the output

from input algorithm 1.

IN AL2 INPUT ALGORITHM 2 OUTPUT—Represents the output

from input algorithm 2.

PV2 PROCESS VARIABLE 2—Represents the value of the

Process Variable for Loop 2.

DEV 2 DEVIATION 2 (PROCESS VARIABLE MINUS

SETPOINT)—Represents –100 % to +100 % of the

selected PV span in engineering units for Loop 2.

When Deviation is selected, only one operating parameter

will be entered. This value represents the deviation level

that will produce 20 mA (100 %) output. Zero deviation will

produce a center scale (12 mA or 50 %) output. A

negative deviation equal in magnitude to the auxiliary

output high value will produce a low end (4 mA or 0 %)

output.

OUTPT2 OUTPUT 2—Represents the displayed controller output in

percent (%) for Loop 2.

SP L2 SETPOINT 2—Represents the value of the setpoint in

units of PV for Loop 2.

LSP1 2 LOCAL SETPOINT 2—Represents the value of local

setpoint #1 in units of PV for Loop 2.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 131

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

AUX OUT

(continued) CB OUT2 CONTROL BLOCK OUTPUT2—Represents the

uncharacterized use of automatic control valve which

allows the characterizer to characterize the output on

Analog Output 1 and the Auxiliary Output to use the

uncharacterized output value as Output 2.

4mA VAL* Low Scale Value within the

range of the selected

variable to represent 4 mA

AUXILIARY OUTPUT LOW SCALING FACTOR—Use a

value in engineering units to represent all AUX OUT

parameters except output.

Use value in percent (%) for output. (Output can be

between –5 % and +105 %.)

20mA VAL* High Scale Value within the

range of the selected

variable to represent 20 mA

AUXILIARY OUTPUT HIGH SCALING FACTOR—Use a

value in engineering units to represent all AUX OUT

parameters except output.

Use a value in percent (%) for Output. (Output can be

between –5 % and +105 %.)

*When Deviation is selected, only one operating parameter will be entered. This value represents the deviation level

that will produce 20 mA (100 %) output. Zero deviation will produce a center scale (12 mA or 50 %) output. A

negative deviation equal in magnitude to the auxiliary output high value will produce a low end (4 mA or 0 %) output.

DIG IN 1 DIGITAL INPUT 1 SELECTIONS—All selections are

available for Input 1. The controller returns to its original

state when contact opens, except when overruled by the

keyboard.

ATTENTION When the controller is configured for either

Cascade or Two-Loop control, then digital input #1

operates only on Loop 1 and digital input #2 operates only

on Loop 2.

NONE NO DIGITAL INPUT SELECTIONS

TO MAN TO MANUAL—Contact closure puts the affected loop into

manual mode. Contact open returns controller to former

mode.

TO LSP TO LOCAL SETPOINT—When a remote setpoint is

configured, contact closure puts the controller into local

setpoint 1. When contact opens, the controller returns to

former operation—local or remote setpoint—unless

SETPOINT SELECT key is pressed while digital input is

active. If this happens, the controller will stay in the local

setpoint mode when contact opens.

TO 2SP TO LOCAL SETPOINT TWO—Contact closure puts the

controller into local setpoint 2.

TO 3SP TO LOCAL SETPOINT THREE—Contact closure puts the

controller into local setpoint 3.

TO DIR TO DIRECT ACTION—Contact closure selects direct

controller action.

132 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

DIG IN 1

(continued) ToHOLD TO HOLD—Contact closure suspends Setpoint Program

or Setpoint Ramp. When contact reopens, the controller

starts from the Hold point of the Ramp/Program unless the

Ramp/Program was not previously started via the

RUN/HOLD key.

This selection applies to either loop.

ToPID2 TO PID2—Contact closure selects PID Set 2.

PV 2IN PV=INPUT 2—Contact closure selects PV = Input 2.

PV 3IN PV=INPUT 3—Contact closure selects PV = Input 3.

RERUN RERUN--Allows the Setpoint Programmer to be reset to

the initial segment of its current cycle , unit stays in

previous mode.

TO RUN RUN—Contact closure starts a stopped SP Ramp or

Program. Upper left character blinks “R”. Reopening the

contact puts controller in HOLD mode.

This selection applies to either loop.

ToBEGN EXTERNAL SP PROGRAM RESET—Contact closure

resets SP Program back to the beginning of the first

segment in the program and places the program in the

HOLD mode. Program cycle number is not affected.

Reopening switch has no effect.

This selection applies to either loop.

ATTENTION Once the last segment of the setpoint

program has timed out, the controller enters the mode of

action specified in the configuration data and the program

cannot be reset to the beginning of the first segment by

digital input closure.

STOP I INHIBIT INTEGRAL (RESET)—Contact closure disables

PID Integral (Reset) action.

MAN FS MANUAL FAILSAFE OUTPUT—Controller goes to

Manual mode, output goes to the Failsafe value.

ATTENTION This will cause a bump in the output when

switching from Automatic to Manual. The switch back from

Manual to Automatic is bumpless. When the switch is

closed, the output can be adjusted from the keyboard.

ToLOCK KEYBOARD LOCKOUT—Contact closure disables all

keys. Lower display shows LOCKED if a key is pressed.

ToAout AUTOMATIC OUTPUT—Contact closure sends output to

the value set at Control prompt AUTO OUT when the

controller is in the Automatic mode. Reopening the

contact returns the controller to the normal output.

(NOTE 1)

This selection is only available on Loop 1.

TIMER TIMER—Contact closure starts timer, if enabled.

Reopening the switch has no effect.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 133

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

DIG IN 1

(continued) AM STA TO AUTO/MANUAL STATION—Contact closure causes

the loop to perform as follows:

PV = Input 2

Action = Direct

Control algorithm = PD+MR

PID SET = 2

SP = LSP 2

This selection is only available on Loop 1.

ToTUNE INITIATE LIMIT CYCLE TUNING—Contact closure starts

the tuning process. The lower display shows TUNE ON.

Opening the contact has no effect.

SPinit SETPOINT INITIALIZATION—Contact closure forces the

setpoint to the current PV value. Opening the contact has

no effect.

TRACK1 OUTPUT 1 TRACKS INPUT 2*—Contact closure allows

Output 1 to track Input 2. (NOTE 1)

TRACK2 OUTPUT 2 TRACKS INPUT 2*—Contact closure allows

Output 2 to track Input 2.

ToOUT2 OUTPUT 2 OVERRIDES OUTPUT 1—Contact closure

allows physical Output 1 to be a copy of Output 2. When

contact is released, Loop 1 output will switch back to

normal PID controller action starting with the last output

value. (NOTE 1)

TO RSP TO REMOTE SETPOINT—Contact closure selects the

Remote setpoint.

RST FB EXTERNAL RESET FEEDBACK—Contact closure allows

Input 2 to override the internal reset value.

ToPURG TO PURGE—Contact closure forces the loop to Manual

mode with the output set to the Output High Limit

configuration. MAN lights and the Output value is shown

on the lower display. Opening the switch has no effect.

(NOTE 1)

LoFIRE LOW FIRE—Contact closure forces the loop to Manual

mode with the output set to the Output Low Limit

configuration. MAN lights and the Output value is shown

on the lower display. Opening the switch has no effect.

(NOTE 1)

MAN LT MANUAL LATCHING—Contact closure transition forces

the loop to Manual mode. Opening the switch has no

effect. If the MANUAL/AUTO key is pressed while the

switch is closed, the loop will return to Automatic mode.

REStot RESET TOTALIZER—Contact closure transition resets

the accumulated totalizer value. Opening the switch has

no effect.

134 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

DIG IN 1

(continued) HealthWatch option prompts:

RESETT1

RESETT2

RESETT3

R ALL T

RESETC1

RESETC2

RESETC3

R ALL C

RALLTC

TIMER 1 will be reset when contact closes.

TIMER 2 will be reset when contact closes.

TIMER 3 will be reset when contact closes.

ALL TIMERS will be reset when contact closes.

COUNTER 1 will be reset when contact closes.

COUNTER 2 will be reset when contact closes.

COUNTER 3 will be reset when contact closes.

ALL COUNTERS will be reset when contact closes.

ALL TIMERS AND COUNTERS will be reset when

contact closes.

DIG 1 COM DIGITAL INPUT 1 COMBINATION SELECTIONS — All

selections are available in combination with Input 1.

DISABL DISABLE—Disables combination function.

+PID2 Any Digital Input Selection PLUS PID2—Contact

closure selects PID Set 2.

+ToDIR Any Digital Input Selection PLUS DIRECT ACTION—

Contact closure selects direct controller action.

+ToSP2 Any Digital Input Selection PLUS SETPOINT 2—

Contact closure puts the controller into setpoint 2.

+DISAT Any Digital Input Selection PLUS DISABLE ADAPTIVE

TUNE—Contact closure disables Accutune process on

Loop 1.

+ToSP1 Any Digital Input Selection PLUS SETPOINT 1—

Contact closure puts the controller into setpoint 1.

+RUN Any Digital Input Selection PLUS RUN SETPOINT

PROGRAM/RAMP—Contact closure starts SP

Program/Ramp if enabled.

DIG IN 2 Same selections as for

Digital Input 1 DIGITAL INPUT 2 SELECTIONS

DIG2 COM Same selections as Digital

Input 1 Combinations DIGITAL INPUT 2 COMBINATIONS

*For the Output Tracking selections, when the switch is open, the output is in accordance with its pre-defined

functionality. When the switch is closed, the output value (in percent) will track the Input 2 percent of range value.

When the switch is reopened, the output will start at this last output value and normal PID action will then take over

control. The transfer is bumpless.

NOTE 1: Does not apply to Three Position Step Control.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 135

4.14 Communications Set Up Group

Introduction This option allows the controller to be connected to a host computer via

RS-422/485 or Modbus protocol.

The controller looks for messages from the computer at regular intervals.

If these messages are not received within the configured shed time, the

controller will SHED from the communications link and return to stand-

alone operation. Depending on the protocol selected, the device address,

parity, and baud rate are configurable. You can also set the SHED output

mode and setpoint recall, and communication units.

Up to 99 addresses can be configured over this link. The number of units

that can be configured depends on the protocol chosen:

•RS-422/485—15 drops maximum

•Modbus—15 drops (or 31 for shorter link length) maximum

Communications

group prompts Table 4-13 lists all the function prompts in the Communications Set Up

group and their definitions.

Table 4-13 Communications Group Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

ComSTATE

DISABL

MOD3K

MODBUS

RS422

COMMUNICATIONS SELECTION

DISABLE—Disables the communications option.

MB3K—Allows the UDC3300 to emulate the UDC3000A

Modbus protocol.

MODBUS—Allows Modbus RTU communication prompts.

RS-422/485—Allows RS422/485 ASCII communication

prompts.

Com ADDR 1 to 99 COMMUNICATIONS STATION ADDRESS (LOOP 1)—

This is a number that is assigned to a controller that is to

be used with the communications option. This number will

be its address.

ComADDR2 1 to 99 COMMUNICATIONS STATION ADDRESS (LOOP 2)—

This is a number that is assigned to a controller that is to

be used with the communications option. This number will

be its address. When ComSTATE = MODBUS,

ComADDR2 = Com ADDR.

ATTENTION If RS-422/485 addresses on both loops are

the same, then only Loop 1 will respond.

SHED ENAB DISABL

ENABLE SHED ENABLE—Disables/enables shed functionaliy.

Applies to Modbus protocol only.

136 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

SHEDTIME 0 to 255 SHED TIME—The number that represents how many

sample periods there will be before the controller sheds

from communications. Each period equals 1/3 seconds; 0

equals No shed.

Note: If ComSTATE is set to MODBUS or MB3K and if

SHEDENAB is set to DISABL, Shed Time will not be

configurable.

PARITY

ODD

EVEN

PARITY pertains to the use of a self-checking code

employing binary digits in which the total number of ONE's

(or ZERO's) in each permissible code expression is either

ODD or EVEN.

Fixed at NONE when ComSTATE = MODBUS

ODD PARITY

EVEN PARITY

BAUD

2400

4800

9600

19200

BAUD RATE is the transmission speed in bits per second.

2400 BAUD

4800 BAUD

9600 BAUD

19200 BAUD

DUPLEX

(RS422/485 ASCII only) HALF

FULL

DUPLEX—Transmission Type

HALF DUPLEX—Two wires

FULL DUPLEX—Four wires

ATTENTION

•When the Auxiliary Output/RS422/485 Option board is

installed, this selection is fixed at HALF.

WS_FLOAT

FP_B

FP_BB

FP_L

FP_LB

Defines word/byte order of floating point data for

communications.

0 1 2 3

seeeeeee emmmmmmm mmmmmmmm mmmmmmmm

0 1 2 3

1 0 3 2

3 2 1 0

2 3 0 1

TX DELAY 1 to 500 milliseconds TX DELAY—Configurable response-delay timer allows

you to force the UDC to delay its response for a time

period of from 1 to 500 milliseconds compatible with the

host system hardware/software.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 137

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

SHEDMODE

LAST

TOAUTO

FSAFE

To MAN

SHED CONTROLLER MODE AND OUTPUT LEVEL—

Determines the mode of local control you want when the

controller is shed from the communications link.

Note: If COMSTATE = MODBUS or MB3K and if

SHEDENAB=DISABLE, this prompt will not be

configurable.

LAST—SAME MODE AND OUTPUT—The controller will

return to the same mode (manual or automatic) at the

same output level that it had before shed.

ToAUTO—AUTOMATIC MODE, LAST SP—The controller

will return to the automatic mode and the last setpoint

used before shed.

FSAFE—MANUAL MODE, FAILSAFE OUTPUT—The

controller will return to manual mode at the output value

selected at Control prompt FAILSAFE.

TO MAN—MANUAL MODE, SAME OUTPUT—The

controller will return to manual mode at the same output

level that it had before shed.

SHED SP

TO LSP

TO CSP

SHED SETPOINT RECALL

Note: If COMSTATE = MODBUS or MOD3K and if

SHEDENAB=DISABLE, this prompt will not be

configurable.

TO LSP—Controller will use last local or remote setpoint

used.

TO CSP—When in “slave” mode, the controller will store

the last host computer setpoint and use it at the Local

setpoint. When in “monitor” mode, the controller will shed

to the last UDC Local or Remote setpoint used, and the

LSP is unchanged.

UNITS

(RS422/485 ASCII only)

PERCNT

ENG

COMMUNICATION UNITS—This selection determines

how the controller values are expressed (on both loops)

during communications.

PERCENT OF SPAN

ENGINEERING UNITS

CSP RATO –20.0 to 20.0 LOOP 1 COMPUTER SETPOINT RATIO—Computer

setpoint ratio for Loop 1.

CSP BIAS –999. to 9999.

(engineering units) LOOP 1 COMPUTER SETPOINT BIAS—Computer

setpoint bias for Loop 1.

CSP2RATO –20.0 to 20.0 LOOP 2 COMPUTER SETPOINT RATIO—Computer

setpoint ratio for Loop 2.

CSP2BIAS –999. to 9999

(engineering units) LOOP 2 COMPUTER SETPOINT BIAS—Computer

setpoint bias for Loop 2.

138 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

LOOPBACK

DISABL

ENABLE

LOCAL LOOPBACK tests the communications hardware.

DISABLE—Disables the Loopback test.

ENABLE—Allows loopback test. The UDC goes into

Loopback mode in which it sends and receives its own

message. The UDC displays PASS or FAIL status in the

upper display and LOOPBACK in the lower display while

the test is running. The UDC will go into manual mode.

The test will run until the operator disables it here, or until

power is turned off and on.

ATTENTION The UDC does not have to be connected

to the RS-485 link to perform this test. If it is connected,

only one UDC 3300 should run the loopback test at a time.

The computer should not be transmitting on the link while

the loopback test is active.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 139

4.15 Alarms Set Up Group

Introduction An alarm is an indication that an event that you have configured (for

example—Process Variable) has exceeded one or more alarm limits. There

are two alarms available. Each alarm has two setpoints. You can configure

each of these two setpoints to alarm on various controller parameters.

There are two alarm output selections, High and Low. You can configure

each setpoint to alarm either High or Low. These are called single alarms.

You can also configure the two setpoints to alarm on the same event and

to alarm both high and low. A single adjustable Hysteresis of 0 % to 100

% is configurable for the alarm setpoint.

See Table 2-8 in the Installation section for Alarm relay contact

information.

The prompts for the Alarm Outputs appear whether or not the alarm relays

are physically present. This allows the Alarm status to be shown on the

display and/or sent via communications to a host computer.

Alarms group

prompts Table 4-14 lists all the function prompts in the Alarms Set Up group and

their definitions.

Table 4-14 Alarms Group Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

A1S1 VAL* Value in engineering units ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 VALUE—This is the value at

which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt

A1S1TYPE to actuate. The value depends on what the

setpoint has been configured to represent. NO setpoint is

required for Communications SHED. For SP Programming

the value is the segment number for which the event

applies.

For Maintenance Timers, the setpoint value is

HOURS.TENTHS OF HOURS. Example: setpoint value

4.2 means 4 hours 12 minutes. (Be aware that the value of

the Timer itself is displayed in HOURS.MINUTES.

Example: 4.2 means 4 hours 2 minutes.)

For Maintenance Counters for output relays 1 and 2, the

setpoint value is in thousands of counts (1 = 1000 counts).

This prompt does not appear for “Alarm on Manual” type

alarm. For example: A1S1TYPE = MANUAL.

A1S2 VAL* Value in engineering units ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 VALUE—This is the value at

which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt

A1S2TYPE to actuate.

The details are the same as A1S1 VAL.

A2S1 VAL* Value in engineering units ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 VALUE—This is the value at

which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt

A2S1TYPE to actuate.

The details are the same as A1S1 VAL.

140 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

A2S2 VAL* Value in engineering units ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 VALUE—This is the value at

which you want the alarm type chosen in prompt

A2S2TYPE to actuate.

The details are the same as A1S1 VAL.

*When the associated type is configured for Alarm on Totalizer Value, the Alarm SP value represents the four lowest digits for the

selected Totalizer Scale Factor. When the Totalizer value exceeds the Alarm SP, the alarm is activated. The range is 0 to 9999 x

Totalizer Scale Factor.

*When the associated type is configured for a HealthWatch Maintenance Timer, the Alarm SP represents number of hours.

A1S1TYPE

NONE

INP 1

INP 2

INP 3

DEV

OUTPUT

SHED

EV ON

EV OFF

MANUAL

REM SP

F SAFE

PVRATE

PV 2

DEV 2

OUT 2

MAN 2

RSP 2

F SAF2

PVRAT2

BREAK

BREAK2

TOTAL

TIMER1

TIMER2

TIMER3

COUNT1

COUNT2

COUNT3

ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 TYPE—Select what you want

Setpoint 1 of Alarm 1 to represent. It can represent the

Process Variable, Deviation, Input 1, Input 2, Output, and

if you have a model with communications, you can

configure the controller to alarm on SHED. If you have

setpoint programming, you can alarm when a segment

goes ON or OFF.

NO ALARM

INPUT 1

INPUT 2

INPUT 3

PROCESS VARIABLE (Loop 1)

DEVIATION (Loop 1)

OUTPUT (Loop 1) (NOTE 1)

SHED FROM COMMUNICATIONS (Both Loops)

EVENT ON (SP PROGRAMMING)

EVENT OFF (SP PROGRAMMING)

ALARM ON MANUAL MODE (Loop 1) (NOTE 2)

REMOTE SETPOINT

FAILSAFE

PV RATE OF CHANGE (Loop 1)

PROCESS VARIABLE (Loop 2)

DEVIATION (Loop 2)

OUTPUT (Loop 2) (NOTE 1)

ALARM ON MANUAL MODE (Loop 2) (NOTE 2)

REMOTE SETPOINT (Loop 2)

FAILSAFE (Loop 2)

PV RATE OF CHANGE (Loop 2)

LOOP BREAK (Loop 1) (NOTE 3)

LOOP BREAK (Loop 2) (NOTE 3)

ALARM ON TOTALIZER VALUE

HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE TIMER 1 VALUE

HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE TIMER 2 VALUE

HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE TIMER 3 VALUE

HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE COUNTER 1 VALUE

HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE COUNTER 2 VALUE

HEALTHWATCH MAINTENANCE COUNTER 3 VALUE

ATTENTION

NOTE 1. When the controller is configured for Three

Position Step Control, alarms set for Output will not

function.

NOTE 2. Not available if Timer is enabled because Alarm

1 is dedicated to Timer output.

NOTE 3. When enabled, the control output is checked for

minimum and maximum limits. When this occurs, a timer

begins and, if the output has not caused the PV to be

corrected by a pre-determined amount and time, the alarm

activates. For loop break alarms, the timer value may be

changed only for loops configured for On-Off control.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 141

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

A1S2TYPE Same as A1S1 TYPE ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 TYPE—Select what you want

Setpoint 2 of Alarm 1 to represent.

The selections are the same as A1S1TYPE.

A2S1TYPE Same as A1S1 TYPE ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 TYPE—Select what you want

Setpoint 1 of Alarm 2 to represent.

The selections are the same as A1S1TYPE.

ATTENTION Not applicable with Relay Duplex or

Position Proportional outputs.

A2S2TYPE Same as A1S1 TYPE ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 TYPE—Select what you want

Setpoint 2 of Alarm 2 to represent.

The selections are the same as A1S1TYPE.

ATTENTION Not applicable with Relay Duplex or Position

Proportional outputs.

A1S1 H L

A1S1 EV

HIGH

LOW

BEGIN

END

If Setpoint Programming is disabled or if the Alarm

Type is not configured for Event On/Off:

ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1 STATE—Select whether you want

the alarm type chosen in prompt A1S1TYPE to alarm High

or Low.

HIGH ALARM

LOW ALARM

If Setpoint Programming is enabled and if the Alarm

Type is configured for Event On/Off:

ALARM 1 SEGMENT EVENT 1—Select whether you want

the alarm type chosen in prompt A1S1TYPE to alarm the

beginning or end of a segment in setpoint Ramp/Soak

programming.

BEGINNING OF SEGMENT

END OF SEGMENT

ATTENTION Alarms configured for events will not

operate on Setpoint Program segments of zero length.

A1S2 H L

A1S2 EV

HIGH

LOW

BEGIN

END

ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2 STATE—Same as A1S1 H L.

ALARM 1 SEGMENT EVENT 2—Same as A1S1 EV.

A2S1 H L

A2S1 EV

HIGH

LOW

BEGIN

END

ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1 STATE—Same as A1S1 H L.

ALARM 2 SEGMENT EVENT 1—Same as A1S1 EV.

A2S2 H L

A2S2 EV

HIGH

LOW

BEGIN

END

ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2 STATE—Same as A1S1 H L.

ALARM 2 SEGMENT EVENT 2—Same as A1S1 EV.

142 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

AL HYST 0.0 to 100.0 % of span or full

output as appropriate ALARM HYSTERESIS—A single adjustable hysteresis is

provided on alarms such that when the alarm is OFF it

activates at exactly the alarm setpoint; when the alarm is

ON, it will not deactivate until the variable is 0.0 % to

100 % away from the alarm setpoint.

Configure the hysteresis of the alarms based on INPUT

signals as a % of input range span.

Configure the hysteresis of the alarm based on OUTPUT

signals as a % of the full scale output range.

ALM OUT1

NO LAT

LATCH

LATCHING ALARM FOR OUTPUT 1—Each alarm output

can be configured to be Latching or Non-latching.

NO LAT—Non-latching

LATCH—Latching

ATTENTION When configured for latching, the alarm will

stay on, after the alarm condition ends, until the

RUN/HOLD key is pressed.

BLOCK

DISABL

BLOCK1

BLOCK2

BLK 12

ALARM BLOCKING—Prevents nuisance alarms when the

controller is first powered up. The alarm is suppressed

until the parameter gets to the non-alarm limit or band.

Alarm blocking affects both alarm setpoints.

DISABL—Disables blocking

BLOCK1—Blocks alarm 1 only

BLOCK2—Blocks alarm 2 only

BLK 12—Blocks both alarms

ATTENTION When enabled on power up or initial

enabling via configuration, the alarm will not activate

unless it has not been in alarm for one cycle (167 ms).

How to configure alarm

to turn on and off with

HealthWatch

Configure Alarm n Setpoint 1 Value as the turn-on time or count, that is,

the alarm turns on when the timer or counter reaches this value.

Configure Alarm n Setpoint 2 Value as the turn-off time or count, that is,

the alarm turns off after being on for this much time or this many counts.

When the setpoint is reached it resets any HealthWatch timer or counter

associated with Alarm1 Setpoint1 or 2 and Alarm 2.

Example

To turn on Alarm 1 after 30 days for 2 minutes.

1. Under Alarms group, configure A1S1TYPE as TIMER1. Configure

A1S1 VAL as 720 hours (30 days x 24 hours). Configure A1S2 VAL

as 0.033 hours (2 minutes/60 minutes because setpoint units are in

hours).

2. Under Maintenance group, configure TIME1 as LAST R (time since

last reset). Configure TIME2 as AL1SP1.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 143

4.16 Display Parameters Set Up Group

Introduction This group includes selections for Decimal place, Units of temperature,

and Power frequency.

Display group

prompts Table 4-15 lists all the function prompts in the Display Set Up group and

their definitions.

Table 4-15 Display Group Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

DECIMAL

XXXX

XXX.X

XX.XX

X.XXX

DECIMAL POINT LOCATION FOR LOOP 1—This

selection determines where the decimal point appears in

the display.

XXXX—No Decimal Place—fixed, no auto-ranging

XXX.X—One Place

XX.XX—Two Places

X.XXX—Three Places

ATTENTION Auto-ranging will occur for selections of

one, two, or three places.

DECIMAL2

XXXX

XXX.X

XX.XX

X.XXX

DECIMAL POINT LOCATION FOR LOOP 2—This

selection determines where the decimal point appears in

the display for Loop 2.

XXXX—No Decimal Place—fixed, no auto-ranging

XXX.X—One Place

XX.XX—Two Places

X.XXX—Three Places

ATTENTION Auto-ranging will occur for selections of

one, two, or three places.

TEMP UNIT

DEG F

DEG C

NONE

TEMPERATURE UNITS FOR BOTH LOOPS—This

selection will affect the indication and operation.

DEG F—Degrees Fahrenheit

DEG C—Degrees Centigrade

NONE—No display of units

PWR FREQ 60 HZ

50 HZ POWER LINE FREQUENCY—Select whether your

controller is operating at 50 or 60 Hertz.

ATTENTION For controllers powered by +24 Vdc, this

configuration should be set to the AC line frequency used

to produce the +24 Vdc supply.

Incorrect setting of this parameter can cause normal mode

noise problems in the input readings.

RATIO 2

DISABL

ENABLE

INPUT 2 RATIO—This enables the Ratio for Input 2 to be

set from the front panel. Input 2 must be installed and

enabled for this configuration to operate.

DISABLE—Disables setting Ratio 2 from front panel.

ENABLE—Allows the Ratio for Input 2 to be set through

the keyboard.

144 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

LANGUAGE

ENGLIS

FRENCH

GERMAN

SPANIS

ITALAN

LANGUAGE—This selection designates the prompt

language.

ENGLISH

FRENCH

GERMAN

SPANISH

ITALIAN

4.17 Calibration Data

Introduction The prompts used here are for field calibration purposes. Refer to Section

6 – Input Calibration in this manual for complete information.

4.18 Maintenance Group

Introduction The Maintenance group prompts are part of the HealthWatch feature.

These prompts let you count and time the activity of discrete events such

as relays, alarms, control modes and others, to keep track of maintenance

needs.

Maintenace group

prompts Table 4-16 lists all the function prompts in the Maintenance Set Up group.

Table 4-16 Maintenance Group Definitions

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

TIME1

DISABL

LASTR

AL1SP1

AL1SP2

AL2SP1

AL2SP2

MANUAL

TIMER 1—The timer tracks the elapsed time of the

selected event.

DISABL—Disables the timer.

LAST RESET—Time elapsed since the last reset.

ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1—Cumulative time Alarm 1

Setpoint 1 was activated.

ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2— Cumulative time Alarm 1

Setpoint 2 was activated.

ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1— Cumulative time Alarm 2

Setpoint 1 was activated.

ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2— Cumulative time Alarm 2

Setpoint 2 was activated.

LOOP 1 MANUAL—Cumulative time Loop 1 was in

Manual.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 145

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

TIME1 (continued) GSOAK

SOOTNG

DIGIN1

DIGIN2

MAN2

GUARANTEED SOAK— Cumulative time the process

was outside the guaranteed soak band.

SOOTING— Cumulative time process was in sooting state

DIGITAL INPUT1— Cumulative time Digital Input 1 was

closed

DIGITAL INPUT 2— Cumulative time Digital Input 2 was

closed

LOOP 2 MANUAL— Cumulative time Loop 2 was in

Manual.

HRS.MIN1

DAYS.HRS1

00.00 to 23.59

1.00 to 416.15

Shows elapsed time of Timer 1 in Hours and Minutes. At

24.00, units change automatically to Days and Hours.

TIME 2 Same as TIME 1 The timer tracks the elapsed time of the selected event.

HRS.MIN2

DAYS.HRS2

00.00 to 23.59

1.00 to 416.15

Shows elapsed time of Timer 2 in Hours and Minutes. At

24.00, units change automatically to Days and Hours.

TIME 3 Same as TIME 1 The timer tracks the elapsed time of the selected event.

HRS.MIN3

DAYS.HRS3

00.00 to 23.59

1.00 to 416.15

Shows elapsed time of Timer 3 in Hours and Minutes. At

24.00, units change automatically to Days and Hours.

COUNTER1

COUNTER 1

DISABL

MANUAL

AL1SP1

AL1SP2

AL2SP1

AL2SP2

DIGIN1

DIGIN2

OUT1*1K

OUT2*1K

GSOAK

PWRCYC

PV_RNG

FAILSF

TUNE

MAN2

PVRNG2

FSF2

COUNTER 1—The counter counts the number of times

the selected event has occurred.

DISABLE—Counter is not in use.

LOOP 1 MANUAL—Number of times Loop 1 has been in

Manual mode.

ALARM 1 SETPOINT 1—Number of times Alarm 1

Setpoint 1 has been activated.

ALARM 1 SETPOINT 2—Number of times Alarm 1

Setpoint 2 has been activated.

ALARM 2 SETPOINT 1—Number of times Alarm 2

Setpoint 1 has been activated.

ALARM 2 SETPOINT 2—Number of times Alarm 2

Setpoint 2 has been activated.

DIGITAL INPUT 1—Number of times Digital Input 1 has

closed.

DIGITAL INPUT 2—Number of times Digital Input 2 has

closed.

OUTPUT 1 RELAY x 1000—Thousands of times Output 1

relay has been activated.

OUTPUT 2 RELAY x 1000—Thousands of times Output 2

relay has been activated.

GUARANTEED SOAK—Number of times unit has been in

guaranteed soak.

POWER CYCLE—Number of times unit’s power has

cycled off and on.

LOOP 1 PV RANGE—Number of times Loop 1’s PV has

been out of range.

LOOP 1 FAILSAFE—Number of times Loop 1 has been in

Failsafe mode.

LOOP 1 TUNE—Number of times Loop 1 has been tuned

(manually and automatically)

LOOP 2 MANUAL—Number of times Loop 2 has been in

Manual mode.

LOOP 2 PV RANGE—Number of times Loop 2’s PV has

been out of range.

LOOP 2 FAILSAFE—Number of times Loop 2 has been in

146 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Lower Display

Prompt Upper Display

Range of Setting

or Selection

Parameter

Definition

(continued) TUNE2 Failsafe mode.

LOOP 2 TUNE—Number of times Loop 2 has been tuned

(manually and automatically).

COUNTS1 0-9999 (1 = 1000 counts for

output relays 1 and 2) Shows the value of Counter 1. Read only.

COUNTER2 Same as COUNTER1 Counter 2 counts the number of times the selected event

has occurred.

COUNTS2 Same as COUNTS1 Shows the value of Counter 2. Read only.

COUNTER3 Same as COUNTER1 Counter 3 counts the number of times the selected event

has occurred.

COUNTS3 Same as COUNTS1 Shows the value of Counter 3. Read only.

PASSWORD 0-9999 PASSWORD—Entering the designated number resets to

zero the timer or counter specified by Reset Type.

To designate a number as the password:

1. Set all timers and counters to DISABL.

2. Enter the desired PASSWORD (0-9999).

3. Select a Reset Type (next prompt). The PASSWORD

goes into effect when you press FUNC , that is, you can

use it to reset the counters and timers.

RES TYPE

NONE

TIMER1

TIMER2

TIMER3

ALL TM

COUNT1

COUNT2

COUNT3

ALL CO

ALL TC

RESET TYPE—Select which timers and/or counters will

be reset to zero when the PASSWORD is entered.

NONE—No values will be reset

TIMER 1 will be reset

TIMER 2 will be reset

TIMER 3 will be reset

ALL TIMERS will be reset

COUNTER 1 will be reset

COUNTER 2 will be reset

COUNTER 3 will be reset

ALL COUNTERS will be reset

ALL TIMERS AND COUNTERS will be reset

4.19 Status Test Data

Introduction The prompts used here are for determining the reason for a controller

failure. Refer to the Section 8 – Troubleshooting in this manual for

complete information.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 147

Section 5 – Operation

5.1 Overview

Introduction This section gives you all the information necessary to monitor and

operate your controller. Review the Operator Interface shown in

“Monitoring” to make sure you are familiar with the indicator definitions.

The key functions are listed in Section 1 – Overview.

What’s in this section? This section contains the following topics:

Topic See Page

5.1 Overview 147

5.2 How to Power Up the Controller 148

5.3 Entering a Security Code 150

5.4 Monitoring Your Controller 151

5.5 Start-up Procedure 155

5.6 Operating Modes 156

5.7 Setpoints 160

5.8 Setpoint Ramp Rate 163

5.9 Single Setpoint Ramp 164

5.10 Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants 168

5.11 Alarm Setpoints 171

5.12 Two Loops of Control Overview 172

5.13 Configuring Two Loops of Control 177

5.14 Monitoring Two Loops of Control 180

5.15 Operating Two Loops of Control 181

5.16 Three Position Step Control Algorithm 182

5.17 Input Math Algorithms 183

5.18 Digital Input Option (Remote Switching) 186

5.19 Auto/Manual Station 190

5.20 Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression 193

5.21 Accutune 194

5.22 Carbon Potential 202

5.23 HealthWatch 204

148 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

5.2 How to Power Up the Controller

Apply power When power is applied, the controller will run three diagnostic tests. All

the displays will light and then the controller will go into automatic mode.

Diagnostic tests Table 5-1 lists the three diagnostic tests.

Table 5-1 Power Up Diagnostic Tests

Prompt on Lower Display Condition

RAM TEST Check RAM

CONFTEST Check Non-volatile Memory

CAL TEST Check Calibration

Test failures If one or more of these tests fail, the controller will go to the Fail-safe

Manual Mode, and “FAILSAFE” will flash in the lower display.

If the output type is Position Proportional, and AUTO-CAL has never

been done, a prompt “CAL MTR” will appear suggesting that the

controller be calibrated.

Troubleshooting Refer to “STATUS TESTS” in Section 9 - Troubleshooting to identify and

correct the problem.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 149

Check the displays and

keys Use the procedure in Table 5-2 to run the display and key test.

Table 5-2 Procedure for Testing the Displays and Keys

Press Result

SET UP

and hold in,

then

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

at the same time

The controller will run a display test. All the displays will

light for 8 seconds, then the displays will look like this:

try all

Lower Display

keys

Upper Display

Press each key to see if it

works When the key is pressed, the lower display will indicate the

name of the key pressed.

Key Pressed Lower Display

FUNCTION LOOP 1/2 FUNCTION

LOWER DISPLAY LWR DISP

MANUAL/AUTO AUTO MAN

SETPOINT/SELECT SP SEL

INCRMENT

DECRMENT

RUN/HOLD RUN HOLD

+ INCRDECR

FUNCTION+SETUP FUNC SU

If no key is pressed for 20 seconds, the test will time out and the controller

will go into control mode.

If any test fails, go to “Controller Failure Symptoms” in Section 9 -

Troubleshooting.

Key error When a key is pressed and the prompt “KEY ERROR” appears in the

lower display, it will be for one of the following reasons:

•parameter is not available,

•not in Set Up mode, press SET UP key first,

•key malfunction, do keyboard test.

150 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

5.3 Entering a Security Code

Introduction The LOCKOUT feature in the UDC 3300 is used to inhibit changes (via

keyboard) of certain functions or parameters by unauthorized personnel.

There are different levels of LOCKOUT depending on the level of

security required. These levels are:

NONE

CALIB

+CONF

+VIEW

MAX

See Section 4 - Configuration Definitions for details.

Security code numbers The level of keyboard lockout may be changed in the Set Up mode.

However, knowledge of a security code number (1 to 4095) may be

required to change from one level of lockout to another. When a controller

leaves the factory, it has a security code of 0 which permits changing from

one lockout level to another without entering any other code number.

Procedure If you require the use of a security code, select a number from 0001 to

4095 and enter it when the lockout level is configured as NONE.

Thereafter, that selected number must be used to change the lockout level

from something other than NONE.

CAUTION Write the number on the Configuration Record Sheet in the

configuration section so you will have a permanent record.

Use the procedure in Table 5-3 to enter a security code.

Table 5-3 Procedure for Entering a Security Code

Step Press Action

SET UP

until you see

TUNING

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

2FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

until you see

SECURITY

Lower Display

Upper Display

3or to enter a four digit number in the upper display

(1 to 4095)

This will be your security code.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 151

5.4 Monitoring Your Controller

Operator interface The indicators and displays on the operator interface let you see what is

happening to your process and how the controller is responding.

Figure 5-1 is a view of the operator interface. A description of the displays

and indicators is included.

Figure 5-1 Operator Interface

ALM

RSP

OUT

1 2 3

1 2

1 2 F C MAN

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

SET UP

LOWER

DISPLAY MANUAL

AUTO

SETPOINT

SELECT

RUN

HOLD

DI 3300

SP 3300

Indicator definition when lit

ALM - Alarm conditions exist

DI - Digital input active

OUT - Control relay 1 or 2 on

Upper Display - six characters

• Normal Operation - four digits dedicated to display the process variable

• Configuration Mode - displays parameter value or selection

Lower Display - eight characters

• Normal Operation - displays operating parameters and values

• Configuration Mode - displays function groups and parameters

MAN - controller in manual mode

A - controller in automatic mode

F - °Fahrenheit being used

C - °Centigrade being used

Indicator definition when lit

Deviation Bargraph

• Center bar indicates PV is

within ±1% of setpoint.

• Next bar will light if PV is

between ±1% but less than

±2% in deviation.

• If PV is equal to or greater than

±10% deviation, the center bar

plus all ten deviation bars will

light.

MAN and A off —

communications

option active

Keys - See Table 1-1

T - Accutune in progress

t - PV tune in progress

L" - Loop 2 display

I - Cascade control

C - Computer setpoint active

O - Output override active

R - Run SP ramp/program

H - Hold SP ramp/program

RSP - Remote SP or SP2 active

24157

3 - LSP 3 active

Decimal point position In each display, when no decimal place is configured, the right-most

character is blank.

When a single decimal position has been configured and values greater

than 1000 are displayed, the right-most character is blank but the decimal

point will be lit.

152 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Annunciators The following annunciator functions have been provided:

A visual indication of each alarm

ALM 1 2

Blinking 1 indicates alarm latched and needs to be

acknowledged before extinguishing when the alarm

condition ends.

A visual indication of the control relays

OUT 1 2

A visual indication of the mode of the controller

A—Automatic Mode

MAN—Manual Mode

A visual indication of the temperature units

F—Degrees Fahrenheit

C—Degrees Celsius

A visual indication of the digital inputs

1 2

A visual lamp when the RSP or LSP 2 is active

■

A visual indication when LSP 3 is active

The upper left digit of the display is used to show other annunciator

functions

T—Accutuning in process

t—PV tune in process

L″—Loop 2 display

I—Cascade control (when Loop 1 is displayed)

C—Computer setpoint active

O—Output override active

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 153

Viewing the operating

parameters Press the LOWER DISPLAY key to scroll through the operating

parameters listed in Table 5-4. The lower display will show only those

parameters and their values that apply to your specific model and the way

in which it was configured.

Table 5-4 Lower Display Key Parameter

Lower Display

Indication Description

OUT OUTPUT #1—Output value is percent; for Three Position Step control, this is an estimated motor

position when no slidewire exists.

OT2 OUTPUT #2—Appears only if 2-loop or Cascade control is configured.

SP LOCAL SETPOINT #1—Also current setpoint when using SP Ramp.

2SP LOCAL SETPOINT #2

3SP LOCAL SETPOINT #3

RSP REMOTE SETPOINT

1IN INPUT 1—Used only with combinational input algorithms.

2IN INPUT 2

3IN INPUT 3

POS SLIDEWIRE POSITION—Used only with TPSC.

CSP COMPUTER SETPOINT—When SP is in override.

DEV DEVIATION—Maximum negative display is –999.9.

PIDSETX TUNING PARAMETER SET 1—Selected set for single loop or primary loop configuration where

X is either 1 or 2.

2PIDSETX TUNING PARAMETER SET 2—Selected set for secondary loop configuration where X is either

1 or 2.

ET XX.XX ELAPSED TIME—Time that has elapsed on timer in Hours.Minutes.

TR XX.XX TIME REMAINING—Time that remains on timer in Hours.Minutes

RAMPXXXM SETPOINT RAMP TIME—Time remaining in the setpoint ramp in minutes.

O SK XXXX TIME REMAINING IN SOAK

1PV PROCESS VARIABLE 1—For Cascade or 2-loop applications.

2PV PROCESS VARIABLE 2—For cascade or 2-loop applications.

AUX AUXILIARY OUTPUT—Displayed only when Loop 2 is not used, or when Loop 2 is Time

Simplex and Loop 1 is not Current Duplex.

OC1 CHARACTERIZED OUTPUT 1—Displayed if Loop 1 output is characterized.

OC2 CHARACTERIZED OUTPUT 2—Displayed if Loop 2 output is characterized.

SPn SP RATE SETPOINT—Current setpoint for setpoint rate applications

Σ (Sigma) CURRENT TOTALIZER VALUE—Displays the total flow volume being measured.

BIA BIAS—Displays the manual reset value for algorithm PD+MR.

TUNE OFF LIMIT CYCLE TUNING NOT RUNNING—Appears when Accutune is disabled.

TUNE RUN LIMIT CYCLE TUNING RUNNING—Appears when Accutune is enabled.

ToBEGIN RESET SP PROGRAM TO START OF FIRST SEGMENT

OTI OUTPUT OVERRIDE (2 PID LOOPS ONLY)—Appears when Internal Loop 1 Output value is

displayed. This represents the internal output 1 value before override.

154 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Diagnostic error

messages The UDC 3300 performs background tests to verify data and memory

integrity. If there is a malfunction, an error message will be displayed. In

the case of more than one simultaneous malfunction, only the one with the

highest priority will appear on the lower display.

A list of error messages is contained in Table 5-5. If any of these error

messages occur, refer to Section 9 - Troubleshooting for information to

correct the failure.

Table 5-5 Error Messages

Prompt Description

EE FAIL Unable to write to nonvolatile memory.

INP1FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 1 integration.

INP2FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 2 integration.

INP3FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 3 integration.

SW FAIL Slidewire input failure. Position Proportional Control

automatically switched to Three Position Step Control.

CONF ERR Configuration Errors for Loop 1—Low limit greater than high

limit for PV, SP, Reset, or Output.

CONF ER2 Configuration Errors for Loop 2—Low limit greater than high

limit for PV, SP, Reset, or Output, or Loop 2 output has not

been selected.

SOOTING Input Combination Errors—Percent Carbon falls outside of

“sooting boundary.”

IN1 RNG Input 1 Out-of-Range

Out-of-range criteria:

Linear range: ± 10 % out-of-range

Characterized range: ± 1 % out-of-range

IN2 RNG Input 2 Out-of-Range—Same as Input 1.

IN3 RNG Input 3 Out-of-Range—Same as Input 1.

PV RNG PV Out-of-Range

PV = (PV source x PV source ratio) + PV source bias

FAILSAFE Failsafe Loop 1—Check inputs or configuration.

FAILSF2 Failsafe Loop 2—Check inputs or configuration.

RV LIMIT Remote Variable Out-of-Range

RV = (RV source x RV source ratio) + RV source bias

RH LO RH Excessive Temperature Depression—Calculated % RH is

less than 0 %.

SEG ERR Segment Error—SP Program starting segment number is less

than ending segment number.

CAL MTR Not calibrated. Perform Position Proportional calibration.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 155

5.5 Start-up Procedure

Procedure The Start-up procedure is given in Table 5-6.

Table 5-6 Procedure for Starting Up the Controller

Step Operation Press Action

1Select the loop FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

to toggle between Loop 1 and Loop 2, if configured.

2Select manual

mode MANUAL

AUTO

until “MAN” indicator is ON.

The controller is in manual mode.

3Adjust the

output or

to adjust the output value and ensure that the final control element is

functioning correctly.

Upper Display

shows the PV value

Lower Display

shows OUT and the output value in %.

4Enter the local

setpoint LOWER

DISPLAY

Upper Display

shows the PV Value

Lower Display

SP and the local setpoint value

to adjust the local setpoint to the value at which you want the process

variable maintained.

The local setpoint cannot be changed if the Setpoint Ramp function is

running. “R” appears in the upper display.

5Select

Automatic

Mode

MANUAL

AUTO

until “A” indicator is ON.

The controller is in Automatic mode.

The controller will automatically adjust the output to maintain the process

variable at setpoint, if the controller is properly tuned.

6Tune the

controller SET UP Tuning is required on the first startup. First enable "TUNE" selection in the

Accutune Group.

Refer to Tuning Set Up group to ensure that the proper selections for

PROP BD or GAIN, RATE MIN, and RSET MIN, or RSET RPM, have

been entered.

Use Accutune to tune the controller; see the procedure in this section.

For 2-loop or Cascade control, refer to the Loop 2 Tuning Set Up group

parameters.

To tune your controller manually, see Appendix A.

156 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

5.6 Operating Modes

Available modes The controller can operate in any of three basic modes:

•Manual—One or Two Loops

•Automatic with Local Setpoint—One or Two Loops

•Automatic with Remote Setpoint—One or Two Loops

•Manual Cascade

•Automatic Cascade

The manual and automatic control modes with Local and Remote setpoint

are standard with the instrument; cascade control is optional.

Mode definitions Table 5-7 lists the available modes and their definitions.

Table 5-7 Operating Mode Definitions

Operating Mode Definition

MANUAL In the manual mode, the operator directly controls the

controller output level. The process variable and the

percent output are displayed. The configured High and Low

Output Limits are disregarded and the operator can change

the output value using the increment and decrement keys to

the limits allowed by the output type (0 % to 100 % for a

time proportioning output or –5 % to 105 % for a current

output).

AUTOMATIC with LOCAL

SETPOINT In automatic local mode, the controller operates from the

local setpoints and automatically adjusts the output to

maintain the setpoint at the desired value.

In this mode you can adjust the setpoint.

See Section 5.7 - Setpoints.

AUTOMATIC with

REMOTE SETPOINT In automatic remote mode, the controller operates from the

setpoint measured at the Remote setpoint input.

Adjustments are available to ratio this input and add a

constant bias before it is applied to the control equation.

See Section 3 - Configuration, Control Set up group.

MANUAL CASCADE In the manual cascade mode, both control loops are in

manual although there is still only one output active. This

mode is used to bring both loops into a reasonable

operation area, at which point the unit is placed into the

automatic cascade mode.

If Loop 1 is placed in Manual control mode, then Loop 2, if

in auto, is then placed in a pseudo-manual mode thereby

eliminating output bumps when Loop 1 is returned to

Automatic control mode.

AUTOMATIC CASCADE In Automatic cascade mode, there are two control loops,

with one loop’s output acting as the setpoint for the second

control loop. There is only one physical output in this mode.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 157

What happens when

you change modes Table 5-8 explains what happens to the controller when you switch from

one mode to another.

Table 5-8 Changing Operating Modes

Mode Change Description

Manual to Automatic

Local Setpoint The Local Setpoint is usually the value previously stored as

the Local Setpoint.

PV tracking is a configurable feature which modifies this.

For this configuration, when a loop is in manual mode, the

local setpoint value tracks the process variable value

continuously.

Manual or Auto Local to

Automatic Remote SP The Remote Setpoint uses the stored ratio and bias to

calculate the control setpoint.

Auto bias is a configurable feature which modifies this.

When it is selected the transfer from automatic local to

automatic remote or from manual remote to automatic

remote adjusts the bias based on the local setpoint such

that Bias = LSP – (RSP Input x R).

Automatic Remote

Setpoint to Manual or

Auto Local Setpoint

If configured for Local Setpoint Tracking, when the

controller transfers out of remote setpoint the last value of

the control setpoint is inserted into the local setpoint.

If LSP tracking is not configured, the local setpoint will not

be altered when the transfer is made.

158 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Selecting manual or

automatic mode An alternate action switch places the controller in the Automatic or

Manual mode of operation. Switching between manual and automatic will

be bumpless, except when PD+MR algorithm is selected.

Table 5-9 includes procedures for selecting automatic or manual mode

and changing the output while in manual.

Table 5-9 Procedure for Selecting Automatic or Manual Mode

Step Operation Press Action

1Selecting

Automatic

Mode

MANUAL

AUTO

until “A” indicator is ON.

The controller regulates its output to

maintain the PV at the desired setpoint.

Upper Display

shows the PV value

Lower Display

shows SP and the

setpoint value

The deviation bargraph indicates the PV

deviation from the setpoint.

The annunciators indicate whichever setpoint

is in use:

SP Local Setpoint

2SP Second Local Setpoint

3SP Third Local Setpoint

RSP Remote Setpoint

CSP Computer Setpoint

2Selecting

Manual Mode MANUAL

AUTO

until “MAN” indicator is ON.

The controller holds its output at the last

value used during automatic operation and

stops adjusting the output for changes in

setpoint or process variable.

Upper Display

shows the PV value

Lower Display

shows OUT and the

output value in (%).

The deviation bargraph indicates the PV

deviation from the setpoint.

3Adjust the

Output in

Manual Mode or

to adjust the output value while in manual

mode.

Upper Display

shows the PV value

Lower Display

shows OUT and the

output value in %.

4Return to

Automatic

Mode

MANUAL

AUTO

The “A” indicator will appear indicating

Automatic mode.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 159

Position proportional

backup mode This feature provides for Position Proportional models to automatically

change to a Three Position Step algorithm if the slidewire input signal

fails. This will maintain control of your process.

“IN2 RNG” or “SW FAIL” will flash in the lower display and the “OUT”

display will show an estimated motor position WITHOUT a decimal

point.

160 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

5.7 Setpoints

Introduction You can configure the following setpoints for the UDC 3300 controller.

•A single local setpoint,

•Two local setpoints,

•One local setpoint and one remote setpoint,

•Three local setpoints,

•Two local setpoints and one remote setpoint.

To scroll through the setpoint type menu, press and hold in the

SETPOINT SELECT key. Release when the desired setpoint selection

is displayed.

ATTENTION “KEY ERROR” will appear in the lower display if:

•You choose either local setpoint 2 or 3 or remote setpoint and your

choice has not been configured as the setpoint source.

•You attempt to change the setpoint while a setpoint ramp is enabled.

Setpoint ramp rate will apply, if enabled.

Selecting the local

setpoint source Use the procedure in Table 5-10 to select a local setpoint source.

Table 5-10 Procedure for Selecting the Local Setpoint Source

Step Operation Press Action

1Enter Set Up

mode LOWER

DISPLAY

until the displays read:

CONTROL

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

CONTROL2

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

for Loop 1 for Loop 2or

2Display Local

Setpoint Source

selections

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

until the displays read:

Lower Display

Upper Display

LSP’S

Setpoint source selections

1 ONLY

TWO

THREE

3Select the

desired source or to select the desired setpoint source in the

upper display.

4Return to control LOWER

DISPLAY

The controller will assume normal control.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 161

Changing local setpoint

1, 2, or 3 Use the procedure in Table 5-11 to change any of the local setpoint

values.

After changing a local setpoint value, if no other key is pressed, a

minimum of 30 seconds time will elapse before the new value is stored in

nonvolatile memory. If power is removed before this time, the new

setpoint value is lost and the previous setpoint value is used at power up.

If after changing the LSP value another key is pressed, then the value is

stored immediately.

Table 5-11 Procedure for Changing the Local Setpoints

Step Operation Press Action

1Select the

setpoint SETPOINT

SELECT

until you see

Lower Display

Upper Display

The PV value

SP, 2SP, or 3SP and

the local setpoint value

or RSP and the remote

setpoint value

2Select a different

setpoint or the

remote setpoint

SETPOINT

SELECT

and hold

to cycle through the setpoint type menu as

long as the key is pressed. When the key is

released, the setpoint selection currently

displayed will be the new setpoint selection.

3Change the

value or to change the local setpoint to the value at

which you want the process maintained.

SP, 2SP, or 3SP indicator will light to match

the lower display.

ATTENTION The remote setpoint

cannot be changed at the keyboard.

162 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Enabling (or disabling)

the remote setpoint Use the procedure in Table 5-12 to enable the remote setpoint source.

Table 5-12 Procedure for Enabling (or Disabling) the Remote Setpoint

Step Operation Press Action

1Select Set Up

Group SET UP until you see:

CONTROL

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

CONTROL2

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

for Loop 1 for Loop 2or

2Select the

Remote Setpoint

Source prompt

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

Until you see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

RSP SRC

The Remote Setpoint

source selection

NONE—not used

INP 2—Input 2 as RSP

IN AL1—Input algorithm 1

IN AL2—Input algorithm 2

INP 3—Input 3 as RSP

3Change

selection or to enable or disable the remote setpoint.

ATTENTION You cannot change the

remote setpoint value using these keys.

4Return to normal

operation LOWER

DISPLAY

This will return the controller to normal

operation.

Setpoint selection

indication Table 5-13 shows how the indicators react and what the displays show for

each type of setpoint.

Table 5-13 Setpoint Selection Indication

Using Local

Setpoint Using Remote

Setpoint Using 2nd

Local

Setpoint

Using 3rd

Local

Setpoint

SP RSP 2SP 3SP

Upper

Display PV and the PV

value PV and the PV

value

Lower

Display SP and the

Local Setpoint

Source

RSP and

Remote Setpoint

Value

2SP and the

2nd Local

Setpoint Value

3SP and the

3rd Local

Setpoint Value

Annunciator None "■" lights "■" lights "3" lights

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 163

5.8 Setpoint Ramp Rate

Configuration You can configure a Setpoint Ramp Rate that will apply to any Local

setpoint change immediately.

Refer to the Configuration Section to enable the ramp for either loop and

set an upscale or downscale rate value.

Make sure SP RAMP and SP PROG are disabled.

Operation When a local setpoint change is made, the controller will ramp from the

original setpoint to the new one at the rate specified. This changing

(current) setpoint can be viewed as SPn on the lower display.

Press the LOWER DISPLAY key until you see SPn and the setpoint

value in the lower display.

164 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

5.9 Single Setpoint Ramp

Configuring the

setpoint ramp You can configure a single setpoint ramp to occur between the current

local setpoint and a final local setpoint over a time interval of from 1 to

255 minutes. You can RUN or HOLD the ramp at any time.

ATTENTION The UDC 3300 has PV Hot Start functionality as standard

feature. This means that at power-up Local Setpoint #1 is set to the current

PV value and the Ramp, Rate, or Program then starts from this value.

Procedure Table 5-14 lists the procedure for configuring the Setpoint Ramp

parameters. The procedure for SP Program is in Section 6 – Setpoint

Programming Option.

Table 5-14 Procedure for Configuring a Setpoint Ramp

Step Operation Press Action

1Select

SP RAMP

Set Up Group

SET UP until you see:

SP RAMP

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

2Select the

Setpoint Ramp

function

FUNCTION

L1/L2

until you see:

SP RAMP

Lower Display

Upper Display

DISABL—Disables SP Ramp

ENABLE—Enables SP Ramp for Loop 1

ENABL2—Enables SP Ramp for Loop 2

ENAB12—Enables Sp Ramp for

Loops 1 and 2

3Enable Setpoint

Ramp to enable the setpoint ramp function. Choose

the loop(s) on which you want the ramp to

operate.

ATTENTION You cannot change the

current local setpoint if the setpoint ramp

function is enabled. Make sure SP RATE is

disabled.

4Set the Ramp

Time FUNCTION

L1/L2

until you see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

TIME MIN

The ramp time

in minutes

or to change the upper display value to the

number of minutes in which you want the

final setpoint to be reached.

Setting Range = 1 to 255 minutes

ATTENTION Entering “0” will imply an

immediate step change to the final SP.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 165

Step Operation Press Action

5Set the Final

Setpoint value FUNCTION

L1/L2

Lower Display

Upper Display

FINAL SP

The final

Setpoint value

or to change the upper display value to the

desired final setpoint value.

Setting Range = within the setpoint limits

6Exit

Configuration LOWER

DISPLAY

To exit configuration.

166 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Running the setpoint

ramp Running a Setpoint Ramp includes starting, holding, viewing the ramp

time, ending the ramp, and disabling it.

Procedure Table 5-15 lists the procedure for running the Setpoint Ramp.

Table 5-15 Procedure for Running a Setpoint Ramp

Step Operation Press Action

1Put the controller

into Automatic

mode

MANUAL

AUTO

until “A” indicator is ON and you will see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

H and the PV value

SP and the present

setpoint value

2Set Start

Setpoint or until the start setpoint value you desire is

indicated in the lower display:

Lower Display

Upper Display

H and the PV value

SP and the start

setpoint value

3Start the Ramp RUN

HOLD

You will see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

R and the PV value

SP and a changing

setpoint value

ATTENTION The value in the lower

display will be increasing or decreasing

toward the final setpoint value. The PV value

in the upper display will also change.

4Hold/Run the

Ramp RUN

HOLD

This holds the ramp at the current setpoint

value.

Press again to continue run.

5View the

remaining ramp

time

LOWER

DISPLAY

until you see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

R or H and

the PV value

RAMP XXXM

(Time remaining)

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 167

Step Operation Press Action

6Change setpoint

during Hold

mode

or to change the “HELD” setpoint if the ramp is

on “HOLD.”

However, the ramp time remaining is not

changed. Therefore, when returning to RUN

mode, the setpoint will ramp at the same rate

as prior to local setpoint changes and will

stop if the final setpoint is reached before

time expires.

If the time expires before the final setpoint is

reached, it will jump to the final setpoint.

7End the Ramp When the final setpoint is reached, the

“R” changes to “H” in the upper display and

the controller operates at the new setpoint.

ATTENTION Any time the local setpoint

is different from the final setpoint value and

the RUN/HOLD key is pressed, the ramp

will start again.

8Disable the

setpoint ramp

function

SET UP until you see:

SP RAMP

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

You will see:

SP RAMP

Lower Display

Upper Display

DISABL—Disables SP Ramp

ENABLE—Enables SP Ramp for Loop 1

ENABL2—Enables SP Ramp for Loop 2

ENAB12—Enables Sp Ramp for

Loops 1 and 2

until you see:

SP RAMP

Lower Display

DISABL

Upper Display

9Return to normal

operating mode LOWER

DISPLAY

168 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

5.10 Using Two Sets of Tuning Constants

Introduction You can use two sets of tuning constants for single output types and

2-loop or cascade control, and choose the way they are to be switched.

(Does not apply for Duplex control.)

The sets can be:

•keyboard selected,

•automatically switched when a predetermined process variable value

is reached,

•automatically switched when a predetermined setpoint value is

reached.

The following procedures show you how to:

•select two sets or gain scheduling,

•set the switch-over value,

•set tuning constant value for each set, and

•switch between two sets via the keyboard (without automatic

switchover)

Select two sets or gain

scheduling The procedure in Table 5-16 tells you how to select two sets or gain

scheduling.

Table 5-16 Procedure for Selecting Two Sets of Tuning Constants

Step Operation Press Action

1Select Control

Set Up group SET UP until you see:

CONTROL

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

CONTROL2

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

for Loop 1 for Loop 2or

2Select

PID SETS

function

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

until you see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

PID SETS

Available selections

are listed below

1 ONLY—1 set of constants

2KEYBD—2 sets, keyboard selectable

2 PVSW—2 sets, auto switch at PV value

2 SPSW—2 sets, auto switch at SP value

GAIN S—Gain used in control algorithm

calculations can be pre-entered into eight

user-defined segments, with each segment

applied over a user-defined PV range. Refer

to Section 3 – Configuration under Tuning

Set Up group to set Gain segment values

and PV range values.

or to select the type of PID SET.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 169

Set switchover value If you select 2 PVSW or 2 SPSW, you must set a value at which the sets

will switch over. The procedure in Table 5-17 shows you how to set this

value. This procedure assumes that you are still in the Control Set Up

group from Table 5-16.

Table 5-17 Procedure for Setting Switchover Values

Step Operation Press Action

1Select

Switchover value

function

FUNCTION

L1/L2

assuming you

are still in

Control Set Up

group

until you see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

SW VALUE

The switchover

value

or to select the switch-over value in the upper

display.

Set tuning constant

values for each set There are specific tuning constants that must be set for each set. The

procedure in Table 5-18 shows you how to access these constants and

change their values.

Table 5-18 Procedure for Setting Tuning Constant Values

Step Operation Press Action

1Select Tuning

Set Up Group SET UP until you see:

TUNING

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

2Select the tuning

constants FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

to successively display the following

constants:

Lower Display

Upper Display The tuning constant

value

PROP BD or GAIN*

RATE*

RSET*

CYC SEC or CYC SX3*

PROP BD2 or GAIN2**

RATE 2**

RSET2**

CYC2 SEC or CYC2 SX3**

or To change the value of any of the above

listed prompts in the lower display.

*PIDSET1 will be used when PV or SP, whichever is selected, is greater than the

switch-over value.

**PIDSET2 will be used when PV or SP, whichever is selected, is less than the switch-

over value.

170 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Switch between two

sets via the keyboard

(without automatic

switchover)

This procedure is operational only if 2 PID SETS was configured at the

Control Set Up group. The procedure in Table 5-19 shows you how to

switch from one set to another.

Table 5-19 Procedure for Switching PID SETS from the Keyboard

Step Operation Press Action

1Access the PID

set display LOWER

DISPLAY

until you see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

PIDSETX

The PV value

X = 1 or 2

or to change PID SET 1 to PID SET 2 or vice

versa.

You can use Accutune on each set.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 171

5.11 Alarm Setpoints

Introduction An alarm consists of a relay contact and an operator interface indication.

The alarm relay is de-energized if setpoint 1 or setpoint 2 is exceeded.

The alarm relay is energized when the monitored value goes into the

allowed region by more than the hysteresis.

The relay contacts can be wired for normally open (NO) energized or

normally closed (NC) de-energized at the rear terminals. See Table 2-8 in

the Section 2 – Installation for alarm relay contact information.

There are four alarm setpoints, two for each alarm. The type and state

(High or Low) is selected during configuration. See Section 3 –

Configuration for details.

Procedure for

displaying the alarm

setpoints

Table 5-20 lists the procedure for displaying and changing the alarm

setpoints.

Table 5-20 Procedure for Displaying or Changing the Alarm Setpoints

Step Operation Press Action

1Access the

Alarm Set Up

group

SET UP until you see:

ALARMS

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

2Access the

Alarm Setpoint

Values

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

to successively display the alarm setpoints

and their values. Their order of appearance

is shown below.

Lower Display

Upper Display The alarm setpoint

value

A1S1 VAL = (Alarm 1, Setpoint 1 value)

A1S2 VAL = (Alarm 1, Setpoint 2 value)

A2S1 VAL = (Alarm 2, Setpoint 1 value)

A2S2 VAL = (Alarm 2, Setpoint 2 value)

or to change any alarm setpoint value you

select in the upper display.

3Return to normal

operation LOWER

DISPLAY

172 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

5.12 Two Loops of Control Overview

Introduction The UDC 3300 can operate using two independent loops of control or

internal Cascade control.

Available only on Expanded Model DC330E-XX-XXX.

TWO INDEPENDENT LOOPS—See Functional Overview Block

Diagrams for Loop 1 and Loop 2 (Figure 5-2) and Table 5-21 for

selections based on these diagrams.

The following rules apply for two independent loops:

•Current output on Loop 2 requires auxiliary output.

• Loop 2 Current Duplex output is limited to 2nd Current output signal

only.

•Loop 2 relay output is always dedicated to relay output 2.

•No Time Duplex outputs on Loop 2.

•No ON/OFF or 3 Position Step algorithms on Loop 2.

•No Position Proportional output is available on 2-loop controllers.

INTERNAL CASCADE CONTROL—See Functional Overview Block

Diagram (Figure 5-3) and Table 5-25 for selections based on these

diagrams.

The following rules apply for internal Cascade control:

•Loop 2 must be the primary loop.

•Loop 1 must be the secondary (internal or slave) loop because all

output forms exist on Loop 1.

•Loop 1 remote setpoint is fixed as Loop 2 output.

•No Position Proportional output is available on cascade controllers.

Selections Refer to Figures 5-2, 5-3, and 5-4 Block Diagrams and Table 5-21 for

selections based on these diagrams.

Table 5-21 Control Loop Selections

Loop Input 1 Input 2 Input Algorithm

LOOP 1 Process Variable* Via Configuration or

Digital Inputs Via Configuration or

Digital Inputs Yes

Remote Setpoint No Via configuration or

Digital Inputs Yes

Feedforward No Yes Yes

LOOP 2 Process Variable* Via Configuration or

Digital Inputs Via Configuration or

Digital Inputs Yes

Remote Setpoint No Via Configuration or

Digital Inputs Yes

Feedforward No Yes Yes

*The PV may be a combination of multiple inputs via a Loop input algorithm.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 173

Functional overview Figure 5-2 is a block diagram of a Loop 1 of a single loop controller and

Loop 1 and Loop 2 of a dual loop controller.

Figure 5-2 Functional Overview Block Diagram of a Single Loop (Loop #1) or Dual Loop

Controller (Loop #1 and Loop #2)

24180

IN 1

Ratio

Bias

•

••

IN 2

Ratio

Bias

•

••

Source

IN 2 In Alg2

RSP

Source

Input 1

Input 2

Output 1

Output 2

INPUT A

INPUT B

INPUT C

INPUT

ALGORITHM 1 or 2

FEEDFORWARD

INPUT A ONLY

To RSP

Source

Remote SP

Local SP

2SP

3SP

To RSP •

To RSP

PID

CONTROL

ALGORITHM

Loop 1 or Loop 2

FEEDFORWARD

SUMMER OR

MULTIPLIER

OUTPUT

Output

without

Feedforward

or Manual

Mode

To Final

Control

Element

None

OUT 2

In Alg1

IN 3

Ratio

Bias

•

••

•

To RSP

IN 3

Input 1

Input 2

In Alg 1

In Alg 2

Output 2

Output 1

Input 3

Input 1

Input 2

In Alg 1

In Alg 2

Output 2

Output 1

Input 3

174 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Internal cascade Figure 5-3 is a block diagram of internal Cascade for a 2-loop controller.

Figure 5-3 Functional Overview Block Diagram of Internal Cascade of a 2-loop Controller

PID

CONTROL

ALGORITHM

Loop 2

OUTPUT

To Final

Control

Element

PV SOURCE

See Loop 2

Block Diagram

PRIMARY LOOP

PV SOURCE

See Loop 1

Block Diagram

SECONDARY LOOP

PID

CONTROL

ALGORITHM

Loop 1

SETPOINT

SOURCE

Loop #1

INTERNAL

OUTPUT

SIGNAL

SETPOINT

SOURCE

See Loop #2

Block Diagram

INTERNAL CASCADE RULES

• Loop #2 must be the primary loop.

• Loop #1 must be the secondary (internal or slave) loop

because all output forms exist on Loop 1.

• Loop #1 Remote Setpoint is fixed as loop #2 output. 24182

Remote Setpoint

Local Setpoint

2SP

3SP

Override rules The UDC 3300 allows you to select high or low output override. Refer to

Section 3 - Configuration to select High or Low.

The following rules apply for high/low override:

•Only one physical output is required when override is enabled. It is the

output from Loop 1 because Loop 2’s internal output is routed through

the selector.

•Loop 2 output can also be available at all times if desired.

•In Manual mode, the Output may be overridden.

•Does not apply for Three Position Step Control.

•OTI on bottom display shows value of the internal Loop 1 output

before any override.

ATTENTION The output of the unselected loop tracks the selected loop

to within 5 % when in Auto mode to eliminate windup. This tracking is

done in the direction opposite to the Override Select configuration; i.e., for

High Select, the unselected output tracks within 5 % of lower, and vice

versa.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 175

Figure 5-4 is a block diagram of the Hi/Lo Override Selector.

Figure 5-4 Hi/Lo Override Selector

HI/LO

OVERRIDE

SELECTOR

PID

LOOP 1

PID

LOOP 2

PV 1

PV 2

OUTPUT 1

OUTPUT 2

OUTPUT 1 TERMINALS

OUTPUT 2 TERMINALS

IF DESIRED

24183

Two-loop restrictions Table 5-22 gives two-loop functionality and restrictions for controllers

with one current output (Auxiliary output) and three relay outputs.

Table 5-22 Two-loop Functionality and Restrictions (Model DC330E-EE-2XX or

Model DC330E-EE-5XX)

Controller with One Current Output (Auxiliary Output) and Three Relay Outputs

Output Type Current Auxiliary Relay #1 Relay #2 Relay #3

Loop 1 is TIME SIMPLEX,

Loop 2 is:

Time Simplex

Current or Current Duplex (100 %)

Current/Time or Time/Current

N/A

Not used

Loop 2 Output

Loop 2:

Output 1 or 2

Loop 1 Output

Loop 2 Output

Alarm 2

Loop 2:

Output 1 or 2

Alarm 1

Loop 1 is TIME DUPLEX/TPSC,

Loop 2 is:

Time Simplex (N/A)

Current or Current Duplex (100 %)

Current/Time or Time/Current (N/A)

—

N/A

—

Loop 2 Output

—

Loop 1,Output 1

—

Loop 1,Output 2

—

Alarm 1

—

Loop 1 is CURRENT OUTPUT or

CURRENT DUPLEX – 100 %,

Loop 2 is:

Time Simplex

Current or Current Duplex (N/A)

Current/Time or Time/Current (N/A)

N/A

—

Loop 1 Output

—

Loop 2 Output

—

Alarm 2

—

Alarm 1

—

Loop 1 is TIME/CURRENT or

CURRENT/TIME,

Loop 2 is:

Time Simplex

Current or Current Duplex (N/A)

Current/Time or Time/Current (N/A)

N/A

—

Loop 1:

Output 1 or 2

—

Loop 1:

Output 1 or 2

—

Loop 2 Output

—

Alarm 1

—

TWO-LOOP RESTRICTIONS:

1. Time Duplex and Three Position Step Control are not available on Control Loop 2.

2. Position Proportional Control is not available on Two-Loop or Cascade Controllers.

3. If either Time Duplex or Three Position Step Control is selected as Control Loop 1 Output, then Time Simplex,

Current/Time Duplex and Time/Current Duplex are not available for Control Loop 2 Output.

4. Current Duplex 50 % is not available on Model No. DC330E-EE-2XX.

176 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Two-loop restrictions Table 5-23 gives two-loop functionality and restrictions for controllers

with two current outputs (including Auxiliary output) and two relay

outputs.

Table 5-23 Two-loop Functionality and Restrictions (Model DC330E-KE-2XX or

Model DC330E-KE-5XX)

Controller with Two Current Outputs (including Auxiliary Output) and Three Relay Outputs

Output Type Current Auxiliary Relay #1 Relay #2 Relay #3

Loop 1 is TIME SIMPLEX,

Loop 2 is:

Time Simplex

Current or Current Duplex (100 %)

Current/Time or Time/Current

Not used

Loop 2 Output

Loop 2:

Output 1 or 2

N/A

Loop 1 Output

Loop 2 Output

Alarm 1

Loop 2:

Output 1 or 2

Loop 1 is TIME DUPLEX/TPSC,

Loop 2 is:

Time Simplex (N/A)

Current or Current Duplex (100 %)

Current/Time or Time/Current (N/A)

—

Not used

—

Loop 2 Output

—

N/A

—

Loop 1,Output 1

—

Loop 1,Output 2

—

Loop 1 is CURRENT OUTPUT or

CURRENT DUPLEX – 100 %,

Loop 2 is:

Time Simplex

Current or Current Duplex (100 %)

Current/Time or Time/Current (N/A)

Loop 1 Output

Not used

Loop 2 Ouptut

Loop 2:

Output 1 or 2

N/A

Loop 2 Output

Alarm 2

Loop 2:

Output 1 or 2

Alarm 1

Loop 1 is CURRENT DUPLEX – 50 %,

Loop 2 is:

Time Simplex

Current (N/A)

Current/Time or Time/Current (N/A)

Loop 1,Output 1

—

Loop 1,Output 2

—

N/A

—

Loop 2 Output

—

Alarm 1

—

Loop 1 is TIME/CURRENT or

CURRENT/TIME,

Loop 2 is:

Time Simplex

Current or Current Duplex (100 %)

Current/Time or Time/Current

Loop 1:

Output 1 or 2

Loop 1:

Output 1 or 2

Loop 1:

Output 1 or 2

Not used

Loop 2 Output

Loop 2:

Output 1 or 2

N/A

Loop 1:

Ouptut 1 or 2

Loop 1:

Output 1 or 2

Loop 1:

Output 1 or 2

Loop 2 Output

Alarm 1

Loop 2:

Output 1 or 2

TWO-LOOP RESTRICTIONS:

1. Time Duplex and Three Position Step Control are not available on Control Loop 2.

2. Position Proportional Control is not available on Two-Loop or Cascade Controllers.

3. If either Time Duplex or Three Position Step Control is selected as Control Loop 1 Output, then Time Simplex,

Current/Time Duplex and Time/Current Duplex are not available for Control Loop 2 Output.

4. Current Duplex 50 % is not available on Model No. DC330E-EE-2XX.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 177

5.13 Configuring Two Loops of Control

Select 2-loop algorithm The procedure in Table 5-24 shows you how select the 2-loop algorithm.

Table 5-24 Procedure for Selecting 2-loop Algorithm

Step Operation Press Action

1Select Algorithm

Set Up Group SET UP until you see:

ALGORTHM

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

2Select the PID

Loops FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

to successively display the following

constants:

ALGORTHM

Lower Display

Upper Display

1 LOOP

2LOOPS

CASCAD

or To select two Loops or Cascade control.

Select the output

algorithm for each loop See Section 5.12 for rules and regulations, then follow the procedure in

Table 5-25.

Table 5-25 Procedure for Selecting Output Algorithm

Step Operation Press Action

1Select Output

Algorithm Set Up

Group

SET UP until you see:

OUT ALG

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

2Select Loop 1

Algorithms FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

to successively display the following

constants:

OUT ALG

Lower Display

Upper Display

TIME

CURRNT

POSITN

TIME D

CUR D

CUR TI

TI CUR

or to select Loop 1 algorithm.

178 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Step Operation Press Action

3Select Loop 2

algorithms FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

until you see:

OUT2 ALG

Lower Display

Upper Display

NONE

TIME

CURRNT

CUR D

CUR TI

TI CUR

or to select Loop 2 algorithm.

Select control

parameters for each

loop

The procedure in Table 5-26 shows you how select the 2 loop algorithm.

Table 5-26 Procedure for Selecting Control Parameters

Step Operation Press Action

1Select Control

Set Up Group SET UP until you see:

CONTROL

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

CONTROL2

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

for Loop 1 for Loop 2or

2Refer to Section 5.12 for rules and

restrictions and to Section 3 – Configuration

to select the individual parameters.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 179

Select tuning

parameters for each

group

The procedure in Table 5-27 shows you how select the Tuning

Parameters.

Table 5-27 Procedure for Selecting Tuning Parameters

Step Operation Press Action

1Select Tuning

Set Up Group SET UP until you see:

TUNING

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

TUNING 2

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

for Loop 1 for Loop 2or

PID sets 1 and 2 (TUNING) are for Loop 1

and single loop applications.

PID sets 3 and 4 (TUNING 2) are for Loop 2

in two-loop and cascade control applications.

2Select Tuning

constants FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

to successively display the following

constants:

Lower Display

Upper Display

TUNING CONSTANTS for

Primary Loop

PROP BAND or GAIN

RATE (MIN)

RESET (MIN OR RPM)

CYCLE

PROP BAND2 or GAIN2

RATE2 (MIN)

RESET2 (MIN OR RPM)

CYCLE2

The Tuning Constant Value

TUNING CONSTANTS for

LOOP 2

PROP BAND3 or GAIN3

RATE3 (MIN)

RESET3 (MIN OR RPM)

CYCLE3

PROP BAND4 or GAIN4

RATE4 (MIN)

RESET4 (MIN OR RPM)

CYCLE4

Refer to Section 3 - Configuration for

detailed information.

You can Autotune both sets on either loop.

Refer to Section 5.21.

Use the FUNCTION key to switch

between loops.

or To change the values.

180 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

5.14 Monitoring Two Loops of Control

Introduction Monitoring two individual loops of control or internal Cascade is the same

as a single loop except as indicated in Table 5-28.

Table 5-28 Digital Display Indication—Two Loops

Indicator Loop Indication Definition

none

(two-loop)

(cascade)

Loop 1 •Upper display shows the Process Variable

(PV) for Loop 1

•Lower display shows the Loop 1

parameters and the PV and Output for

Loop 2

•Controller setpoint annunciators show the

setpoint currently being used for Loop 1

L” Loop 2 •Upper display shows the Process Variable

(PV) for Loop 2

•Lower display shows the Loop 2

parameters and the PV and Output for

Loop 1

•Controller setpoint annunciators show the

setpoint currently being used for Loop 2

Loop display Display of Loop 1 or Loop 2 (if configured) is selected by toggling the

FUNCTION / LOOP 1/2 key.

Viewing each loop’s

process variable Regardless of which loop is being displayed, 1 or 2, the process variable

of the non-displayed loop can be shown in the lower display by repeated

presses of the LOWER DISPLAY key until 1PVXXXX or 2PVXXXX

is displayed.

Internal cascade

indication When internal Cascade has been configured, an “I” will appear on the left

side of the upper display as long as Loop 1 is operating in the remote

setpoint mode. Hold in the SETPOINT SELECT key until RSP appears

in the lower display then release the key to select remote setpoint.

Switching between automatic and manual mode on either loop will not

affect the internal Cascade indication.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 181

5.15 Operating Two Loops of Control

Loop operation Operation of two individual loops of control is identical to operating a

single loop of control except that TUNING 2 group applies to Loop 2 only

and two PID sets, 3 and 4, are available. TUNING group applies to Loop

1 with PID sets 1 and 2 applicable.

Operating modes and

setpoint source The rules for Auto/Manual modes and changing setpoint sources are the

same as single loop operation.

Keyboard operation Note that the loop being displayed is the only loop affected by normal

keyboard operation. However, either loop can be reconfigured when in the

Set Up mode regardless of which is being displayed during normal

operation.

Accutune Two independent loops or cascaded loops can be tuned at the same time,

if configured.

Setpoint ramp or SP

programming Either loop or both loops can be configured for a single setpoint ramp

operation by enabling the desired loop or loops (see Section 3 –

Configuration).

An “H” or “R” will appear when applicable, depending upon which loop

is being displayed.

The RUN/HOLD operation is shown in Table 5-15 Procedure for Running

a Setpoint Ramp.

Digital inputs (remote

mode switching) Digital Input 2 is dedicated to Loop 2 and Digital Input 1 is dedicated to

Loop 1 when two loops or Cascade control is configured.

Output override Hi/Lo

select Output Override allows you to select the higher of Output 1 and Output 2

(Hi Select) or the lower of Output 1 and Output 2 (Lo Select) to appear at

Output 1 terminals to drive the final control element. Refer to Section 5.12

for Override rules and block diagram.

Override prompts appear under the Algorithm Set Up group, function

prompt OUT OVRD.

182 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

5.16 Three Position Step Control Algorithm

Introduction The Three Position Step Control algorithm (Loop 1 only) allows the

control of a valve (or other actuator) with an electric motor driven by two

controller output relays; one to move the motor upscale, the other to move

it downscale, without a feedback slidewire linked to the motor shaft.

Accutune SP or SP+PV tuning does not function with this algorithm.

Accutune TUNE will operate with this algorithm.

Estimated motor

position Models DC330X-EE-XXX-X0, DC330X-AA-XXX-X0

The Three Position Step control algorithm provides an output display

(OUT) which is an estimated motor position since the motor is not using

any feedback. Although this output indication is only accurate to a few

percent, it is corrected each time the controller drives the motor to one of

its stops (0 % or 100 %).

It avoids all the control problems associated with the feedback slidewire

(wear, dirt, noise). When operating in this algorithm, the estimated “OUT”

display is shown to the nearest percent (i.e. no decimal).

Accurate motor

position Models DC330X-EE-XXX-X2, DC330X-AA-XXX-X2

In the event that an accurate and repeatable indication in motor position is

required, Position Proportional model’s slidewire input can be used to

read the motor position and display it on the lower display as “POS” while

still operating in the Three Position Step control mode.

The slidewire must be calibrated for this to operate correctly.

Displaying the motor

position Table 5-29 lists the procedure for displaying the motor position.

Table 5-29 Procedure for Displaying the 3PSTEP Motor Position

Step Operation Press Action

1Access the

displays LOWER

DISPLAY

until you see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

The PV value

POS = 3PStep motor position with

slidewire connected

OUT = Estimated 3PStep motor

position when no slidewire exists

Power-up output When the controller powers up after a power outage, the position of the

motor will correspond to whatever was configured at the Control Set Up

function prompt PWR OUT, selection LAST or F’SAFE. Refer to Section

4.10, Table 4-9 for definition of each selection.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 183

5.17 Input Math Algorithms

Introduction If selected via Math options, this controller has two input algorithms

available. Each algorithm can be configured to provide a derived

(calculated) PV or a derived remote setpoint. Up to three inputs may be

applied to the calculation. In addition, the two algorithms may be “linked”

to combine two calculations by configuring one algorithm to be an input

to the other algorithm.

Standard functionality:

•Basic models (DC330B) contain as standard: Weighted Average,

Feedforward Summer, Feedforward Multiplier.

•Expanded models (DC330E) provide as standard: Weighted Average,

Feedforward Summer, Feedforward Multiplier, Relative Humidity.

The Math option, which provides additional algorithms plus two

Characterizers, Totalizer, and Gain Scheduling, is available only on

Expanded Model DC330E-XX-XXX.

Input algorithm

selections Algorithm selections are made in Section 3 – Configuration. The

following function prompts can be found in the Algorithm Set Up group:

IN ALG1

IN ALG2

These selections include the following algorithms:

Weighted Average

Feedforward Summer

Relative Humidity

Summer

Hi Select

Lo Select

√ Multiply Divide

√ Multiply

Multiply Divide

Multiply

Feedforward Multiplier

Carbon Potential (several types)

Dewpoint

The formulas for these selections are given in Table 4-5 in Section 4 –

Configuration Prompt Definitions.

Input A, Input B, and Input C selections for these formulas are found in

Section 4 – Configuration Prompt Definitions; Set Up group

ALGORTHM, under the following function prompts:

ALG1 INA

ALG1 INB

ALG1 INC

ALG2 INA

ALG2 INB

ALG2 INC

184 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

8-segment

characterization This is available as part of the Math Algorithm option. Two 8- selections

can made in Section 3 – Configuration; Set Up group ALGORTHM,

under function prompts:

8SEG CH1

Xn VALUE

Yn VALUE

8SEG CH2

Xn VALU2

Yn VALU2

An 8-segment characterizer can be applied to either Input 1, Input 2,

Output 1, or Output 2. When Input 1 or Input 2 is used, the selected

input’s Ratio and Bias are applied to the Xn values.

When one of the loop outputs is selected, the Xn Values are the output

from the control algorithm, and the Yn Output is the final control element

action.

An example of 8-segment characterization is shown in Figure 4-2.

Totalizer function A Flow Totalizer is available as part of the Math Algorithm option. This

calculates and displays the total flow volume being measured by Input 1.

Alternatively, it can be applied to either Input Algorithm 1 or Input

Algorithm 2 to totalize the compensated flow rate being calculated by the

algorithm.

The totalizer displays the current totalized flow value (up to seven digits

maximum). Seven scaling factors are available (from one to one million).

The desired scaling factor is applied to the calculated value to extend the

maximum total flow range that can be displayed.

Five integration rates are available to match the totalizer rate to the rate

of flow being measured. The rates are:

Engineering units (EU) per second

EU per minute

EU per hour

EU per day

Millions of units per day

The totalizer value is stored in nonvolatile memory once every eight

hours. If power is lost while the totalizer is in operation, the current value

of the totalizer will be lost. When power is restored, the totalizer will

start operation for the last value stored in nonvolatile memory. The Σ

(Sigma) display will blink to indicate this condition. Reset the totalizer.

The totalizer can be reset from the keyboard whenever desired. The

totalizer should always be reset to initialize the counters whenever it is

enabled, otherwise, the “Σ” (Sigma) display will blink.

Refer to Section 3 – Configuration, Set Up group ALGORTHM, function

prompt TOTALIZER to select an application, and the function prompts

that follow TOTALIZER to enter your scale factor and rate of integration.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 185

Alarm on totalizer

value The alarm type configuration includes an Alarm on Totalizer value. This

allows an alarm setpoint value to be used to cause an alarm when

exceeded. The alarm setpoint represents the lowest four digits of the

selected Totalizer Scale Factor and has a range from 0 to 9999 x Totalizer

Scale Factor.

Totalizer reset via

digital input The digital input type configuration includes a Reset Totalizer that resets

the accumulated totalizer value when the DI is closed.

186 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

5.18 Digital Input Option (Remote Switching)

Introduction The Digital Input option detects the state of external contacts for either of

two inputs. On contact closure, the controller will respond according to

how each digital input is configured. If the controller is configured for

either 2-loop or Cascade control, then switch #1 operates only on Loop 1

and switch #2 operates only on Loop 2.

Make your selection under the Option Set Up group function prompt

“DIG IN1” or “DIG IN2.” See Section 3 – Configuration .

Action on closure Table 5-30 lists the configuration prompt selections, the “Action on

Closure,” and the display indication for each selection available.

Table 5-30 Digital Input Option Action on Contact Closure

DIG IN1 or

DIG IN2

Selections

Display Indication Action on Contact Closure

Returns (toggles) to original state when contact opens,

unless otherwise noted.

None DI 1 2 always off* No Digital Input selection

*The Digital Input Annunciator will always show the Digital Input status.

TO MAN MAN blinks Puts the controller into manual mode. Contact open returns the

controller to former mode unless MANUAL/AUTO key is pressed

while digital input is active, then it stays in the manual mode.

TO LSP Puts the controller into local setpoint 1. When contact opens, the

controller returns to former operation, local or remote setpoint, unless

the SETPOINT SELECT key is pressed while digital input is active,

then it stays in the local setpoint mode.

TO 2SP RSP annunciator blinks Puts the controller into local setpoint 2. When contact opens, the

controller returns to former operation, local or remote setpoint, unless

the SETPOINT SELECT key is pressed while digital input is active,

then it stays in the local setpoint 2 mode.

TO 3SP RSP annunciator blinks Puts the controller into local setpoint 3. When contact opens, the

controller returns to former operation, local or remote setpoint, unless

the SETPOINT SELECT key is pressed while digital input is active,

then it stays in the local setpoint 3 mode.

TO DIR Selects direct controller action.

ToHOLD H blinks Suspends setpoint program or setpoint ramp operation. Contact open

runs the ramp/program from the Hold point unless the Ramp/Program

was not previously started via the RUN/HOLD key. This selection

applies to either loop.

ToPID2 PIDSET 2 in lower

display Selects PID set 2.

PV 2IN II (II blinks)

IN Selects the PV to equal Input 2.

PV 3IN III (III blinks)

IN Selects the PV to equal Input 3.

RERUN Resets the Setpoint program back to the beginning of the first segment

in the program and leaves the program in the same Run or Hold mode

that it was in when the DI closed. Opening the DI has no further affect.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 187

DIG IN1 or

DIG IN2

Selections

Display Indication Action on Contact Closure

Returns (toggles) to original state when contact opens,

unless otherwise noted.

TO RUN R indicator blinks Starts a stopped SP Program. Reopening contact puts the controller in

Hold mode. This selection applies to either loop.

ToBEGN Resets the Setpoint Program back to the beginning of the first segment

in the program and places the program into the Hold mode. Reopening

the contact has no effect. This selection applies to either loop.

STOP I Disables PID Integral (I) action.

MAN FS MAN blinks Unit goes to manual mode, output goes to the failsafe value. This will

cause a bump in the output when switching from AUTO to MANUAL.

The switch back from MANUAL to AUTO is bumpless.

ToLOCK LOCKED when a key is

pressed Disables all keys.

ToAout Output is forced to value set at control prompt “AUTO OUT” when

controller is in automatic mode. Reopening contact returns the

controller to the normal output. This selection is only available on Loop

TIMER Timer clock ( ) and

time appear in lower

display.

Starts timer (momentary). Reopening switch has no effect.

AM STA Causes switch to Auto Manual Station mode. Refer to Figure 5-5 in

Section 5.19 for auto manual station information. This selection is only

available on Loop 1.

ToTUNE TUNE ON in lower

display Starts the Accutune process. Opening the switch has no effect.

SPinit Forces the SP to initialize at the current PV value.

TRACK1 O blinks Allows Output 1 to track Input 2.

TRACK2 O blinks Allows Output 2 to track Input 2.

ToOUT2 O blinks Allows Output 2 to override Output 1.

TO RSP RSP annunciator blinks Selects remote setpoint.

D L1/2 Displays loop not being displayed at time of closure.

RST FB Allows Input 2 to override the internal reset value, providing external

reset feedback.

ToPURG MAN blinks and output

value shows in lower

display

Forces loop to manual mode with the output values set to the Output

High Limit configuration.

LoFIRE MAN blinks and output

value shows in lower

display

Forces loop to manual mode with the output set to the Output Low

Limit configuration.

MAN LT Forces loop to manual mode. This is a momentary switch input,

therefore no action occurs when the switch is opened.

To return to automatic mode, press the MANUAL/AUTO key.

REStot Resets the accumulated totalizer value. Opening the switch has no

effect.

188 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Keyboard operation Front panel keys have no effect on the digital input action in the closed

state.

Digital inputs 1 and 2

combination selections The Digital Input combination selections listed in Table 5-31 can be used

in combination with the digital inputs 1 and 2 listed in Table 5-30.

Refer to Section 3 – Configuration and make your selections under the

Options Set Up group function prompt “DIG 1 COMB” or “DIG 2

COMB.”

When 2-loop or cascade control is configured, digital input 1 operates on

Loop 1 and digital input 2 operates on Loop 2, unless otherwise noted.

Table 5-31 Digital Input Combinations “DIG IN1” or “DIG IN2”

Selections used in

Combination with

“DIG IN1” or

“DIG IN2”

Display Indication Action on contact closure

Returns (toggles) to original state

when contact opens.

+PID2 PIDSET 2 in lower display Selects PID set 2.

+ToDIR Puts the controller into direct controller action.

+ToSP2 RSP blinks Selects the second local setpoint.

+DISAT T indicator is no longer lit Disables Adaptive tune.

+ToSP1 Selects the local setpoint.

+RUN R indicator blinks Starts or restarts RUN of SP Ramp/Program.

Digital inputs 1 and 2

combination operation There are five possible situations that can occur when working with

digital input combinations. Table 5-32 lists these situations and the

resulting action when the switch is active.

In the table:

Enabled means that the parameter is configured and the action

will occur when the digital input is active.

Action Disabled means that the digital input or digital combination

parameter is configured but the action cannot occur

when the digital input is active because the selected

parameter is disabled.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 189

Table 5-32 Digital Inputs 1 and 2 Combination

DIG IN1 DIG COMB Action Example

NONE Any Selection No action will occur when the digital

input is active.

ENABLED DISABLED The DIG IN condition will occur

when the Digital Input is active. DIG IN1 = TO MAN

DIG1 COM = DISABL

Loop 1 will switch to MANUAL

when digital input 1 is active.

ACTION

DISABLED ENABLED No action will occur when the digital

input is active. DIG IN1 = ToPID2

PID SETS = 1 ONLY

DIG1 COM = +ToSP2

LSP’S = TWO

DIG IN1 is action disabled

because PID SETS is set to

1 ONLY. Therefore, when digital

input 1 is active, no action will

occur even though DIG1 COM is

enabled.

ENABLED ACTION

DISABLED Action is indeterminate when the

digital input is active. DIG IN1 = ToPID2

PID SETS = 2KEYBD

DIG1 COM = +ToSP2

LSP’S =1 ONLY

Because DIG1 COM is action

disabled, the action will be

indeterminate when DIG IN1 is

active.

ENABLED ENABLED Both DIG IN and DIG COM action

will occur.

190 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

5.19 Auto/Manual Station

Introduction When you select “AM STA” (auto manual station) under the Option Set

Up group function prompt “DIG IN1” or “DIG IN2” (digital input option),

contact closure on the selected digital input causes the controller to switch

to Auto/Manual Station mode.

Function As shown in Figure 5-5, State 2 is the “A/M Station mode” where the

programmable logic controller (PLC) output is sent through the

Auto/Manual Station. You can switch to manual and change the output at

the controller. (It uses PID set 2.)

State 1 is the “Backup PID mode” which is triggered by opening the

digital input. (It uses PID set 1.)

Figure 5-5 Auto/Manual Station and Backup Control Feature

T/C

PLC

PV SP

IN1 IN2

PID A

OUT1 OUT1

Output 1

4-20 mA

To valve

Aux

Output

SP1 =

new

selection

DI #1 = "AM STA"

(new

selection)

State 1:

DI #1: Open

BACKUP

PID

CONTROL

State 2:

DI #1: Closed

A/M STATION

LSP = SP1 LSP = 2SP

– Direct action

– PD+MR

– SP = 2SP

– PV = IN2

– PIDSET2

PIDSET1

P =

I =

D =

same

PLC

Configure

State 2 per

next page.

Control output

4-20 mA

PVPV Alarm

Output on

Manual

Mode

(new

selection)

PD+MR

}

24184

OPEN

CLOSED

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 191

Description The “AM STA” selection of digital input creates a repeater station when

the digital input is closed. This is accomplished by a multi-selection from

the digital input menu.

•“ACTION” is forced as “DIRECT”.

•“CONT ALG” is forced as “PD+MR”.

•Active setpoint is forced to 2SP.

•The PV is switched to “PV 2IN”.

•The tuning parameters used are the second set of parameters.

When the switch is open the unit becomes a normal controller with

“CONT ALG” of “PID A”, using tuning parameters set 1, SP, PV as IN1

and “DIRECT” or “REVERSE” as selected by customer configuration.

Input 1 is typically the PV of some upper controller and Input 2 is

typically that controller’s output. If the upper control fails, the upper

device or some watchdog opens the digital input switch and UDC 3300

back-up PID A control is active.

When the upper control reactivates, the digital input switch is closed and

the Auto/Manual Station becomes a repeater station and allows the upper

control output signal to pass through.

Configuration There are some things to consider when configuring the controller.

The PV range stays as the IN1 range, even while IN2 is the PV when the

switch is closed; therefore:

•The IN2 HI must be less than or equal to the IN1 HI.

(Suggest: IN2 HI = 100.0)

•The IN2 LO must be greater than or equal to the IN1 LO.

(Suggest: IN2 LO = 0.0)

•The TUNING GAIN2 must be equal to

(IN1 HI – IN1 LO) / (IN2 HI – IN2 LO).

Configuration Refer to Table 5-33 and set up the controller in the order shown.

Table 5-33 Auto/Manual Station Mode Configuration Procedure

Step Press SET

to Select Set

Up Group

Press FUNC to

Select

Function

Prompts

Press ▲ ▼

to Enter

Value or

Selection

Remarks

1 Control PID SETS 2KEYBD

LSP’STWO

SP TRACK NONE

Select other control parameters as needed by the

application.

2 Algorithm CONT ALG PD+MR This allows setting of the Manual Reset value.

3 Tuning MAN RSET 0 Manual reset of 0 for no output bias and requires

LSP2 = 0 %. If bias is required, set MR to equal the

desired output bias value.

192 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Step Press SET

to Select Set

Up Group

Press FUNC to

Select

Function

Prompts

Press ▲ ▼

to Enter

Value or

Selection

Remarks

4 Algorithm CONT ALG PID A Defines back-up control algorithm.

5 Tuning RSET2MIN 50.00

GAIN2 See Note 1 Note 1. Set the Gain 2 equal to

Input 1 Span

Input 2 Span

If “PB” is selected under the Control Set Up group

function prompt “PBorGAIN”, set the PROP BD2 to

100 x Input 2 Span

Input 1 Span

RATE2MIN 0.00 Select PIDSET 1 tuning parameters as needed by the

application.

6 Options DIG IN1 or

DIG IN2 AM STA

CAUTION DO NOT SELECT

•In the CONTROL set up list, do not select SP TRACK as PV or RSP.

•In the SP RAMP set up list, do not select SP RATE as ENABLE.

•In the ALGORTHM set up list, do not select CONT ALG as

PID B, ON-OFF, or 3PSTEP.

•In the Display menu when PIDSET # is displayed, DO NOT change the

selection.

Operation Set the local setpoint 2 to 0 % of the Input 2 range.

These features work with the Auto/Manual Station.

•In the SP RAMP set up list, SP PROG (acts on SP1 for backup

operation).

•In the SP RAMP set up list, SP RAMP (acts on SP1 for backup

operation).

•In the CONTROL set up list, ACTION as DIRECT or REVERSE for

the backup PID A operation.

The PD+MR action is forced to be DIRECT as required for the pass

through of the output signal.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 193

5.20 Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression

Introduction Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression minimizes overshoot after a setpoint change

or a process disturbance. This is especially useful in processes which

experience load changes or where even a small overshoot beyond the

setpoint may result in damage or lost product.

How it works The fuzzy logic observes the speed and direction of the PV signal as it

approaches the setpoint and temporarily modifies the internal controller

response action as necessary to avoid an overshoot. There is no change to

the PID algorithm, and the fuzzy logic does not alter the PID tuning

parameters. This feature can be independently enabled or disabled, as

required by the application, to work with TUNE On-Demand tuning, the

SP tuning algorithm, or Adaptive Tune.

Configuration To configure this item, refer to Section 3 – Configuration:

• Set Up Group ACCUTUNE

• Function Prompt FUZZY

• Select ENABLE or DISABL ( or )

194 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

5.21 Accutune

Introduction There are several types of Accutune from which to choose:

•(TUNE) Demand Tuning—Tuning is done on demand

–by pressing the LOWER DISPLAY and ▲ keys simultaneously,

–by selecting prompt “TUNE” in the lower display,

–via digital input.

•(SP) Setpoint Tuning*—SP only tuning will continually adjust the

Gain or Proportional Band (P), Reset (I), and Rate (D) tuning constants

in response to setpoint changes.

•(TUN+PV) Demand Tuning + PV Adapt—Provides TUNE On

Demand tuning plus PV adaptive tuning whenever a PV process

disturbance of 0.3 % span or greater occurs.

•(SP+PV) Setpoint Tuning* + PV Adapt—Provides SP only tuning

plus PV adaptive tuning whenever a PV process disturbance of 0.3 %

span or greater occurs.

*Not available on Basic Model DC330B

Configuration To configure this item, refer to Section 3 – Configuration:

•Set Up Group ACCUTUNE.

•Function Prompt ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2 depending on which

loop you are tuning.

•Select DISABL, TUNE, SP, TUN+PV, or SP+PV. Use the ▲ or ▼

key.

If SP is selected:

–Enter the setpoint change value, function prompt SP CHANG or SP

CHAN2.

–Verify or change the process gain value, function prompt KPG or

KPG 2.

–Verify criteria, function prompt CRITERIA or CRITERA2.

Two-loop and cascade

operation Accutune can be used on either or both loops. However, while one loop is

operating by SP tuning, the configuration of either loop cannot be

changed. When one loop is operating by PV adaptive tuning, the other

loop can have its configuration changed.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 195

Rules Table 5-34 is a list of rules for Accutune.

Table 5-34 Accutune Rules and Regulations

TUNE SP* Applicable Rule

XTUNE On Demand tuning will work for all control algorithms except ON/OFF. Process

line out is not required.

XTUNE On Demand tuning works for integrating processes.

XSP tuning will work only for algorithm PID a or PID B selections; i.e., it will NOT work

with ON/OFF, Three Position Step, or PD+MR control algorithms.

XSP tuning can tune on all local or computer setpoints except ramping setpoints; i.e.,

cannot be done during SP Ramp or SP Program or when using remote setpoint.

Tuning is done in automatic mode.

Tuning can be monitored or reconfigured using communications option.

Tuning can be enabled via digital inputs.

Tuning can be aborted by going to manual mode or disabling via configuration.

When tuning is in progress, a large T appears in the upper display and disappears as

soon as tuning is completed.

Can tune two independent loops.

XSetpoint changes can be made during operation. The setpoint at the time tuning

starts is captured and Tune runs until completion, then proceeds to the new SP value

following the completion of tuning.

*SP ADAPT not available on Basic Model DC330B

How TUNE (demand)

tuning works TUNE tuning provides virtually foolproof, trouble-free on-demand tuning

in the UDC 3300 controller. No knowledge of the process is required at

start-up. The operator simply enters the desired setpoint and initiates the

tuning.

The controller immediately starts controlling to the setpoint while it

identifies the process, calculates the tuning constants and enters them into

the Tuning group, and begins PID control with the correct tuning

parameters. This works with any process, including integrating type

processes, and allows returning at a fixed setpoint.

The tuning sequence will cycle the controller’s output two full cycles

between 0 % and 100 % (or configured output limits) while allowing only

a very small process variable change above and below the SP during each

cycle. The algorithm then calculates new tuning parameters and enters

them into the Tuning group. A large T appears in the upper display while

tuning is active.

196 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Starting TUNE

(demand) tuning After TUNE or TUN+PV has been enabled, use the procedure in Table

5-35 to start tuning.

Table 5-35 Procedure for Starting TUNE (Demand) Tuning

Step Action

1Set the setpoint to the desired value.

2Switch to Automatic mode by pressing the MANUAL/AUTO key.

3Initiate Tuning by:

•pressing the ▲ key when the lower display prompt = TUNE-OFF,

•pressing the LOWER DISPLAY and ▲ keys simultaneously, or

•using the digital input, if configured.

Aborting tuning If it is necessary to stop or abort the tuning process, press the

MANUAL/AUTO key and the controller will return to manual mode.

You can also disable TUNE or TUN+PV in the ACCUTUNE or

ACCUTUN2 Set Up group.

TUNE for duplex

(heat/cool) TUNE can be done for applications using duplex (heat/cool) control.

During tuning, Accutune requires that setpoint 1 will cause a Heating

demand, and then the calculated tuning parameters will be automatically

entered as PID set 1. Likewise, it requires that tuning at local setpoint 2

will cause a Cooling demand, and then the cooling parameters will be

entered as PID set 2.

The tuning sequence will cycle the controller’s output two full cycles

between the high output limit and 50 % for HEAT or between 50 % and

the low output limit for COOL while allowing only a small process

variable change above and below the setpoint during each cycle.

Configuring TUNE for

duplex (heat/cool) To configure this item, refer to Section 3 – Configuration:

•Set Up Group ACCUTUNE

•Function Prompt ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2

•Select TUNE or TUN+PV, using either ▲ or ▼.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 197

Using TUNE at start-up

for duplex (heat/cool) After TUNE or TUN+PV has been enabled, use the procedure in Table

5-36 to use TUNE at start-up for duplex (heat/cool) control.

Table 5-36 Procedure for Using TUNE at Start-up for Duplex

Step Action

1Heat Zone:

•Adjust Local Setpoint 1 to a value within the Heat zone.

•Put the controller in Automatic mode.

•Press the LOWER DISPLAY and ▲ keys simultaneously to initiate

Heat tuning.

The output will cycle between 50 % and 100 % (or high output limit). A large

T appears in the upper display until tuning is completed and final Heat

parameters are entered for PID set 1 in the Tuning group.

2Cool Zone:

•Adjust Local Setpoint 2 to a value within the Cool zone.

•Put the controller in Automatic mode.

•Press the LOWER DISPLAY and ▲ keys simultaneously to initiate

Cool tuning.

The output will cycle between 0 % and 50 % (or low output limit). A large T

appears in the upper display until tuning is completed and final Cool

parameters are entered for PID set 2 in the Tuning group.

How SP tuning works SP tuning will continually adjust the Gain or Proportional Band (P), Reset

(I), and Rate (D) tuning constants in response to setpoint changes.

ATTENTION SP tuning is not available on Basic Model DC330B.

SP tuning handles all Local and Computer setpoint changes. It uses time

domain analysis, and the rule based expert system techniques to identify

the two most dominant process lags plus any dead time. It then

automatically readjusts the PID parameters as necessary. It does this while

controlling to setpoint in automatic (closed loop) control mode.

These calculated PID values can be changed, if desired, whenever the

tuning is not active. Tuning can be aborted by pushing the

MANUAL/AUTO key to return to the manual mode.

Two criteria are available—Normal and Fast—through configuration.

Setpoint changes During start-up, or whenever the setpoint changes beyond the “SP

Change” value, SP tuning employs time domain analysis to tune the

process at any desired setpoint without any prior initialization or process

knowledge.

198 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Using SP tuning at

start-up After SP or PV+PV has been enabled, use the procedure in Table 5-37 to

use SP tuning at start-up.

Table 5-37 Procedure for Using SP Tuning at Start-up

Step Action

1Put the controller in manual mode by pressing the MANUAL/AUTO key.

2Let the PV stabilize.

3Adjust the setpoint to the desired value.

4Put the controller in automatic mode by pressing the MANUAL/AUTO

key.

The controller will switch to automatic mode and the process will start to

move toward the setpoint and will line out with the proper tuning constants.

A large T appears on the left side of the upper display to indicate that SP

tuning is in progress.

SP tuning for duplex

(heat/cool) SP tuning can be done for applications using duplex (heat/cool) control.

Configuring SP tuning

for duplex (heat/cool) To configure this item, refer to Section 3 – Configuration:

•Set Up Group ACCUTUNE

•Function Prompt ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2

•Select SP or SP+PV, using either ▲ or ▼.

•Enter the Setpoint Change Value, Function Prompt SP CHANG or

SP CHAN2.

–Verify the Process Gain Value to be 1.0, Function Prompt KPG or

KPG 2.

–Verify Criteria selected is FAST, Function Prompt CRITERIA or

CRITERA2.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 199

Using SP tuning at

start-up for duplex

(heat/cool)

After SP or SP+PV has been enabled, use the procedure in Table 5-38 to

use SP tuning at start-up for duplex (heat/cool) control.

Table 5-38 Procedure for Using SP Tuning at Start-up for Duplex

Step Action

1Put the controller into manual mode—MANUAL/AUTO key.

2Heat Zone:

•Adjust the Output to a value above 50 % and at least 5 % lower than the

normal heating setpoint value.

•Let the PV stabilize.

•Press the MANUAL/AUTO key to start tuning for Heat zone.

The controller will switch to automatic mode and the process will start to

move toward the setpoint and will line out with the proper Heat tuning

constants. A large T appears on the left side of the upper display to indicate

that SP tuning is in progress.

When the T disappears, tuning is completed and final values are entered for

PID set 1 parameters in the Tuning group.

3Cool Zone:

•Adjust the Output to a value below 50 % and at least 5 % above the

normal cooling setpoint value.

•Let the PV stabilize.

•Press the MANUAL/AUTO key to start tuning for Cool zone.

The controller will switch to automatic mode and the process will start to

move toward the setpoint and will line out with the proper Cool tuning

constants. A large T appears on the left side of the upper display to indicate

that SP tuning is in progress.

When the T disappears, tuning is completed and final values are entered for

PID set 2 parameters in the Tuning group.

SP tuning after start-up SP tuning will occur whenever the controller is in automatic mode and a

setpoint change occurs which is greater than the previously configured

minimum setpoint change value.

The controller will delay using any setpoint changes for 30 seconds to

enable it to calculate whether to SP tune or not. But if the controller is

toggled between LSP1 and LSP2 or if any other key (such as LOWER

DISPLAY) is pressed, the setpoint change is immediate.

A large T is displayed in the upper display whenever tuning is in progress.

During this time, no changes to the configuration parameters, including

the setpoint, are permitted.

Aborting SP tuning If it is necessary to stop or abort the tuning:

•Press the MANUAL/AUTO key to return to manual mode. This will

cause an immediate abort of tuning.

•Disable SP or SP+PV in the Accutune Set Up group at function prompt

ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2.

200 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Retuning The controller will evaluate current tuning as SP changes occur. When

retuning is required, the controller operates in automatic mode and

identifies new tuning constants. At the point, the T appears and tuning

values are entered and used until retuning occurs again.

TUN+PV or SP+PV

(process variable

disturbance)

The TUNE demand tuning or the SP tuning portions of these selections

work as stated previously.

During process variable (PV) disturbances which result from

nonlinearities, process dynamics, load changes, or other operating

conditions, PV adapt tuning will occur whenever a PV disturbance of

0.3 % span or larger occurs. When this condition exists, the controller

monitors the process response to determine whether there has been a true

process change or a momentary upset. It will take 1 and 1/2 process cycles

around the setpoint before any process recognition can occur to an

oscillating process.

However, if no oscillation occurs, Adaptive may alter the parameters to

speed up or slow down the process response, if it determines the time to

return to the SP is excessive or too fast (overshoot occurs).

For this configuration, the controller operates with only one set of tuning

parameters for each loop. The second set, normally used for duplex output

or for keyboard, PV or SP switching, is not used because Adaptive tune

continually updates the tuning parameters based on the PV deviation.

PV tuning indications A small t is displayed in the upper display whenever PV adapt mode is in

progress. During this time, changes to the configuration parameters are

permitted. Whenever the t is displayed it signifies that the process

response is being monitored and this may or may not result in parameter

retuning.

The selection of Fast or Normal criteria has no effect on PV adaptive

tuning.

Aborting PV adaptive

tuning If it is necessary to stop or abort the tuning:

•Press the MANUAL/AUTO key to return to manual mode. This will

cause an immediate abort of tuning.

•Disable TUN+PV or SP+PV in the Accutune Set Up group at function

prompt ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2.

Error prompt accessing

procedure When an error is detected in the Accutune process, the message AT

ABORT will appear in the lower display.

In order to determine what is causing the error:

•Select ACCUTUNE or ACCUTUN2 Set Up Group.

•Access Function Prompt AT ERROR or AT ERR 2 for error prompt.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 201

Error prompt Table 5-39 lists the Accutune error prompts and their definitions.

Table 5-39 Accutune* Error Prompt Definitions

Upper Display

Prompt Prompt Definition Action to Take

NONE No errors None

OUTLIM SP Adapt step is greater than high output

limit or less than low output limit

Output step insufficient to get to SP value

• Check the output limits under Control Set

Up group function prompts OUTHiLIM and

OUTLoLIM in Section 3 – Configuration.

• Verify the Process Gain Value, function

prompt KPG or KPG 2.

IDFAIL Process Identification Failure

An illegal value of gain, rate, or reset was

calculated.

Try to SP tune again. Insure the process is at

line-out prior to initiation of SP tune.

ABORT

(Only error code

available for TUNE)

• Manual abort has occurred

– Accutune will abort if the

MANUAL/AUTO key is pressed

during tuning

• Digital input detected

• Automatic abort has occurred

– Accutune will automatically abort when

a PV oscillation has been detected

during SP adapt, whenever any SP

values are changed during a PV adapt

tune, or when Accutune is disabled.

Try to TUNE or SP tune again.

LOW PV PV not changed sufficiently or the PV has

increased by more than 4 % and dead

time not determined.

NONE—After a period of about five minutes,

the SP adaptive tuning will be retried

automatically with a larger output step.

RUNING Informational prompt indicating that SP

tune is still active checking process gain

even though T is not lit. It does not affect

the keyboard operation.

NONE

*Does not apply to PV Adapt.

202 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

5.22 Carbon Potential

Introduction Figure 5-6 shows a UDC 3300 controller being used to control the carbon

potential of a furnace’s atmosphere. A carbon probe consisting of a ZrO2

sensor and a thermocouple (to measure the temperature at the sensor)

provides two inputs to the controller. The microprocessor-based controller

computes the atmosphere’s actual carbon potential from these two inputs

and compares the computed value with the desired setpoint. As an on-off

or PID control algorithm determines the controller output necessary to

keep the actual carbon potential at the setpoint. Usually only one output is

used to add more or less enriching gas (typically natural gas) to the

furnace’s base atmosphere, which has a relatively low carbon potential.

The enriching gas then raises the carbon potential to the desired level;

however, there are occasions when it is necessary to add dilution air to

lower the carbon potential instead of enriching gas to raise it. In those

instances, a second output from the controller provides this function.

When proportional control is used, a different set of PID tuning constants

is used for the dilution air than those used for the enriching gas.

Features •Direct calculation of carbon percentage with seven different

manufacturers’ probes

–Advanced Atmosphere Control Corporation (AACC)

–Corning

–Cambridge Instruments

–Marathon Monitors

–Furnace Control Corporation

–MacDhui (Barber Colman)

–Bricesco

•± 0.02 % accuracy

•No nomographs—no mistakes

•Two controller outputs are available for duplex control.

•Probe temperature input type is selectable from complete input menu.

•Three different local setpoints—standard feature

•Duplex control with second set of PID constants for dilution air control

•Process factor adjustment capability

•Automatic sooting warning via flashing display

•New Dewpoint algorithm is available. Range: –50 °F to +100 °F

•New % Oxygen algorithm is available. Range: 0 % to 40 %

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 203

Diagram Figure 5-6 is a diagram illustrating the application of the UDC 3300 for

carbon potential control.

Figure 5-6 Carbon Potential Control

T/C

f(x) f(x)

PID

E/P

Carbon

Probe

Sensor

Carburizing

Furnace

Carbon

Calc.

Output

Enrichment Gas

• SP

• 2SP

• 3SP or

RSP

Input 2 Input 1

UDC 3300

24185

millivolts

Input 3—

Optional Online

CO Compensation

ATTENTION •For Carbon control, set Input Algorithm 1 to the proper carbon sensor

used and set the PV source to IN AL 1. Input 1 will automatically

become CARBON.

•For % Oxygen control, set Input Algorithm 1 to OXYGEN. Input 1 will

automatically become OXYGEN.

• For Dewpoint control, set Input Algorithm 1 or Input Algorithm 2 to

DEW PT. Input 1 will automatically become CARBON. The

availability of Dewpoint on Input Algorithm 2 provides the capability

of controlling Carbon Potential on Loop 1 and also reading the

Dewpoint value from the same probe.

•CO Compensation—Receives external CO transmitter signal via Input

3 to provide online compensation fo the carbon calculation. Requires

that the Input 2 temperature signal be a transmitter type input.

204 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

5.23 HealthWatch

Introduction The HealthWatch feature puts diagnostic data at your fingertips so you

can monitor vital performance status to improve your process, predict

failures, and minimize downtime.

Valuable data regarding maintenance and diagnostic selections can be

read by operator-accessed displays. Alarms can be configured to activate

when the desired threshold is reached.

See Section 4.18 Maintenance for details on using the various

HealthWatch timers and counters. See Section 4.15 Alarms for details on

HealthWatch maintenance alarms.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 205

Section 6 – Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming Option

6.1 Overview

What is programming? The term “programming” is used here to identify the process for selecting

and entering the individual ramp and soak segment data needed to

generate the required setpoint versus time profile (also called a program).

A segment is a ramp or soak function which together make up a setpoint

program. Setpoint Ramp/Soak Programming lets you configure 6 ramp

and 6 soak segments to be stored for use as one program or several small

programs. You designate the beginning and end segments to determine

where the program is to start and stop.

Review program data

and configuration While the procedure for programming is straightforward, and aided by

prompts, we suggest that you read “Program Contents” in this section as

well as “Section 3 - Configuration” before doing the setpoint

programming.

Fill out the worksheet Draw a Ramp/Soak Profile on the worksheet provided and fill in the

information for each segment. This will give you a record of how the

program was developed.

What’s in this section The table below lists the topics that are covered in this section.

Topic See Page

6.1 Overview 205

6.2 Program Contents 206

6.3 Drawing a Ramp/Soak Profile 209

6.4 Entering the Setpoint Program Data 211

6.5 Run/Monitor the Program 214

206 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

6.2 Program Contents

What you will configure Basically, you will configure all the data that is relevant to each ramp and

soak segment for a given setpoint versus time profile. The controller will

prompt you through the sequence of segments and associated functions.

Ramp segments A ramp segment is the time it will take to change the setpoint to the next

setpoint value in the program.

Ramps are odd number segments. Segment #1 will be the initial ramp

time.

Ramp time is determined in either:

TIME* - Hours.Minutes Range = 0-99hr.59 min.

RATE* - EU/MIN or EU/HR Range = 0 to 999

* This selection of time or rate is made at prompt “RAMP UNIT”.

Set this prompt before entering any Ramp.

ATTENTION Entering “0” will imply an immediate step change in

setpoint to the next soak.

Soak segments A soak segment is a combination of soak setpoint (value) and a soak

duration (time).

Soaks are even number segments.

Segment 2 will be the initial soak value and soak time.

The soak setpoint range value must be within the setpoint high and low

range limits in engineering units.

SOAK TIME is the duration of the soak and is determined in:

TIME - Hours.Minutes RANGE = 0-99hr.59 min.

Start segment number This designates the number of the first segment (odd number).

Range = 1 to 11

End segment number This designates the number of the last segment. It must be a soak segment

(even number).

Range = 2 to 12

Recycle number This number allows the program to recycle a specified number of times

from beginning to end.

Range = 0 to 99

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 207

Guaranteed soak Each soak segment can have a deviation value of from 0 to ± 99 which

guarantees the value for that segment.

Guaranteed soak segment values >0 guarantee that the segments process

variable is within the ± deviation for the configured soak time. Whenever

the ± deviation is exceeded, soak timing is frozen.

There are no guaranteed soaks whenever the deviation value is configured

to 0; i.e., soak segments start timing soak duration as soon as the soak

setpoint is first reached, regardless of where the process variable remains

relative to the soak segment.

The value is the number in engineering units, above or below the setpoint,

outside of which the timer halts. The range is 0 to 99.

The decimal location corresponds to input 1 decimal selection.

Program state This selection determines the program state after completion.

The selections are:

DISABL = Program is disabled

HOLD = Program on hold (RUN key restarts the program.)

Program termination

state This function determines the status of the controller upon completion.

The selections are:

LASTSP = controls to last setpoint and last control mode

F SAFE = manual mode, failsafe output

ATTENTION If power is lost during a program, upon power-up the

controller will be in hold and the setpoint value will be the setpoint value

prior to the beginning of the setpoint program. The program is placed in

hold at the beginning of the first segment in the program.

Hot Start This function determines whether LSP1 or PV is used as the setpoint

when the program is initially changed from HOLD to RUN.

The selections are:

DISABL = When the program is initially changed from HOLD to

RUN the present LSP1 value is captured as the default setpoint. If the

program is terminated or the power cycled before the program has

completed, the LSP1 is used as the control setpoint. The beginning

segment uses this value as the initial ramp setpoint.

ENABL = When the program is initially changed from HOLD to

RUN the present PV value is captured and used as the beginning setpoint

value for the ramp segment. If the program is terminated before

completion, the setpoint value will revert back to the PV value captured at

the initial HOLD to RUN transition. If the power is cycled before

program completion, upon power-up the setpoint is set to the PV value at

power-up and when the program is restarted that setpoint value is used

initially.

208 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Ramp unit This determines the engineering units for the ramp segments.

The selections are:

TIME = Hours.Minutes

RATE = EU/MIN or EU/HR

ATTENTION This selection cannot be changed while a program is in

operation.

ATTENTION The Accutune TUNE selection will operate during setpoint programming.

When it is initiated during a program, it places the program into Hold

until it completes, then returns it to either Run or Hold depending what

the state was before Tuning started.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 209

6.3 Drawing a Ramp/Soak Profile

Ramp/Soak Profile

example Before you do the actual configuration, we recommend that you draw a

Ramp/Soak profile in the space provided on the “Program Record Sheet”

(Figure 6-2) and fill in the associated information. An example of a

Ramp/Soak Profile is shown in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1 Ramp/Soak Profile Example

500

400

200

300

°F

Time/

Hours 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

SEG 2 SEG 3

SEG 4

SEG 5

SEG 6

SEG 7

SEG 8

SEG 9

SG 10

SG 11

SG 12

SEG 1

22624

Prompt Function Segment Value Prompt Function Segment Value

STRT SEG Start Seg. 1 SEG4TIME Soak Time 4 1 hr.

END SEG End Seg. 12 SEG5RAMP Ramp Time 5 1 hr.:30 min.

RAMP UNIT Engr. Unit for

Ramp TIME SEG6 SP Soak SP 6 250

RECYCLES Number of

Recycles 2SEG6TIME Soak Time 6 3 hr.:0 min.

SOAK DEV Deviation

Value 0SEG7RAMP Ramp Time 7 2 hr:30 min.

PROG END Controller

Status LAST SP SEG8 SP Soak SP 8 500

STATE Controller

State at end HOLD SEG8TIME Soak Time 8 0 hr.:30 min.

KEYRESET Reset SP

Program DISABL SEG9RAMP Ramp Time 9 0

HOT

START PV Hot Start

Program

Initialization

or power up

in SPP

DISABL SG10 SP Soak SP 10 400

SEG1RAMP Ramp Time 1 1 hr. SG10 TIME Soak Time 10 0 hr.:30 min.

SEG2 SP Soak SP 2 300 SG11RAMP Ramp Time 11 3 hr:30 min.

SEG2TIME Soak Time 2 1 hr.:30 min. SG12 SP Soak SP 12 200

SEG3RAMP Ramp Time 3 1 hr. SG12TIME Soak Time 12 0 hr.:30 min.

SEG4 SP Soak SP 4 400

210 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Program Record Sheet Draw your ramp/soak profile on the record sheet shown in Figure 6-2 and

fill in the associated information in the blocks provided. This will give

you a permanent record of your program and will assist you when entering

the Setpoint data.

Figure 6-2 Program Record Sheet

22625

Prompt Function Segment Value Prompt Function Segment Value

STRT SEG Start Seg. SEG4TIME Soak Time 4

END SEG End Seg. SEG5RAMP Ramp Time 5

RAMPUNIT Engr. Unit for

Ramp SEG6 SP Soak SP 6

RECYCLES Number of

Recycles SEG6TIME Soak Time 6

SOAK DEV Deviation

Value SEG7RAMP Ramp Time 7

PROG END Controller

Status SEG8 SP Soak SP 8

STATE Controller

State at end SEG8TIME Soak Time 8

KEYRESET Reset SP

Program SEG9RAMP Ramp Time 9

HOT

START PV Hot Start

Program

Initialization

or power up

in SPP

SG10 SP Soak SP 10

SEG1RAMP Ramp Time 1 SG10 TIME Soak Time 10

SEG2 SP Soak SP 2 SG11RAMP Ramp Time 11

SEG2TIME Soak Time 2 SG12 SP Soak SP 12

SEG3RAMP Ramp Time 3 SG12TIME Soak Time 12

SEG4 SP Soak SP 4

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 211

6.4 Entering the Setpoint Program Data

Introduction The procedure listed in Table 6-1 tells you what keys to press and what

prompts you will see when entering the setpoint program data. Follow the

prompt hierarchy listed in Table 6-2 when selecting the functions for

setpoint programming.

ATTENTION Make sure SP RAMP and SP RATE are disabled first.

Table 6-1 Setpoint Program Data Entry Procedure

Step Action Press Result

1Select SP PROG

Group SET UP until you see

SP PROG

Lower Display

Upper Display

ENABLE

ENABL2

ENAB12

or to enable the setpoint programming option on Loop 1, Loop 2,

or both.

2Select the functions FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

This accesses the function prompts SP Programming.

Upper Display

Shows the current value for each

prompt.

Lower Display

The individual function prompts within

the setpoint program group are shown.

Successive presses of the [FUNCTION] key will sequentially

display all the functions and their values or selections. Follow

the prompt hierarchy shown in Table 6-2.

3Change the value or

selection of a function

prompt

or This changes the value or selection in the upper display. If the

display blinks, you are trying to select an unacceptable value.

4Enter value or

selection into memory FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

This enters the value or selection and goes to another prompt.

Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each function you want to change.

5Exit configuration LOWER

DISPLAY

This exits from the configuration mode.

Alarms on the setpoint

program You can configure an event to go ON or OFF at the beginning or end of

any segment. Refer to Section 3 - Configuration under “Alarms

Parameters Group” for details.

Prompt hierarchy Table 6-2 lists all the function prompts for Setpoint Program data

configuration in the order of their appearance. Follow the procedure in

Table 6-1 to transfer the data from your setpoint Ramp/Soak profile into

the controller. All parameters may be changed while the program is

disabled or in HOLD.

212 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Table 6-2 Prompt Hierarchy and Available Selections

Prompt

(Lower

Display)

Definition Value or Selection (use ▲ or ▼)

(Upper Display)

SP RAMP Setpoint Ramp Selection Selections: DISABL

SP RAMP must be disabled to allow

Setpoint Programming.

SP RATE Setpoint Rate of Change Selections: DISABL

SP RATE must be disabled to allow

Setpoint Programming.

SP PROG Setpoint Ramp/Soak

Programmer Selections:

DISABL

ENABLE—Loop 1

ENABL2—Loop 2

ENAB12—Loops 1 and 2

SP PROG must be enabled to view

the remaining prompts.

STRT SEG Start Segment Number Enter Value: 1 to 11

END SEG End Segment Number Enter Value: 2 to 12

Always end in a soak Segment

(2,4,.....12)

RAMPUNIT Engineering Units from

Ramp Segments Selections:TIME

EU/MIN

EU/HR

RECYCLES Number of Program

Recycles Enter Value: 0 to 99 recycles

SOAK DEV Guaranteed Soak Deviation

Value Enter Value: 0 to +99.00

The number selected will be

0 to 99 ± from setpoint.

PROG END Program Termination State Selections: LASTSP—Hold at

last setpoint in the

program

F SAFE—Manual

mode/Failsafe

output

STATE Program State at Program

End Selections: DISABL

HOLD (hold mode)

KEYRESET Reset/rerun SP Program Selections: DISABL

RERUN

TOBEGN

HOTSTART PV Hot Start

Program Initialization or

power up in SPP

Selections: DISABL—LSP1 is

used as the initial

ramp setpoint.

ENABL—PV value is

used as the initial

ramp setpoint.

SEG1RAMP

SEG1RATE

Segment #1 Ramp Time

Segment #1 Ramp Rate

Enter Value:

Ramp Time = 0-99hr.0-59min, or

Ramp Rate = Engineering units/min

or Engineering units/hr

Select TIME, EU/MIN, or EU/HR at

prompt “RAMP UNIT”. All ramps will

use the same selection.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 213

Prompt

(Lower

Display)

Definition Value or Selection (use ▲ or ▼)

(Upper Display)

SEG2 SP Segment #2 Soak Setpoint

Value Enter Value: Within the Setpoint

limits

SEG2TIME Segment #2 Soak Duration Enter Value: 0-99hr.0-59min

SEG3RAMP

SEG3RATE

Segment #3 Ramp Time or

Segment #3 Ramp Rate Enter Value:

Ramp Time = 0-99hr:0-59min, or

Ramp Rate = EU/MIN or EU/HR

SEG4 SP Segment #4 Soak Setpoint

Value Enter Value: Within the Setpoint

limits

SEG4TIME Segment #4 Soak Duration Enter Value: 0-99hr.0-59min

SEG5RAMP

SEG5RATE

Segment #5 Ramp Time or

Segment #5 Ramp Rate Enter Value:

Ramp Time = 0-99hr.0-59min, or

Ramp Rate = EU/MIN or EU/HR

SEG6 SP Segment #6 Soak Setpoint

Value Enter Value: Within the Setpoint

limits

SEG6TIME Segment #6 Soak Duration Enter Value: 0-99hr.0-59min

SEG7RAMP

SEG7RATE

Segment #7 Ramp Time or

Segment #7 Ramp Rate Enter Value:

Ramp Time = 0-99hr.0-59min, or

Ramp Rate = EU/MIN or EU/HR

SEG8 SP Segment #8 Soak Setpoint

Value Enter Value: Within the Setpoint

limits

SEG8TIME Segment #8 Soak Duration Enter Value: 0-99hr.0-59min

SEG9RAMP

SEG9RATE

Segment #9 Ramp Time

Segment #9 Ramp Rate

Enter Value:

Ramp Time = 0-99hr.0-59min, or

Ramp Rate = EU/MIN or EU/HR

SG10 SP Segment #10 Soak Setpoint

Value Enter Value: Within the Setpoint

limits

SG10TIME Segment #10 Soak

Duration Enter Value: 0-99hr.0-59min

SG11RAMP

SG11RATE

Segment #11 Ramp Time

Segment #11 Ramp Rate

Enter Value:

Ramp Time = 0-99hr.0-59min, or

Ramp Rate = EU/MIN or EU/HR

SG12 SP Segment #12 Soak Setpoint

Value Enter Value: Within the Setpoint

limits

SG12TIME Segment #12 Soak

Duration Enter Value: 0-99hr.0-59min

214 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

6.5 Run/Monitor the Program

Introduction Make sure all the “SP PROG” function prompts under the Set Up group

“SP RAMP” have been configured with the required data.

An “H” will appear in the upper display indicating that the program is in

the HOLD state.

Run/monitor functions Table 6-3 lists all the functions required to run and monitor the program.

Table 6-3 Run/Monitor Functions

Function Press Result

Set the Local

Setpoint SETPOINT

SELECT

You will see

Lower Display

Upper Display

Local Setpoint Value

or to set the Local Setpoint value to where you

want the program to start out.

Run State RUN

HOLD

Initiates the setpoint program.

An “R” appears in the upper display

indicating that the program is running.

Hold State RUN

HOLD

Holds the setpoint program. An “H” appears

in the upper display indicating that the

program is in the HOLD state.

The setpoint holds at the current setpoint.

External Hold

DI = “To Hold”

If Remote Switching (Digital Input option) is

present on your controller, contact closure

places the controller in the HOLD state, if the

setpoint program is running. The “H” in the

upper display will blink indicating external

hold is in effect.

ATTENTION The keyboard takes

priority over external switch for the

RUN/HOLD function.

Contact reopening runs program.

Changing a Segment

while in Hold or These keys will operate and allow you to

change the segment number while in HOLD.

If a different segment is selected, it will be

started at the beginning when placed in

RUN. If the original segment is brought back,

the program will continue from the point

placed in HOLD.

NOTE: Changing a segment number may

affect the alarms/events.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 215

Function Press Result

External Program

Reset

“To Begin”

If Remote Switching (Digital Input option) is

present on your controller, contact closure

resets the SP Program back to the start of

the first segment.

Program cycle number is not affected.

Reopening the contact has no effect and

places the program in HOLD mode.

The setpoint is changed to what the setpoint

was when the program was first started.

RUN

HOLD

restarts the Setpoint Program

Keyboard Reset LOWER

DISPLAY

until you see

Upper Display

Lower Display

ToBEGIN

Press [▲] key to reset program to beginning

at Hold state.

Viewing the present

ramp or soak

segment number

and time

LOWER

DISPLAY

until you see

Upper Display

“R” and the PV value

Lower Display

For Ramp segments:

# RA XX.XX

Segment Number (odd only)

Indicates Ramp segment

Ramp Time - Hours.Minutes or

Ramp Rate - EU/MIN or EU/HR

For Soak segments:

# SK XX.XX

Segment Number (even only)

Indicates Soak segment

Time remaining in segment in

Hrs.Minutes including current

partially completed minute

216 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Function Press Result

Viewing the number

of cycles left in the

program

LOWER

DISPLAY

until you see

Upper Display

“R” and the PV value

Lower Display

RECYC XX

Remaining Cycles 0 to 99

This number does not

include the current partially

completed cycle.

End Program When the final segment is completed, the “R”

in the upper display either changes to “H” if

configured for HOLD state, or disappears if

configured for disable of setpoint

programming.

The controller operates at the last setpoint in

the program in automatic or will be in manual

mode at the failsafe output.

Power-up state The program will be placed in HOLD mode at the beginning of the

program at the local setpoint value prior to the beginning of the program.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 217

SP programming tips Table 6-4 gives procedures for restarting, advancing, and changing the

current segment time or setpoint of a running setpoint program.

Table 6-4 Procedures for Changing a Running Setpoint Program

Function Press Result/Action

Restarting a running

SP program RUN

HOLD

to place SP PROG into HOLD mode.

LOWER

DISPLAY

until you see X RA XXX or X SK XX.XX in

the lower display.

until you see 1 RA XX.XX in the lower

display.

If the lower display already reads 1 RA

XX.XX then press the [▲] key before

pressing the [▼] key.

RUN

HOLD

to place SP PROG into RUN mode.

Advancing a running

SP program RUN

HOLD

to place SP PROG into HOLD mode.

LOWER

DISPLAY

until you see X RA XXX or X SK XX.XX in

the lower display.

and

together to select the segment number to advance to.

EXAMPLE: Change 2 SK XX.XX to 3 RA

XX.XX.

RUN

HOLD

to place SP PROG into RUN mode.

Changing the

current segment

time or setpoint in a

running SP program

RUN

HOLD

to place SP PROG into HOLD mode.

Enter SP PROG configuration and change

the segment to the new time or setpoint

desired.

LOWER

DISPLAY

until you see X RA XXX or X SK XX.XX in

the lower display.

then

RUN

HOLD

to place SP PROG into RUN mode.

218 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 219

Section 7 – Input Calibration

7.1 Overview

Introduction This section describes the field calibration procedures for Input 1 and

Input 2. Every UDC 3300 controller contains all input actuation ranges

fully factory calibrated and ready for configuration to range by the user.

However, these procedures can be implemented if the factory calibration

of the desired range is not within specifications.

Note that the field calibration will be lost if a change in input type

configuration is implemented at a later time. The original factory

calibration data remains available for later use after a field calibration is

done.

What’s in this section This section contains the following topics:

Topic See Page

7.1 Overview 219

7.2 Minimum and maximum range values 220

7.3 Preliminary Information

• Disconnect the field wiring

• Equipment needed

221

222

7.4 Input 1, 2, or 3 Set Up Wiring

• Thermocouple inputs using an ice bath

• Thermocouple inputs using a precision resistor

• RTD (Resistance Thermometer Device) inputs

• Radiamatic, Millivolts, or Volts except 0-10 Volts

inputs

• 0 to 10 Volts input

• 4-20 Milliamps input

223

224

225

226

227

228

7.5 Input 1, 2, or 3 Calibration Procedure 229

7.6 Restoring Factory Calibration 231

WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD !

INPUT CALIBRATION MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO

HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS, AND SHOULD ONLY BE

PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-

ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE CALIBRATION.

220 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

7.2 Minimum and Maximum Range Values

Select the range values You should calibrate the controller for the minimum (0 %) and maximum

(100 %) range values of your particular sensor. If you have a two-input

controller, calibrate each input separately.

Select the Voltage or Resistance equivalent for 0 % and 100 % range

values from Table 7-1. Use these value when calibrating your controller.

Table 7-1 Voltage and Resistance Equivalents for 0 % and 100 % Range Values

PV Input Range Range Values

Sensor Type ° F ° C 0 % 100 %

Thermocouples

B 0 to 3300 –18 to 1816 –0.100 mV 13.769 mV

E-454 to 1832 –270 to1000 –9.835 mV 76.373 mV

E (low) -200 to 1100 –129 to 593 –6.472 mV 44.455 mV

J0 to 1600 –18 to871 –0.886 mV 50.060 mV

J (low) 20 to 770 –7 to 410 –0.334 mV 22.400 mV

K0 to 2400 –18 to1816 –0.692 mV 52.952 mV

K (low) –20 to 1000 –29 to 538 –1.114 mV 22.255 mV

NiNiMoly (NNM68) 32 to 2500 0 to1371 0.000 mV 71.330 mV

NiNiMoly (low) 32 to 1260 0 to682 0.000 mV 31.820 mV

NiMo-NiCo (NM90) 32 to 2500 0 to 1371 0.000 mV 71.773 mV

NiMo-NiCo (low) 32 to 1260 0 to682 0.000 mV 31.825 mV

Nicrosil Nisil (Nic) 0 to 2372 –18 to 1300 –0.461 mV 47.513 mV

R0 to 3100 –18 to1704 –0.090 mV 20.281 mV

S0 to 3100 –18 to1704 –0.092 mV 17.998 mV

T-300 to 700 –184 to371 –5.341 mV 19.097 mV

T (low) -200 to 500 –129 to 260 –4.149 mV 12.574 mV

W5W26 0 to 4200 –18 to2315 –0.234 mV 37.075 mV

W5W26 (low) 0 to 2240 –18 to1227 –0.234 mV 22.283 mV

Honeywell Radiamatic

Type RH

Type RI*

0 to 3400

0 to 9999 max.

–18 to1871

–18 to 9999 max.

0.00 mV

0.00 mV 57.12 mV

60.08 mV

RTD

(IEC Alpha=0.00385)

100 ohms

100 ohms (low)

200 ohms

500 ohms

-300 to 1200

-300 to 300

-300 to 1200

–184 to649

–184 to149

–184 to649

25.18 ohms

50.36 ohms

125.90 ohms

329.13 ohms

156.90 ohms

658.26 ohms

1645.65 ohms

Linear

Milliamps 4 to 20 mA

0 to 20 mA 4.00 mA

0.00 mA 20.00 mA

20.00 mA

Millivolts 0 to 10 mV

0 to 50 mV 0.00 mV

0.00 mV 10.00 mV

50.00 mV

Volts 1 to 5 Volts

0 to 5 Volts

0 to 10 Volts

1.00 Volts

0.00 Volts

5.00 Volts

10.00 Volts

Carbon 0 to 1250 mV 0.00 mV 1250 mV

Oxygen –30 to 510 mV –30.00 mV 510.00 mV

*User must enter the range manually per RI type and application.

ATTENTION Thermocouple voltages are for a reference junction temperature of 32 °F (0 °C).

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 221

7.3 Preliminary Information

Calibration steps Use the following steps when calibrating an input.

Step Action

1Find the minimum and maximum range values for your PV input range from

Table 7-1.

2Disconnect the field wiring and find out what equipment you will need to

calibrate. DO NOT remove external resistor assemblies (if present).

3Wire the calibrating device to your controller according to the Set Up wiring

instructions for your particular input.

4Follow the calibration procedure given for Input #1, Input #2, or Input #3,

after the controller has warmed up for a minimum of 15 minutes.

Disconnect the field

wiring Depending on which input (#1, #2, or #3) you are going to calibrate, tag

and disconnect any field wiring connected to the input terminals on the

rear of the controller.

Figure 7-1 shows the wiring terminal designations for Input #1, Input #2,

and Input #3.

Figure 7-1 Inputs #1, #2, and #3 Wiring Terminals

24173

L2/N

–

Input 1

connections

Input 2

connections Input 3

connections

–

222 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Equipment needed Table 7-2 lists the equipment you will need to calibrate the specific types

of inputs that are listed in the table. You will need a screwdriver to

connect these devices to your controller.

Table 7-2 Equipment Needed

Type of Input Equipment Needed

Thermocouple Inputs

(Ice Bath) •A calibrating device with ± 0.02 % accuracy for use

as a signal source such as a millivolt source.

•Thermocouple extension wire that corresponds with

the type of thermocouple that will be used with the

controller input.

•Two insulated copper leads for connecting the

thermocouple extension wire from the ice baths to

the precision calibrator.

•Two containers of crushed ice.

Thermocouple Inputs

(Precision Resistor) •A calibrating device with ± 0.02 % accuracy for use

as a signal source such as a millivolt source.

•Two insulated copper leads for connecting the

calibrator to the controller.

•A precision 500 ohm resistor ± 0.1 % connected

across input #1 terminals 25 (R) and 27 (–) or input

#2 terminals 22 (R) and 24 (–).

RTD (Resistance Thermometer

Device) •A decade box, with ± 0.02 % accuracy, capable of

providing stepped resistance values over a

minimum range of 0 to 1400 ohms with a resolution

of 0.1 ohm.

•Three insulated copper leads for connecting the

decade box to the controller.

Milliampere, Millivolt, Volts, and

Radiamatic •A calibrating device with ± 0.02 % accuracy for use

as a signal source.

•Two insulated copper leads for connecting the

calibrator to the controller.

•Place current source at zero before switching ON.

•Do not switch current sources OFF/ON while

connected to the UDC 3300 input.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 223

7.4 Input #1, #2, or #3 Set Up Wiring

Thermocouple inputs

using an ice bath Referring to Figure 7-2, wire the controller according to the procedure

given in Table 7-3.

Table 7-3 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs Using an

Ice Bath

Step Action

1Connect the copper leads to the calibrator.

2Connect a length of thermocouple extension wire to the end of each copper

lead and insert the junction points into the ice bath.

3Connect the thermocouple extension wires to the terminals for Input #1 or

Input #2. See Figure 7-2.

4Connect a cold junction resistor to terminals 25 and 27 for Input #1 or

terminals 22 and 24 for Input #2. See Figure 7-2.

Figure 7-2 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs

Using an Ice Bath

L2/N

–

Ice Bath

Millivolt

Source

T/C Extension Wire

Copper Leads

–

24174

C/J Resistor

–

Input 2

Input 1

224 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Thermocouple inputs

using a precision

resistor

Referring to Figure 7-3, wire the controller according to the procedure

given in Table 7-4.

Table 7-4 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Thermocouple Inputs

Using a Precision Resistor

Step Action

1Connect the copper leads to the calibrator.

2Disconnect the cold junction resistor.

3Install a 500-ohm precision resistor across Input 1 terminals 25 (R) and

27 (–) or Input 2 terminals 22 (R) and 24 (–). See Figure 7-3.

4Subtract the millivolt value for 77 °F (25 °C) from the zero and span value for

your range (see Table 7-1 for zero and span values) and use the adjusted

value when calibrating.

Figure 7-3 Wiring Connections for Thermocouple Inputs

Using a Precision Resistor

L2/N

–

Precision 500 Ohm Resistor

Copper Leads

Millivolt

Source

–

1Caution: The accuracy of the controller is directly affected by the

accuracy of this resistor. At a minimum, use a 0.1%, 25ppm resistor.

24175

–

Input 2

Input 1

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 225

RTD inputs Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of

Input #1 or #2. See Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4 Wiring Connections for RTD

L2/N

–

Decade

Resistance

Box

Copper Leads

equal length 24176

–

Input 2

Input 1

226 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Radiamatic, millivolts,

or volts (except 0 to 10

volts) inputs

Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of

Input #1, #2, or #3. See Figure 7-5.

Figure 7-5 Wiring Connections for Radiamatic, Millivolts, or Volts

(except 0 to 10 Volts)

L2/N

–

Millivolt/Volt

Source

Copper Leads

–

24177

–

Input 2*

Input 1

Input 3*

(0-5, 1-5

volts only)

*Terminals for Input 3 are 22 (+) and 24 (–).

Terminals for Input 2 are 23 (+) and 24 (–).

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 227

0 to 10 volt inputs Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of

Input #1 or #2. See Figure 7-6.

Figure 7-6 Wiring Connections for 0 to 10 Volt Inputs

L2/N

0 to 10

Volt

Source

Copper Leads +

–

100K

24178

100K

Input 2

Input 1

228 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

4 to 20 mA inputs Use the copper leads and connect the calibrator to the rear terminals of

Input #1, #2, or #3. See Figure 7-7.

Figure 7-7 Wiring Connections for 4 to 20 mA inputs

L2/N

–

4 to 20 mA

Source

Copper Leads

–

250Ω

resistor

assy

24179

–

Input 2

Input 1

–

Input 3—Wire terminals as shown below.

4 to 20 mA

Source

–

250 ohm

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 229

7.5 Input #1, #2, or #3 Calibration Procedure

Introduction Apply power and allow the controller to warm up for 15 minutes before

you calibrate. Read “Set Up Wiring” before beginning the procedure.

Make sure you have LOCKOUT set to NONE. See Section 3 –

Configuration.

CAUTION For linear inputs, avoid step changes in inputs. Vary smoothly

from initial value to final 100 % value.

Procedure The Calibration procedure for Input #1, #2, or #3 is listed in Table 7-5.

Table 7-5 Input #1, #2, or #3 Calibration Procedure

Step Description Press Action

1Enter Calibration Mode

SET UP

until you see

INPUT n

Lower Display

CALIB

Upper Display

n = 1, 2, or 3

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

You will see:

CAL IN n

Lower Display

DISABL

Upper Display

n = 1, 2, or 3

or The calibration sequence is enabled and you will see:

CAL IN n

Lower Display

BEGIN

Upper Display

n = 1, 2, or 3

At the completion of the sequence, the selection

automatically reverts to disable.

2Calibrate 0 % FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

You will see:

INn ZERO

Lower Display

APPLY

Upper Display

n = 1, 2, or 3

Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to

the 0 % range value for your particular input sensor. See

Table 7-1 for Voltage or Resistance equivalents.

Wait 15 seconds, then go to the next step.

230 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Step Description Press Action

3Calibrate 100 % FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

You will see:

INn SPAN

Lower Display

APPLY

Upper Display

n = 1, 2, or 3

Adjust your calibration device to an output signal equal to

the 100 % range value for your particular input sensor.

See Table 7-1 for Voltage or Resistance equivalents.

Wait 15 seconds, and

If…Then…

you are calibrating a Go to step 4

thermocouple input

(Input 1 or 2)

you are calibrating other Go to step 5

than a thermocouple input

4Check the Cold Junction

Temperature

CAUTION The

accuracy of the controller

is directly affected by the

accuracy of this value.

Change this value only if

the zero and span

calibration procedures did

not bring the controller

within the specified

accuracy requirements.

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

The calculations for zero and span are now stored and

you will see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

C-J TEMP

The cold junction

temperature at the

rear terminals

The value in the upper display is in the tenths of a degree.

It is the current reading of the temperature as measured at

the thermocouple terminals and recognized by the

controller. You can change this value, if it is in error, using

the or key.

ATTENTION When calibrating T/C inputs using a

precision 500-ohm resistor, calibrate the cold junction as

77°F (25°C).

5Exit the Calibration Mode FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

The controller will store the calibration constants and exit

calibration mode.

4/00 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 231

7.6 Restoring Factory Calibration

How to restore it The factory calibration constants for all the input actuation types that can

be used with the controller are stored in its nonvolatile memory. Thus,

you can quickly restore the “Factory Calibration” for a given input

actuation type by simply changing the actuation type to another type and

then changing it back to the original type. See Table 7-6 for the procedure.

Procedure Table 7-6 lists the procedure for restoring factory calibration.

Table 7-6 Restoring Factory Calibration

Step Operation Press Action/Result

1Set LOCKOUT

to CALIB or

NONE

SET

until you see:

Upper Display

Lower Display

SET UP

TUNING

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

until you see:

Upper Display

Lower Display

LOCKOUT

One of the following

NONE

CALIB

+CONF

+VIEW

MAX

or Until CALIB or NONE is in the upper display.

2Enter

INPUT 1 or 2

Setup Group

SET

until you see:

Upper Display

Lower Display

SET UP

INPUTn

n = 1, 2, or 3

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

until you see:

Upper Display

Lower Display

IN nTYPE

Current Selection

n = 1, 2, or 3

or to change the current selection to another

selection.

232 UDC 3300 Process Controller Product Manual 4/00

Step Operation Press Action/Result

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

until the lower display rolls through the rest

of the functions and returns to

Upper Display

Lower Display

IN nTYPE

New Selection

n = 1, 2, or 3

or until you change the input selection in the

upper display back to the proper selection.

You will see:

Upper Display

Lower Display

Original input

selection that

matches your

type of sensor.

IN nTYPE

n = 1, 2, or 3

3Return to

normal

operating mode

LOWER

DISPLAY

to return to Normal operating mode.

The factory calibration will be restored. If the

problem is not corrected, contact the

Honeywell Technical Assistance Center.

1-800-423-9883 USA and Canada

CAUTION A restored factory calibration overwrites any previous field calibration

done for the input and may change the High and Low Range Limits. Be

sure to protect any field calibration from accidental overwrites by

configuring the appropriate LOCKOUT selection after calibration. See the

Section 3 - Configuration for specific instructions to set the lockout.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 233

Section 8 – Output Calibration

8.1 Overview

Introduction This section describes the field calibration procedures for the following

types of outputs:

• Current Output

• Position Proportional and 3 Position Step Output

• Auxiliary Output

What’s in this section This section contains the following topics:

Topic See Page

8.1 Overview 233

8.2 Current Proportional Output Calibration

• Introduction

• Equipment Needed

• How to Connect the Calibrator

• Calibration Procedure

234

235

8.3 Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output

Calibration

• Position Proportional Control

• 3 Position Step Control

• Equipment Needed

• What connection to make

• Calibration Procedure

236

237

8.4 Auxiliary Output Calibration

• Introduction

• Equipment Needed

• How to Connect the Calibrator

• Calibration Procedure

240

241

WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD !

OUTPUT CALIBRATION MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO

HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS, AND SHOULD ONLY BE

PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

MORE THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-

ENERGIZE UNIT BEFORE CALIBRATION.

234 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

8.2 Current Proportional Output Calibration

Introduction Calibrate the controller so that the output provides the proper amount of

current over the desired range. The controller can provide an output

current range of from 0 to 21 milliamperes and can be calibrated at 4 mA

for 0 % of output and 20 mA for 100 % of output or any other values

between 0 mA and 21 mA.

Equipment needed You will need a standard shop type milliammeter, with whatever accuracy

is required, capable of measuring 0 to 20 milliamps.

Calibrator connections Referring to Figure 8-1, wire the controller according to the procedure

given in Table 8-1.

Table 8-1 Set Up Wiring Procedure Current Proportional Output

Step Action

1Apply power and allow the controller to warm up 15 minutes before you

calibrate.

2Tag and disconnect the field wiring, at the rear of the controller, from

terminals 2 (+) and 3 (–). See Figure 8-1.

3Connect a milliammeter across these terminals.

Figure 8-1 Wiring Connections for Calibrating Current Proportional Output

L2/N

–

Milliammeter

+–

22635

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 235

Procedure The procedure for calibrating the Current Proportional Output is listed in

Table 8-2. Make sure LOCKOUT in the Tuning Set Up group is set to

NONE. See Section 3 – Configuration.

Table 8-2 Current Proportional Output Calibration Procedure

Step Description Press Action

1Enter Calibration Mode SET UP until you see

CURRENT

Lower Display

CALIB

Upper Display

2Calibrate 0 % FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

You will see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

ZERO VAL

a value between 1 and 2048

or until the desired 0 % output is read on the milliammeter.

Use the values shown below depending on the action of

your valve.

0 mA For 0 to 20 mA Direct Action*

20 mA For 0 to 20 mA Reverse Action

4 mA For 4 to 20 mA Direct Action

20 mA For 4 to 20 mA Reverse Action

3Calibrate 100 % FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

This stores the 0 % value and you will see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

SPAN VAL

a value between 1 and 2048

or until the desired 100 % output is read on the milliammeter.

Use the values shown below depending on the action of

your valve.

20 mA For 0 to 20 mA Direct Action

0 mA For 0 to 20 mA Reverse Action*

20 mA For 4 to 20 mA Direct Action

4 mA For 4 to 20 mA Reverse Action

4Exit the Calibration Mode FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

The controller will store the span value.

LOWER

DISPLAY

SET UP

To exit the calibration mode.

*When attempting to achieve 0 mA, always adjust the output to about 0.5 mA, and slowly decrease until the

output just goes to zero. Further decrementing will not change the output current (since the circuit cannot

produce negative current) but will affect the accuracy of the output by creating a dead zone where no

current flows.

236 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

8.3 Position Proportional and Three Position Step Output Calibration

Position proportional

control When the UDC 3300 controller has a Position Proportional control output,

calibrate the controller so that the increase and decrease relays operate

properly with respect to the position of the external feedback slidewire.

Three position step

control Three Position Step Control Output Models with Motor Position

Indication

(Model Numbers DC330X-EE-XXX-X2, DC330X-AA-XXX-02)

This model must have its output calibrated per the entire procedure to

ensure the displayed output (slidewire position) agrees with the final

control element position.

Three Position Step Control Output Models without Motor Position

Indication

(Model Numbers 330X-EE-XXX-X0, DC330X-AA-XXX-X0)

This model only requires that the “Motor Time” be entered as shown in

the calibration procedure. FULL CALIBRATION IS NOT REQUIRED.

Equipment needed None

Connections Apply power and allow the controller to warm up 30 minutes before you

calibrate. Leave all field wiring connected to the rear terminals.

Auto mode vs manual

mode There are two ways in which to calibrate Position Proportional or 3

Position Step control:

AUTO mode or MANUAL mode.

Rules for auto mode vs

manual mode The Auto-mode selection must be done at least once before the manual

mode will operate properly. Failure to use the Auto-mode procedure will

prevent the controller from going into automatic control mode.

Displayed values During the Auto-mode calibration procedure, the values being displayed

are used only to indicate if the motor is still traveling. To view the actual

calibration value, use the manual mode after the Auto-mode is completed.

These values can be changed for purposes of tweaking the calibration.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 237

Procedure The procedure for calibrating the Position Proportional output and

3 Position Step control output is listed in Table 8-3. Make sure

LOCKOUT in Tuning Set Up group is set to NONE. See Section 3 –

Configuration.

For Three Position Step Control Output models without Motor Position

Indication, do steps 1 and 2 only.

For Position Proportional Output and Three Position Step Control Output

models with Motor Position Indication, follow the entire calibration

procedure.

ATTENTION These prompts only appear when position OUT ALG is

selected. If motor position for 3PSTEP is desired, first configure unit for

“position.” After calibration the unit can be switched to 3PSTEP.

Table 8-3 Position Proportional and 3 Position Step Output Calibration Procedure

Step Description Press Action

1Enter Calibration Mode SET UP until you see

POS PROP

Lower Display

CALIB

Upper Display

2Set Motor Traverse Time

NOTE: This is the time it

takes the motor to travel

from 0 % to 100 %.

FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

until you see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

MTR TIME

a value

or until the proper motor stroke time is reached (see the

motor specs or measure the time)

Range of setting = 5 to 1800 Seconds

3Select Automatic or

Manual Calibration FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

until you see:

POS PROP

Lower Display

DISABLE

Upper Display

You can calibrate the controller output manually or let the

controller calibrate the output automatically.

If the slidewire has never been calibrated, you must use

DO AUTO first. In the “Automatic Calibration Mode” (DO

AUTO), the controller relays automatically move the motor

in the proper direction.

If desired, however, the motor may be manually positioned

to 0 % and 100 % positions. Disconnect the relay wires.

Use DO MAN. In the “Manual Calibration Mode” (DO

MAN), the motor does not move. Instead, the existing 0 %

and 100 % values may be changed with the ▲ or ▼ key.

238 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Step Description Press Action

or to select automatic or manual calibration.

Lower Display

Upper Display

POS PROP

DO AUTO

DO MAN

If you select…Then…

DO AUTO go to Step 4

DO MAN go to Step 6

ATTENTION When calibration is terminated, this

selection reverts to DISABL.

4 DO AUTO

Set 0 % value FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

The decrement relay is turned on to move the motor to

0 % position.

Lower Display

Upper Display

ZERO VAL

counts of feedback

slidewire (0 to 3000)

When the motor stops, the display should stop counting,

then go to the next step.

5 DO AUTO

Set 100 % value FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

The increment relay is turned on to move the motor to

100 % position.

Lower Display

Upper Display

SPAN VAL

counts of feedback

slidewire (0 to 3000)

When the motor stops, the display should stop counting,

then, go to Step 8.

6DO MAN

Set 0 % value FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

You will see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

ZERO VAL

The existing zero

calibration value

in counts.

or until the desired zero value is reached in the upper

display.

Lower Display

Upper Display

ZERO VAL

The desired zero

value

7DO MAN

Set 100 % value FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

The controller will store the 0 % value and you will see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

SPAN VAL

The existing span

calibration value

in counts

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 239

Step Description Press Action

or until the desired span value is reached in the upper

display.

Lower Display

Upper Display

SPAN VAL

The desired span

value

For manual calibration, the motor does not move from its

position prior to the start of Position Proportional

calibration.

8Exit the Calibration Mode FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

The controller will store the 100 % value.

LOWER

DISPLAY

SET UP

To exit the calibration mode.

240 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

8.4 Auxiliary Output Calibration

Introduction Calibrate the controller so that the Auxiliary output provides the proper

amount of current over the desired range. The controller can provide an

auxiliary output current range of from 0 to 21 milliamperes and can be

calibrated at 4 mA for 0 % of output and 20 mA for 100 % of output or

any other values between 0 mA and 21 mA.

Equipment needed You will need a standard shop type milliammeter with whatever accuracy

is required, capable of measuring 0 to 20 milliamps.

Calibrator connections Referring to Figure 8-2, wire the controller according to the procedure

given in Table 8-4.

Table 8-4 Set Up Wiring Procedure for Auxiliary Output

Step Action

1Apply power and allow the controller to warm up 30 minutes before you

calibrate.

2Tag and disconnect the field wiring, at the rear of the controller, from

terminals 16 (+) and 17 (–). See Figure 8-2.

3Connect a milliammeter across these terminals.

Figure 8-2 Wiring Connections for Calibrating Auxiliary Output

L2/N

–

Milliammeter

+–

22636

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 241

Procedure The procedure for calibrating the Auxiliary Output is listed in Table 8-5.

Make sure LOCKOUT in the Tuning Set Up group is set to NONE. See

Section 3 – Configuration.

Table 8-5 Auxiliary Output Calibration Procedure

Step Description Press Action

1Enter Calibration Mode SET UP until you see

AUX OUT

Lower Display

CALIB

Upper Display

2Calibrate 0 % FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

You will see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

ZERO VAL

a value between 0 and 4095

or until the desired 0 % output is read on the milliammeter.

Use the values shown below depending on the action of

your valve.

0 mA For 0 to 20 mA Direct Action *

20 mA For 0 to 20 mA Reverse Action

4 mA For 4 to 20 mA Direct Action

20 mA For 4 to 20 mA Reverse Action

3Calibrate 100 % FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

This stores the 0 % value and you will see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

SPAN VAL

a value

or until the desired 100 % output is read on the milliammeter.

Use the values shown below depending on the action of

your valve.

20 mA For 0 to 20 mA Direct Action

0 mA For 0 to 20 mA Reverse Action*

20 mA For 4 to 20 mA Direct Action

4 mA For 4 to 20 mA Reverse Action

4Exit the Calibration Mode FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

The controller will store the span value.

LOWER

DISPLAY

SET UP

To exit the calibration mode.

*When attempting to achieve 0 mA, always adjust the output to about 0.5 mA, and slowly decrease until the output just

goes to zero. Further decrementing will not change the output current (since the circuit cannot produce negative

current) but will affect the accuracy of the output by creating a dead zone where no current flows.

242 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 243

Section 9 – Troubleshooting / Service

9.1 Overview

Introduction Instrument performance can be adversely affected by installation and

application problems as well as hardware problems. We recommend that

you investigate the problems in the following order:

• installation related problems

• application related problems

• hardware and software related problems

and use the information presented in this section to solve them. If a

replacement of any part is required, follow the procedures listed under

“Parts Replacement Procedures.”

What’s in this section? The following topics are covered in this section.

Topic See Page

9.1 Overview 243

9.2 Troubleshooting Aids

• Overall Error Messages

• Controller Failure Symptoms

• Customer Support

• Determining the Software Version Number

245

246

9.3 Power-up Tests 247

9.4 Status Tests 248

9.5 Background Tests 250

9.6 Controller Failure Symptoms 252

9.7 Troubleshooting Procedures

• Power Failure

• Current Proportional Output Failure

• Position Proportional Output Failure

• Time Proportional Output Failure

• Time/Current - Current/Time Proportional Output Failure

• Alarm Relay Output Failure

• Keyboard Failure

• Communications Failure

253

254

255

256

257

258

259

260

9.8 Parts Replacement Procedures

• How to remove the chassis

• How to replace the display/keyboard assembly

• How to remove printed wiring boards from the chassis

• Printed wiring board identification

• 2nd input board replacement procedure

• Power input board replacement procedure

• Digital input board replacement procedure

• Aux. output/commun. board replacement procedure

• MCU/output board replacement procedure

261

262

263

264

265

266

267

268

269

9.9 Maintenance 270

244 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Installation related

problems Read the Installation section in this manual to make sure the UDC 3300

has been properly installed. The installation section provides information

on protection against electrical noise, connecting external equipment to

the controller, and shielding and routing external wiring.

ATTENTION System noise induced into the controller will result in

diagnostic error messages recurring. If the diagnostic error messages can

be cleared, it indicates a “soft” failure and is probably noise related.

If system noise is suspected, completely isolate the controller from all

field wiring. Use calibration sources to simulate PV and check all

controller functions; i.e. Gain, Rate, Reset, Output, Alarms, etc.

Application related

problems Review the application of the controller; then, if necessary, direct your

questions to the local sales office.

Hardware and software

related problems Use the troubleshooting error message prompts and controller failure

symptoms to identify typical failures which may occur in the controller.

Follow the troubleshooting procedures to correct them.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 245

9.2 Troubleshooting Aids

Overall error messages An error message can occur

•at power-up,

•during continuous background tests while in normal operation,

•when the Status Tests are requested.

Table 9-1 lists all the error message prompts that you could see, the reason

for the failure, and under what test group the prompt could appear. Refer

to Tables 9-3 (Power-up), 9-5 (Status), and 9-6 (Background) for the

particular test group indicated.

Table 9-1 Error Message Prompts

Error Message

(lower display) Reason for Failure Test Group Refer to Table

CAL MTR Auto calibration never performed. Power-up and

Background 9-3

9-6

CAL TEST Calibration test failure Power-up or Status 9-3

9-5

CONF ERR Low limit greater than high limit for PV, SP,

Reset, or Output Background 9-6

CONFTEST Configuration test failure Power-up or Status 9-3

9-5

E E FAIL Unable to write to nonvolatile memory Background 9-6

FACT CRC Factory Calibration Cyclic Redundancy Status 9-5

FAILSAFE

FAILSF2 (Loop 2)

Controller in Failsafe Power-up, Background,

or Status 9-3

9-5

9-6

INP1FAIL Two consecutive failures of Input 1 integration Background 9-6

INP2FAIL Two consecutive failures of Input 2 integration Background 9-6

INP3FAIL Two consecutive failures of Input 3 integration Background 9-6

INP1 RNG Input 1 out of range Background 9-6

INP2 RNG Input 2 out of range Background 9-6

INP3 RNG Input 3 out of range Background 9-6

PV LIMIT PV out of range Background 9-6

RAM TEST RAM test failed Power-up or Status 9-3

9-5

RV LIMIT Remote Variable out of range Background 9-6

SEG ERR Start segment greater than ending segment Background 9-6

SOOTING Percent Carbon falls outside sooting boundary Background 9-6

SW FAIL Position Proportional slidewire input failure Background 9-6

246 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Controller failure

symptoms Other failures may occur that deal with the Power, Output, or Alarms.

Refer to the controller failure symptom in Table 9-7 to determine what is

wrong and the troubleshooting procedures to use to correct the problem.

Check Installation If a set of symptoms still persists, refer to Section 2 - Installation and

ensure proper installation and proper use of the controller in the system.

Customer support If you cannot solve the problem using the troubleshooting procedures

listed in this section, you can get technical assistance by contacting us.

Refer to the contact information in the front of this manual. An engineer

will discuss your problem with you. Please have your complete model

number, serial number, and Software version available. The model

and serial numbers can be found on the chassis nameplate. The software

version can be viewed under Setup Group “Status.” See Table 9-2.

Determining the

software version Table 9-2 lists the procedure for identifying the software version number.

Table 9-2 Procedure for Identifying the Software Version

Step Operation Press Action

1Select

STATUS

Set Up Group

SET UP until you see:

STATUS

Lower Display

READ

Upper Display

2Read the

software version FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

until you see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

VERSION

Software

version

Number

Please give this number to the Customer

Support person. It will indicate which version

of UDC 3300 you have and help them

determine a solution to your problem.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 247

9.3 Power-up Tests

What happens at

power-up When the controller is powered-up, three tests are run by the UDC 3300

software to ensure memory integrity. As the tests are run, the displays will

appear as shown in Table 9-3.

Table 9-3 Power-up Tests

Lower Display Upper Display

RAM TEST PASS or FAIL

CONFTEST PASS or FAIL

CAL TEST PASS or FAIL

Test failures If any of these three tests fail, FAIL will appear momentarily in the upper

display, then a display test is run, after which the controller will go into

manual mode and you will see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

FAILSAFE

PV value

(blinking)

Refer to “Status Tests” to determine which tests have failed and how to

correct them.

Position proportional

or 3 position step test

failures

For controller configured for Position Proportional or 3 Position Step

control with motor position indication and Auto-cal has never been done,

a prompt CAL MTR will appear suggesting that the controller be

calibrated.

248 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

9.4 Status Tests

Introduction When required, the results of these tests can be checked to determine the

reason the controller has gone to Failsafe.

How to check the

status tests The procedure in Table 9-4 tells you how to display the results of the

status tests. Table 9-5 lists the tests, the reason for the failure, and how to

correct the problem.

Table 9-4 Procedure for Displaying the Status Tests Results

Step Operation Press Action

1Select

STATUS

Set Up Group

SET UP until you see:

STATUS

Lower Display

READ

Upper Display

2Read the status

tests results FUNCTION

LOOP 1/2

until you see:

Lower Display

Upper Display

FAILSAFE

NO or YES YES indicates

a failure

Successive presses of the [FUNCTION] key

will display the results of the status tests in

the following order:

RAM TEST

CONF TEST

CAL TEST

FACT CRC

Identify the problem and correct the failure

as shown in Table 9-5.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 249

Status Tests Table 9-5 lists the Status tests, the reason for their failure, and how to

correct the failure.

Table 9-5 Status Tests

Test

(Lower

Display)

Definition Upper

Display Reason for Failure How to Correct the Failure

FAILSAFE Failsafe Fault NO No Failure

FAILSF2

(Loop 2) YES Burnout configured for none

and input fails.

–RAM TEST failed

–CONFTEST failed

–CALTEST failed

1. Step through the rest of the STATUS

check to identify the particular failure.

Also see Table 9-6, Background tests

RAM TEST PASS No Failure RAM test passed.

RAM test run at

power-up FAIL RAM Failure 1. Power cycle to see if the error clears.

PASS No Failure Configuration checksum passed.

CONF

TEST Configuration

Checksum FAIL Configuration data is in

error. 1. Step through STATUS tests – the

controller will recalculate the

checksum.

2. Check all configuration prompts for

accuracy. See Section 3 -

Configuration

CAL TEST Working

Calibration PASS No Failure Working calibration checksum passed.

FAIL The working calibration

constants in the controller

are in error.

1. If the controller has not been field

calibrated, see Section 3 -

Configuration and change the input to

a different type. Enter it, loop through

the status tests, then return the input

type to the original one.

2. If the controller has been field

calibrated, recalibrate the controller.

FACT CRC Factory

calibration test PASS No Failure Factory calibration cyclic redundancy test

passed

FAIL Factory set input constants

have been changed due to

the change in input type.

1. Cycle through Status to clear the error.

2. Check the calibration. Make sure 0 %

and 100 % are correct values.

3. Recalibrate if step 1 is unsatisfactory.

Refer to Section 7 - Input Calibration.

250 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

9.5 Background Tests

Introduction The UDC 3300 performs on-going background tests to verify data and

memory integrity. If there is a malfunction, an error message will be

displayed (blinking) in the lower display.

Background tests In the case of more than one simultaneous malfunction, only the one with

the highest priority will appear in the lower display. Table 9-6 lists these

background tests, the reason for their failure, and how to correct the

problem.

Table 9-6 Background Tests

Lower

Display Reason for Failure How to Correct the Problem

EE FAIL Unable to write to non-volatile memory.

Anytime you change a parameter and it is

not accepted, you will see EE FAIL.

1. Check the accuracy of the parameter and re-enter.

2. Try to change something in configuration.

3. Run through STATUS tests to re-write to

EEPROM.

FAILSAFE

FAILSF2

(Loop 2)

This error message shows whenever the

controller goes into a failsafe mode of

operation. This will happen if:

•RAM test failed

•Configuration test failed

•Calibration test failed

•Burnout configured for none and

the input failed.

1. Run through STATUS check to determine the

reason for the failure.

2. Press the SET UP key until STATUS appears in

the lower display.

3. Press the FUNCTION key to see what tests

pass or fail, then run through the STATUS codes a

second time to see if the error cleared.

Correct according to the recommendations given

in Table 9-5.

INP1FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 1

integration. i.e., cannot make analog to

digital conversion. This will happen if:

•Upscale or Downscale burnout is

selected

•Input not configured correctly

1. Make sure the actuation is configured correctly.

See Section 3 - Configuration.

2. Make sure the input is correct.

3. Check for gross over-ranging.

4. Replace factory calibration. See Section 7.6.

5. Replace the cold junction assembly.

INP2FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 2

integration. i.e., cannot make analog to

digital conversion.

Same as INP1FAIL above.

INP3FAIL Two consecutive failures of input 3

integration, i.e., cannot make analog to

digital conversion.

Same as INP1FAIL above.

SW FAIL Position Proportional input slidewire failure 1. Check motor slidewire connections.

2. Recalibrate the slidewire motor position. see the

calibration section (Section 8.3).

CAL MTR Position Proportional or 3 Position Step

Control with Motor Position Indication,

Auto Cal never performed.

1. Calibrate the controller for Position Proportional

output. Refer to Subsection 8.3 – Position

Proportional and 3 Position Step Output

Calibration.

CONF ERR • PV low limit is > PV high limit

• SP low limit is > SP high limit

• Output low limit > Output high limit

1. Check the configuration for each item and

reconfigure if necessary.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 251

Lower

Display Reason for Failure How to Correct the Problem

INP1 RNG Input 1 out of range. The process input is

outside the range limits. 1. Make sure the range and actuation are configured

properly.

2. Check the input source.

3. Restore the factory calibration. (See Section 7.6.)

4. Field calibrate. See Section 7 - Input Calibration.

INP2 RNG Input 2 out of range. The remote input is

outside the range limits. Same as INP1 RNG above.

INP3 RNG Input 3 out of range. The remote input is

outside the range limits. Same as INP1 RNG above.

PV LIMIT PV out of range.

PV = INP1 + INP1 BIAS 1. Make sure the input signal is correct.

2. Make sure the Bias setting is correct

3. Recheck the calibration. Use Bias of 0.0

RV LIMIT The result of the formula shown below is

beyond the range of the remote variable.

RV = INP2 X RATIO + BIAS

1. Make sure the input signal is correct.

2. Make sure the Ratio and Bias settings are correct.

3. Recheck the calibration. Use a Ratio of 1.0 and a

Bias of 0.0.

252 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

9.6 Controller Failure Symptoms

Introduction In addition to the error message prompts, there are failure symptoms that

can be identified by noting how the controller displays and indicators are

reacting.

Symptoms Compare your symptoms with those shown in Table 9-7 and refer to the

troubleshooting procedure indicated to correct the problem.

Table 9-7 Controller Failure Symptoms

Upper

Display Lower

Display Indicators Controller

Output Probable

Cause Trouble-

shooting

Procedure

Blank Blank Off None Power Failure 1

OK OK Current

Proportional

Output

OK OK Position

Proportional

Output

OK OK Time Proportional

Output 4

Displayed

Output

disagrees

with Controller

Output

Controller

Output

disagrees

with Displayed

Output

Current/Time

Proportional

Output

OK OK OK External Alarm

function does

not operate

properly

Malfunction in

alarm output 6

Display does not function when a key is pressed Keyboard

Malfunction 7

Controller fails to go into “Slave” operation during communications Communications

Failure 8

Other symptoms If a set of symptoms or prompts other than the one you started with

appears while troubleshooting, re-evaluate the symptoms. This may lead

to a different troubleshooting procedure.

If the symptom still persists, refer to the installation section in this manual

to ensure proper installation and proper use of the controller in your

system.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 253

9.7 Troubleshooting Procedures

Introduction The troubleshooting procedures are listed in numerical order as they

appear in Table 9-7. Each procedure lists what to do if you have that

particular failure and how to do it or where to find the data needed to

accomplish the task.

WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD !

TROUBLESHOOTING MAY REQUIRE ACCESS TO

HAZARDOUS LIVE CIRCUITS, AND SHOULD ONLY BE

PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. MORE

THAN ONE SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE

UNIT BEFORE SERVICING.

Equipment needed You will need the following equipment in order to troubleshoot the

symptoms listed in the tables that follow:

• DC Milliammeter – mAdc

• Calibration sources – T/C, mV, Volt, etc.

• Voltmeter

Procedure #1 Table 9-8 explains how to troubleshoot power failure symptoms.

Table 9-8 Troubleshooting Power Failure Symptoms

Step What to do How to do it

1Check the AC line voltage. Use a voltmeter to measure the AC

voltage across terminals L1 and L2 on

the rear terminal panel of the

controller.

Check the earth ground connection.

2Make sure the chassis plugs into

the rear of the case properly. Withdraw the chassis and visually

inspect the controller board and the

inside of the case.

3Check the system for Brown-outs,

heavy load switching, etc., and

conformance to installation

instructions.

Refer to Section 2 - Installation.

4Change PS/Input board. Refer to Table 9-20.

5Change MCU/Output board. Refer to Table 9-23.

254 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Procedure #2 Table 9-9 explains how to troubleshoot Current Proportional Output

failure symptoms.

Table 9-9 Troubleshooting Current Proportional Output Failure

Step What to do How to do it

1Make sure the controller is

configured for Current output. Make Algorithm Set Up group function

prompt OUT ALG or OUT2 ALG =

CURRNT.

Refer to Section 3 - Configuration.

2Check the field wiring. Output impedance must be less than

or equal to 1000 ohms.

3Make sure all the configurable

tuning constants, limits, and

configuration data stored in the

controller are correct. Reconfigure,

if necessary.

Refer to Section 3 - Configuration to

check all this data and how to

reconfigure.

4Check the output. Put the controller into Manual mode

and change the output from 0 % to

100 % (4-20 mA). Use a DC

milliammeter at the rear terminals to

verify the output.

5Recalibrate the Current Proportional

output. Refer to Section 8 - Output Calibration

for details.

6Change MCU/Output board. Refer to Table 9-23.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 255

Procedure #3 Table 9-10 explains how to troubleshoot Position Proportional Output

failure symptoms.

Table 9-10 Troubleshooting Position Proportional Output Failure

Step What to do How to do it

1Make sure the controller is

configured for Position Proportional

output.

Make Output Algorithm Set Up group

function prompt OUT ALG = POSITN.

Refer to Section 3 - Configuration.

2Check the field wiring. Refer to Section 2 - Installation for

Position Proportional Wiring

information.

3Check the output. Put the controller into Manual mode

and change the output from 0 % to

100 %.

4Check whether the motor drives in

both directions. If it does go to Step

See the Position Proportional

calibration procedure in Section 8 for

motor slidewire calibration.

5Check whether the motor drives in

either direction. If the motor drives

in one direction, check the

slidewire. If the motor does not

drive in either direction, check the

motor.

Refer to the motor instructions.

6Check the output voltage to the

slidewire. Should equal from 1.3 to 1.0 volts.

See wiring in the installation section

for terminal designations. The

feedback slidewire output voltage

must vary with the valve position.

7Make sure the output relays are

actuating properly. Put the controller into Manual mode.

Vary the output above and below the

present value. Observe “OUT”

indicator on the operator interface.

If they are not working properly, check

the field wiring, then go to Step 5.

If they are, go to Step 8.

8Recalibrate the controller. Refer to Section 8 - Output

Calibration.

9Change MCU/Output board. Refer to Table 9-23.

256 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Procedure #4 Table 9-11 explains how to troubleshoot Time Proportional Output

failure.

Table 9-11 Troubleshooting Time Proportional Output Failure

Step What to do How to do it

1Make sure the controller is

configured for Time Proportional

output.

Make Output Algorithm Set Up group

function prompt OUT ALG = TIME or

TIME D or function prompt OUT2 ALG

= TIME.

Refer to Section 3 - Configuration.

2Check the field wiring. Make sure the NO or NC contact

wiring is correct at the rear terminals.

Refer to Section 2 - Installation for

details.

3Make sure all the configurable

tuning constants, limits, and

configuration data stored in the

controller are correct. Reconfigure,

if necessary.

Refer to Section 3- Configuration to

check all this data and how to

reconfigure.

4Check the output. Put the controller into Manual mode.

Vary the output above and below the

present value. Observe OUT indicator

on the operator interface.

5Change MCU/Output board. Refer to Table 9-23.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 257

Procedure #5 Table 9-12 explains how to troubleshoot Current/Time or Time/Current

Proportional Output failure.

Table 9-12 Troubleshooting Time/Current or Current/Time Proportional

Output Failure

Step What to do How to do it

1Make sure the controller is

configured for Time/Current or

Current/Time Proportional output.

Make Output Algorithm Set Up group

function prompt OUT ALG or OUT2

ALG = TI CUR or CUR TI.

Refer to Section 3 - Configuration.

2Check the field wiring. Make sure the NO or NC contact

wiring is correct at the rear terminals.

Refer to Section 2 - Installation for

details.

3Make sure all the configurable

tuning constants, limits, and

configuration data stored in the

controller are correct. Reconfigure,

if necessary.

Refer to Section 3 - Configuration to

check all this data and how to

reconfigure.

4Check the relay output. Put the controller into Manual mode.

Vary the output above and below the

present value. Observe OUT indicator

on the operator interface.

5Check the Current Proportional

Output. Put the controller into Manual mode

and change the output from 0 % to

100 % (4-20 mA). Use a DC

milliammeter at the rear terminals to

verify the output.

6Recalibrate the controller. Refer to Section 8 - Output Calibration

for details.

7Change MCU/Output board. Refer to Table 9-23.

258 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Procedure #6 Table 9-13 explains how to troubleshoot Alarm Relay Output failure.

Table 9-13 Troubleshooting Alarm Relay Output Failure

Step What to do How to do it

1Check the alarm configuration data.

If it is correct, check the field wiring. Reconfigure if necessary.

Refer to Section 3 - Configuration for

details.

2Check that the applicable alarm

relay actuates properly depending

on what you have set at prompt

AxSxTYPE.

If it does, check the field wiring.

If the alarm type is set for PV, place

the controller in manual mode. Vary

the input to raise and lower the PV

around the setpoint. Listen for a click

from the relay as the PV moves in

either direction and note that the

proper ALM1 or ALM2 is lit.

EXAMPLE: If the alarm is set for

MANUAL, put the controller into

manual mode. The alarm light is ON.

Put the controller into automatic mode

and the alarm light is OFF.

3Check the field wiring. Make sure the NO or NC contact

wiring is correct on the alarm output

terminals.

Refer to Section 2 - Installation for

details.

4Change MCU/Output board. Refer to Table 9-23.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 259

Procedure #7 Table 9-14 explains how to troubleshoot a Keyboard failure.

Table 9-14 Troubleshooting a Keyboard Failure

Step What to do How to do it

1Make sure the keyboard is

connected properly to the

MCU/output and power/input

boards.

Withdraw the chassis from the case

and visually inspect the connection.

2Controller Keyboard or specific keys

may be LOCKED OUT via the

security code.

Use your four-digit security code

number to change the lockout level.

Refer to Section 3 – Configuration.

ATTENTION Using “1000” as a

security code number will override the

4-digit code previously entered.

3Run the keyboard test. Press the [SET UP] key and hold in,

then press the [FUNCTION] key at the

same time. The controller will run a

display test. Then you will see:

TRY ALL

Lower Display

KEYS

Upper Display

Press each key. If it works, the key

name will appear in the lower display.

4Replace the display/keyboard if any

keys are shorted out. Refer to “Parts Replacement

Procedures” in this section.

260 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Procedure #8 Table 9-15 explains how to troubleshoot a Communications failure.

Table 9-15 Troubleshooting a Communications Failure

Step What to do How to do it

1Check the field wiring and

termination resistor. Depending on the protocol used, refer

to the proper communications manual

installation section.

2Make sure the Communications

Printed Wiring Board is installed

properly in the controller.

Withdraw the chassis from the case

and inspect the board. See the

exploded view (Figure 10-1) for

location of the board. Return the

chassis to the case.

3Determine if the Communications

board is faulty by running a LOCAL

LOOPBACK TEST.

If the test fails, replace the board.

Run the Local Loopback Test.

Press [SET UP] until you see:

COM

Lower Display

SET UP

Upper Display

Press [FUNCTION] until you see:

LOOPBACK

Lower Display

DISABL

Upper Display

Press ▲ or ▼, you will see:

LOOPBACK

Lower Display

ENABLE

Upper Display

The test will run until the operator

disables it here.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 261

9.8 Parts Replacement Procedures

Introduction These procedures tell you how to access and replace the following printed

wiring boards in your controller.

•Display/Keyboard

•MCU/Output

•Power/Input

•2nd Input

•Digital Input

•Auxiliary Output

•DMCS Communications

•RS422/485 Communications

•Modbus Communications

Equipment needed To accomplish the procedures that follow, you will need the following

equipment:

•Phillips Head Screwdriver

•Flat Bladed Screwdriver

•Small Pliers

262 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

How to remove the

chassis Refer to Figure 9-1 for steps and follow the procedure listed in Table

9-16.

Table 9-16 How to Remove the Chassis

Step Action

1Loosen the screw on the front face.

2Insert a flat-bladed screwdriver into the hole on the top of the case as shown

in Figure 9-1 and pry chassis forward slightly until the chassis connectors

separate from the back of the case.

3Grasp the bezel and pull the chassis out of the case.

Figure 9-1 Chassis Removal

Loosen screw

Insert screwdriver

and pry forward

Grasp bezel

and pull

chassis out

22637

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 263

How to replace the

display/keyboard

assembly

Refer to Figure 9-2 and follow the procedure listed in Table 9-17.

Table 9-17 Display/Keyboard Assembly Replacement Procedure

Step Action

1Remove the chassis from the case as shown in Figure 9-1.

2Peel the rubber bezel and display window off the chassis assembly.

3Separate the chassis frame at the four release points shown in Figure 9-2

and wiggle each printed wiring board out of its socket on the

display/keyboard assembly. Pull out slightly.

4Insert a small flat-bladed screwdriver into each of the display/keyboard

release points (Figure 9-2) and pry out the board.

5Install the new board, bottom end in first, and push in the top until it clicks

into place.

6Reinstall the printed wiring boards into the rear of the display board

making sure that the boards click into their release points.

7Replace the bezel and window assembly.

8Reinstall chassis into case. Press in hard, then tighten the screw.

Figure 9-2 Display/Keyboard Replacement

Display keyboard

release points Pull printed

wiring boards

out slightly

Printed wiring

boards

release points

Display/keyboard

Chassis assembly

Rubber bezel

and window 22638

264 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

How to remove the

printed wiring boards

from the chassis

To remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis, refer to Figure 9-3

and follow the procedure in Table 9-18.

Table 9-18 Printed Wiring Board Removal from Chassis

Step Action

1Remove the chassis from the case as shown in Figure 9-1.

2Separate the chassis frame at the release points shown in Figure 9-3 and

wiggle each printed wiring board out of its socket on the display/keyboard

assembly. Pull both boards out of the chassis assembly.

Figure 9-3 Removing the Printed Wiring Boards

Pull printed

wiring boards out

of chassis

Printed wiring

boards

release points

Chassis assembly

Rubber bezel

and window

22639

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 265

Printed wiring board

identification Figure 9-4 identifies each of the printed wiring boards that can be

replaced. Refer to this drawing when following the replacement

procedures for each of the boards, since you have to remove all of them

from the chassis to replace the one you want.

In order to lay boards flat, remove the transformer lead from the Auxiliary

Output/Communications board and the Digital Input board.

Refer to the specific procedure table to remove the desired board.

•2nd Input Board—Table 9-19

•Power Input Board—Table 9-20

•Digital Input Board—Table 9-21

•Auxiliary Output/Communications Board—Table 9-22

•MCU/Output Board—Table 9-23

Figure 9-4 Printed Wiring Board Identification

2nd input

board Power/input

board

WG connectors

on Digital Input and

MCU/Output boards

Digital

input

board

MCU/

output

board

Aux.out/

communications

board

Note: the transformer connectors are

polarized and will only go on one way

12-Pin Transformer connections are interchangeable. Either may be used on Digital Input Board or the second Input Board.

PROM

24279

W1/W2

jumper

266 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

2nd input board Follow the procedure listed in Table 9-19 to replace the Second Input

board—P/N 30756715-501.

Table 9-19 Second Input Board Replacement Procedure

Step Action

1Remove the chassis from the case. See Figure 9-1.

2Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis. See Figure 9-3.

3Lay the boards flat and identify the 2nd Input board. See Figure 9-4.

4Remove the transformer plug from connector J14.

5The 2nd Input board is attached to the Power Input board by three

mounting posts. Locate these posts under the power input board.

6Use a small pliers and squeeze the ends of each post together and push it

up through the board. Remove 2nd Input board.

7Orient the new 2nd Input board onto the Power Input board and push the

mounting posts down through the Power Input board until they click into

place.

8Replace the transformer plug onto connector J14. Make sure the Input 2

jumper (W1/W2) is in the correct position. (Refer to Table 2-4.)

9Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis. Make sure the

connections to the display/keyboard assembly are made and that the

release points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards.

10 Reinstall the chassis into the case. Push in hard, then tighten screw.

Power input board Follow the procedure listed in Table 9-20 to replace the Power Input

board—P/N 51309404-502 (90 to 264 Vac) or 51309404-501 (24 Vac/dc).

Table 9-20 Power Input Board Replacement Procedure

Step Action

1Remove the chassis from the case. See Figure 9-1.

2Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis. See Figure 9-3.

3Lay the boards flat and identify the Power Input board. See Figure 9-4.

4Remove the 2nd Input board, if present. See procedure in

Table 9-19.

5Remove the transformer connections to the Digital Input board and

Auxiliary Output/Communications board, if present.

6Remove the connector from plug WG if present (current output models

only). Slide a small screwdriver under the connector and lift the release.

7Replace the Power Input board.

8Reinstall WG connector and transformer connections to Digital Input board

and Auxiliary Output/Communications board, if present.

9Reinstall the 2nd Input board. See procedure in Table 9-19.

10 Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis. Make sure the

connections to the display/keyboard assembly are made and that the

release points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards.

11 Reinstall the chassis into the case. Push in hard, then tighten screw.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 267

Digital input board Follow the procedure listed in Table 9-21 to replace the Digital Input

board—P/N 30756696-501.

Table 9-21 Digital Input Board Replacement Procedure

Step Action

1Remove the chassis from the case. See Figure 9-1.

2Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis. See Figure 9-3.

3Lay the boards flat and identify the Digital Input board. See Figure 9-4.

4Remove the transformer plug from connector J9.

5The Digital Input board is attached to the MCU/output board by three

mounting posts. Locate these posts under the MCU/output board.

6Use small pliers and squeeze the ends of each post together and push it

up through the board. Remove the Digital Input board.

7Orient the new Digital Input board onto the MCU/Output board and push

the mounting posts down through the MCU/Output board until they click

into place.

8Replace the transformer plug onto connector J9.

9Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis. Make sure the

connections to the display/keyboard assembly are made and that the

release points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards.

10 Reinstall the chassis into the case. Push in hard, then tighten the screw.

268 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Aux.Out/

communications board Follow the procedure listed in Table 9-22 to replace the following boards:

•Auxiliary Output Board—P/N 30756687-501

•Auxiliary Output/RS422/485 Board—P/N 30756687-502

•DMCS Communications Board—P/N 30756690-502

•RS422/485 Communications Board—P/N 30756693-502 (Basic)

or P/N 30756693-503 (Expanded)

Table 9-22 Aux.Out/Communications Board Replacement Procedure

Step Action

1Remove the chassis from the case. See Figure 9-1.

2Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis. See Figure 9-3.

3Lay the boards flat and identify the Auxiliary Output or the

Communications board. See Figure 9-4.

4Remove the transformer plug from connector J8.

5The Aux.Out/Communications board is attached to the MCU/Output board

by three mounting posts. Locate these posts under the MCU/Output

board.

6Use small pliers and squeeze the ends of each post together and push it

up through the board. Remove the Aux.Out/Communications board.

7If you are replacing a Communications Board, a new PROM is supplied

with the board. Locate the PROM (shown in Figure 9-4) and gently pry out

the old PROM. Orient the new PROM supplied and gently press into

place.

8Orient the new Aux.Out/Communications board onto the MCU/Output

board and push the mounting posts down through the MCU/Output board

until they click into place.

9Replace the transformer plug onto connector J8.

10 Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis. Make sure the

connections to the keyboard assembly are made and that the release

points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards.

11 Reinstall the chassis into the case. Push in hard, then tighten the screw.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 269

MCU/output board Follow the procedure listed in Table 9-23 to replace the following

MCU/output boards:

Basic

•Current Output—P/N 51309401-504

•Relay Output—P/N 51309401-505

Expanded

•Current Output—P/N 51309401-504

•Relay Output—P/N 51309401-505

Table 9-23 MCU/Output Board Replacement Procedure

Step Action

1Remove the chassis from the case. See Figure 9-1.

2Remove the printed wiring boards from the chassis. See Figure 9-3.

3Lay the boards flat and identify the MCU/Output board. See Figure 9-4.

4Each option board is held onto the MCU/Output board with three posts.

Locate these posts under the MCU/Output board.

5Use small pliers and squeeze the ends of each post together and push it

up through the board. Remove the option boards present.

6Remove the transformer connections to the Digital Input board and the

Auxiliary Output/Communications board, if present.

7Remove the Digital Input Board, if present. See Table 9-21.

8Remove the Auxiliary Output/Communications board, if present. See

Table 9-22.

9Remove the connector from plug WG. Slide a small screwdriver under the

connector and lift the release.

10 Replace the MCU/Output board.

11 Reinstall the Digital Input board, if present, onto the new MCU/Output

board.

12 Reinstall the Auxiliary Output/Communications board, if present, onto the

new MCU/Output board.

13 Reinstall the WG connector and the transformer connectors to the Digital

Input board and Auxiliary Output/Communications board, if present.

14 Slide the printed wiring boards back into the chassis. Make sure the

connections to the display/keyboard assembly are made and that the

release points on the chassis snap into place on the printed wiring boards.

15 Reinstall the chassis into the case. Push in hard, then tighten the screw.

270 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

9.9 Maintenance

Cleaning If you find it necessary to clean the elastomer bezel, use mild soapy water.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 271

Section 10 – Parts List

10.1 Exploded View

Introduction Figure 10-1 is an exploded view of the UDC 3300 Controller. Each part is

labeled with a key number. The part numbers are listed by key number in

Table 10-1. There is a list of parts not shown in Table 10-2.

Figure 10-1 UDC 3300 Exploded View

12 345

678 9

24186

272 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Parts identification Table 10-1 lists the part numbers for the key numbers shown in the

exploded view.

Table 10-1 Parts Identification

Key

Number Part Number Description Quantity

130756667-526 Bezel Assembly—Gray 1

230756672-501 Display/Keyboard Printed Wiring Assembly 1

330756687-501

30756687-502

30756690-502

39656693-502

30756693-503

Auxiliary Output Printed Wiring Board

Auxiliary Output/Half Duplex RS422/485 Communications Board

DMCS Communications Printed Wiring Board

RS422/485 Communications Printed Wiring Board—includes Basic Prom

RS422/485 Communications Printed Wiring Board (Full or Half Duplex)—

includes Expanded Prom

451309404-502

51309404-501 Power/Input Printed Wiring Board 90-264 Vac

Power/Input Printed Wiring Board 24 Vac/dc 1

530756715-501 2nd Input Printed Wiring Board 1

651309401-504

51309401-505 Current Output/MCU Printed Wiring Board

Relay Output/MCU Printed Wiring Board 1

730755306-501

30756725-501

30756679-501

Relay, Electromechanical

Relay, Solid State 1 Amp

Open Collector Output

per kit

830756696-501 Digital Input Printed Wiring Board 1

930756721-501 Case Assembly 1

51309713-501

51309714-501

51309715-501

51309716-501

51309717-501

FIELD UPGRADE SOFTWARE KITS:

Upgrade DC330B to SPP + Carbon

Upgrade DC330E to SPP + Math + HealthWatch

Upgrade DC330E to SPP + 2 Loops + HealthWatch

Upgrade DC330E to SPP + Math + 2 Loops + HealthWatch

Upgrade DC330D to SPP

Parts not shown Table 10-2 lists the part numbers of the parts not show in the exploded

view.

Table 10-2 Parts Not Shown

Part Number Description Quantity

30731996-506 4-20 mA Resistor Assembly, 250 ohms 1

30754465-501 0-10 Volt Input Resistor Assembly, 100K Pair 1

30732481-501

30732481-502 Varistor, 120 V

Varistor, 240 V 1

30755050-501 Mounting Kit 1

30756764-002 Rear Cover Kit 1

30755223-002

30755223-003 DIN Adapter Kit, Blue

DIN Adapter Kit, Gray 1

30757088-501 Cold Junction Resistor Kit 1

30756018-003 External Relay, Solid State 10 Amp 1

30756683-001 NEMA3 Gasket (Panel to case)

30757215-001 NEMA4 Front Face Kit 1

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 273

Section 11 – Appendix A – Manual Tuning

11.1 Overview

Introduction When you tune a controller, there are some things to consider:

• Process Characteristics - Gain, Time Constants, etc.

• Desired response - Minimal overshoot

Basically, controller tuning consists of determining the appropriate values

for the Gain (PB), Rate (Derivative), and Reset (Integral) time tuning

parameters (control constants) that will give the control you want.

Depending on the characteristics of the deviation of the process variable

from the setpoint, the tuning parameters interact to alter the controller’s

output and produce changes in the value of the process variable.

Since each parameter responds to a specific characteristic of the deviation,

you may not need a combination of all three. It depends on the process

characteristics and the desired control response.

Tuning technique You can estimate a starting point and the tuning parameters required to

give the desired controller response and with some experience become

proficient with this method.

An alternate approach is to rely on a tuning technique. In practice, tuning

techniques usually do not give exactly the type of response desired; thus,

some final adjustments to the tuning parameters must be made.

However, you should at least obtain a reasonable starting point from

which the desired response characteristics can be obtained.

Controller tuning

procedures There are three procedures for tuning the controller:

• Time, Position, or Current Proportional simplex control,

• Duplex Time or Current Proportional control,

• Two sets of tuning constants for single output operation.

The suggested procedures describe how to establish and store values of

Gain (PB), Rate, and Reset time constants for your process. You must

know the type of control and algorithm your controller has.

Tuning aids A graphic recorder (such as Honeywell model DPR, DR4500, or VP131)

connected to the process variable will make it easier to determine when

the oscillations are constant and also the time for one oscillation. If a

recorder is not available, you can use a stopwatch to time the oscillation of

the process variable displayed on the controller.

274 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

11.2 Time, Position, or Current Proportional Simplex Control

Procedure The procedure listed in Table 11-1 gives you the steps for manually tuning

a controller with Time, Position, or Current proportional simplex control.

Table 11-1 Manual Tuning Procedure for Simplex Control

Step Action

1In Manual Mode, adjust the output to bring the PV (Process Variable) near

the desired value.

2Set the Rate time to 0 minutes and set the Reset time to the maximum value

(50.00 minutes) or set repeats/min to the minimum value to minimize reset

action

If applicable, set the CYCLE TIME to 4 seconds and DEADBAND

to 0.5.

3Increase GAIN (decrease PB) significantly. Try a factor of 10.

4Adjust the local setpoint to equal PV and switch to Automatic control mode.

5Increase the setpoint by 5 or 10% and observe the process variable

response.

6If the PV oscillates, continue to Step 7. If it does not oscillate, return to the

original setpoint and increase GAIN (decrease PB) again by a factor of 2,

and repeat Step 5.

7Compare the oscillations with the figure below:

Pattern A Pattern B Pattern C

Amplitude

Time for one cycle

Process Variable

Time 20778

• If the oscillation matches pattern A, go to Step 8.

• If the oscillation matches pattern B, increase GAIN (decrease PB) by a

factor of 2 and repeat Steps 4 to 6.

• If the oscillation matches pattern C, decrease GAIN (increase PB) by a

factor of 0.8 and repeat Steps 4 to 6

The amplitude of the cycle is immaterial, but all of the elements of the loop

must be within the operating range (i.e., the valve must not go full open or

closed).

8Record the current value of GAIN (or PB) and measure and record the value

of time for one completed oscillation of PV.

9Select the proper set of formulas from Table 11-2. Use the values of Gain (or

PB) and time (in minutes) in the formulas to arrive at the controller’s tuning

parameters settings.

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 275

Step Action

10 Enter the values of GAIN (or PB), RATE, and RESET in minutes (or repeats

per minute) into the UDC 3300 controller and verify that the PV response is

adequate.

Make additional trimming adjustments, if necessary, to fine tune the

controller per the guidelines shown below:

TO REDUCE OVERSHOOT

Less Gain (more PB) perhaps a longer Rate time.

TO INCREASE OVERSHOOT OR INCREASE SPEED OR RESPONSE

More Gain (less PB), perhaps shorter Rate time.

Manual tuning formulas Table 11-2 lists the formulas used in the procedure listed in Table 11-1.

Table 11-2 Manual Tuning Formulas

Units

GAIN

and

RESET TIME in Minutes

Repeat

% PROPORTIONAL BAND

and

RESET ACTION in Repeats

Minutes

Proportional (P) only

Use PD+MR Algorithm

(i.e. No Reset)

GAIN = Measured Gain x 0.5

RESET TIME = 50.00

(minimum reset)

RATE = 0

%PB = Measured PB x 2

RESET ACTION = 0.02

(repeats/minute)

RATE = 0

Proportional + Reset

(PI) (No Rate) GAIN = Measured Gain x 0.5

RESET TIME = Measured Time

(M/R) 1.2

RATE = 0

%PB = Measured PB x 2.2

RESET ACTION =

1.2

(R/M) Measured Time

RATE = 0

Proportional + Reset + Rate

(PID) GAIN = Measured Gain x 0.6

RESET TIME = Measured Time

RATE = Measured Time

%PB = Measured PB x 1.7

RESET ACTION =

Measured Time

RATE = Measured Time

276 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

11.3 Time Proportional Duplex or Current Proportional Duplex Control

Introduction For HEAT/COOL applications.

Tune the controller with the output above 50% for Heat and below 50%

for Cool.

HEAT/COOL prompts The “TUNING” function prompts for HEAT/COOL are:

HEAT COOL

PB or GAIN GAIN2

RSETMIN or RSETRPM RSET2MIN or RSETRPM2

RATEMIN RATE2MIN

CYCSEC CYC2SEC

11.4 Two Sets of Tuning Parameters for Single Output Operation

Introduction You can use two sets of tuning constants for single output types and tune

each set separately.

TWO SETS prompts The “TUNING” function prompts for two sets are:

PID SET 1 PID SET 2

PB or GAIN GAIN2

RSETMIN or RSETRPM RSET2MIN or RSETRPM2

RATEMIN RATE2MIN

CYCSEC CYC2SEC

Index

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 277

% Oxygen control, 203

Aborting PV adaptive tuning, 200

Accutune, 181

Accutune, 194

Accutune error prompts, 201

Accutune Set Up group, 47

Accutune Set Up Group, 88

Adaptive tune, 89

Adaptive tune error status, 91

Advancing a running SP program, 217

Alarm blocking, 142

Alarm on totalizer value, 185

Alarm setpoints, 171

Algorithm Data Set Up Group, 92

Auto bias, 120, 126

Auto Manual Station mode

backup control feature, 190

Auto/Manual Station mode, 190

Automatic mode, 158

Automatic switchover value, 125

Auxiliary otuput calibration, 240

Auxiliary output, 129

Auxiliary Output board, 268

Auxiliary output connections, 29

Auxiliary Output/RS422/485 board, 268

Baud rate, 136

Bias, 114

Burnout protection, 114

Calibration mode, 229

Calibration steps, 221

Carbon control, 203

Carbon potential, 99, 202

Carbon potential selections, 97

CE Conformity, 1

Changing current segment time or setpoint in running SP

program, 217

Characterizer, 104, 105

Cleaning, 270

CO compensation, 203

Cold junction temperature, 230

Communication units, 137

Communications option connections, 30

Communications selection, 135

Communications Set Up Group, 135

Composite wiring diagram, 18

Configuration Prompt Definitions, 79

Control 2 algorithm, 94

Control algorithm, 92

Controller dropoff value, 122, 127

Controller failure symptoms, 246

Current duplex, 110

Current output 2, 129

Current output/ universal output connections, 26

Current proportional duplex, 276

Current simplex, 109

Current/time duplex, 110

Cycle time (cool), 81

Cycle time (heat), 81

Deadband, 122, 127

Demand Tuning, 47

Dewpoint, 98

Dewpoint control, 203

Diagnostic error messages, 154

Digital input combinations, 134

Digital Input option, 186

Digital input selections, 131

Digital inputs (remote mode switching), 181

Digital inputs 1 and 2 combination operation, 188

Digital inputs 1 and 2 combination selections, 188

Digital inputs connections, 29

Digital output status, 111

Dimensions, 13

Direct acting control, 121, 126

Disconnect the field wiring, 221

Display Parameters Set Up Group, 143

Displays and indicators, 3

DMCS Communications board, 268

Duplex, 136

Duplex Heat/Cool applications, 84

Eight segment characterizer, 105, 106

Eight segment characterizer, 104

Eight-segment characterization, 184

Electrical considerations, 15

Electrical noise, 15

Electromechanical Relay Output., 22

Emissivity, 115

End segment number, 206

Exploded view, 271

External program reset, 215

External setpoint program reset, 132

Failsafe mode, 122, 127

Failsafe output value, 122, 128

Feedforward multiplier, 97

Feedforward summer, 96

Filter, 114

Flow totalizer, 184

Function Prompts, 36

Fuzzy overshoot suppression, 193

Fuzzy Overshoot Suppression, 47

Index

278 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Gain, 80

Gain 2, 81

Gain scheduling, 119

Gain Value for Gain Scheduling, 83

grounding, 15

Guaranteed soak, 207

HealthWatch

counters, 144

timers, 144

High output limit, 127

High scaling factor, 98

High select, 97

Hysteresis (output relay), 122

I, J

Input 1 actuation type, 112

Input 1 high range value, 113

Input 1 low range value, 114

Input 1/Input 2 connections, 20

Input 2 actuation type, 116

Input 3 actuation type, 117

Input algorithm selections, 183

Integration rates, 184

Internal Cascade control:, 172

Internal cascade indication, 180

Key functions, 4

Line voltage wiring, 19

Local setpoint source, 119, 125, 160

Lockout, 82

Loop 1 Control Parameters Set Up Group, 118

Loop 1 Tuning Parameters Set Up Group, 80

Loop break, 140

Loopback, 138

Low scaling factor, 98

Low select, 97

Lower display key, 153

M, N

Maintenance

counters, 71, 144

timers, 71, 144

Maintenance Group, 71

Manual mode, 158

Manual reset, 81

Manual tuning formulas, 275

Manual tuning procedure, 274

Manual/Auto key lockout, 82

Mass flow orifice constant (K) for math selections, 98

Math algorithms, 96, 183

Monitoring two-loop control, 180

Mounting

Overall dimensions, 13

Mounting method, 14

Mounting procedure, 14

Multiplier, 97

Multiplier divider, 97

Multiplier divider with square root, 97

Multiplier with square root, 97

Open Collector Output Connections, 25

Operating limits, 8

Operating parameters, 153

Operation of two-loop control, 181

Operator interface, 3

Options Set Up Group, 129

Output algorithm, 109, 111

Output change rate, 121, 127

Output override, 181

Output override (2 PID loops only), 153

Output Override., 95

Output rate down value, 121, 127

Output rate up value, 121, 127

Override selector, 175

Oxygen, 98

P, Q

Parity, 136

PD with manual reset, 93, 95

Percent carbon source, 99

Physical considerations, 13

PID A, 93, 95

PID B, 93, 95

PID loop selection, 94

Position proportional backup mode, 159

Position Proportional control output calibration, 236

Position proportional output connections, 28

Power up, 148

Printed wiring board identification, 265

Printed wiring board removal, 264

Process gain Loop 2, 90

Program record sheet, 210

Program state, 207

Program termination state, 207

Prompt hierarchy, 36

Proportional band, 80

Proportional band 2, 81

Proportional band units, 123

Protective bonding, 15

PV Tuning, 47

Ramp segments, 206

Ramp unit, 208

Ramp/Soak profile, 205

Ramp/Soak profile example, 209

Ramp/Soak programming, 205

Range values, 220

Rate, 80

Rate 2, 81

Ratio, 114

Recycle number, 206

Relative humidity, 97, 99

Index

4/00 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 279

Relay Output, 22

Remote mode switching, 181

Remote setpoint, 162

Remote setpoint source, 120, 126

Remote switching, 186

Reset, 81

Reset 2, 81

Reset totalizer value, 187

Reset units, 123

Restarting a running SP program, 217

Restoring factory calibration, 231

Restrictions for two-loop control, 175

Reverse acting control, 121, 127

RS422/485 Communications board, 268

Run/Hold key lockout, 82

Run/monitor SP program, 214

Security code, 82

Set Up Group, 36

Setpoint high limit, 121, 126

Setpoint low limit, 121, 126

Setpoint ramp, 85

Setpoint ramp final setpoint, 86

Setpoint Ramp Set Up group, 45

Setpoint ramp time, 85

Setpoint Ramp/Rate/Programming Set Up Group, 85

Setpoint rate, 45, 86

Setpoint Select key lockout, 82

Setpoint selection indication, 162

Setpoint tracking, 120

Setpoint tracking, 126

Shed controller mode and output level, 137

Shed time, 136

Shock hazard warning, 219, 233, 253

Single Setpoint Ramp, 45

Soak segments, 206

Software version, 246

Solid State Relay Output Connections, 23

SP programming tips, 217

SP Tuning, 47

Start segment number, 206

Summer with ratio and bias, 97

T, U, V

Three Position Step, 94

Three Position Step Control algorithm, 182

Time duplex, 109

Time proportional output, 109

Time simplex, 109

Timer, 96

Totalizer displays, 184

Totalizer function, 107, 184

Totalizer reset via digital input, 185

Transmitter characterization, 113

Tuning 2 Set Up group, 44

Tuning constant values, 169

Tuning parameter sets, 118

Tuning parameter sets—Loop 2, 124

Tuning parameters, 179

Two HLAI replace second LLAI connections, 21

W, X, Y, Z

WARNING—SHOCK HAZARD, 219, 233, 253

Weighted average ratio, 98

Wiring diagram, 18

Index

280 UDC 3300 Controller Product Manual 4/00

Sensing and Control

Honeywell

11 West Spring Street

Freeport, IL 61032

51-52-25-55 Rev. D 0400 Printed in USA www.honeywell.com/sensing

Honeywell Universal Digital Controller Udc 3300 Users Manual

UDC 3300 to the manual 91c200c6-83ea-41d6-9a2d-4cbdebe83b07

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation